PG.74A.01.T.E Brochure

1000500965-Brochure 1000500965-Brochure 1000500965-Brochure B6 unilog cesco-content

2016-10-27

: Pdf 1000349133-Brochure 1000349133-Brochure B6 unilog

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 192 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 1

Circuit Breaker Electronic Catalog

Navigation Chart of Attached CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

■Product Guide

■Selection Data

■Time Current

Curves

■Dimensions

Miniature and Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Table of Contents

Miniature Circuit Breakers

Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

QUICKLAG® Industrial Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breakers, Plug-on Types HQP, QPHW,

QHPX, QHPW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Ground Fault Circuit Breakers, Plug-on Types

QPGF, QPHGF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Ground Fault Equipment Protectors, Plug-on Types

QPGFEP, QPHGFEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Circuit Breakers, Bolt-on Types BA, QBHW, HBAX,

HBAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Ground Fault Circuit Breakers, Bolt-on Types

QBGF, QBHGF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Ground Fault Equipment Protectors, Bolt-on Types

QBGFEP, QBHGFEP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Circuit Breakers, Cable-in/Cable-out

1-Inch per Pole Types QC, QCHW, QHCX, QHCW . . . 9

1/2-Inch per Pole Types QCR, QCF, QCRH, QCFH. . . 10

Ground Fault Circuit Breakers, Cable-in/Cable-out

Types QCGF, QCHGF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Ground Fault Equipment Protectors, Cable-in/

Cable-out Types QPGFEP, QCHGFEP. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Solenoid-operated, Remote-controlled Types

GHBS, GBHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

International Rated Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Special Application Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Factory Modifications, Factory Installed Terminals . . . 19

Supplementary Protectors

Type SPCL Current Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Type SPHM Hydraulic Magnetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Series C Circuit Breakers

G-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

F-Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

J-Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

K-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

L-Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

M-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

N-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

R-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Specific Application Circuit Breakers

Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Earth Leakage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Current Limiting

Non-fused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Fused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Engine Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Direct Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Mining Service . . . . . . . . . . . .See CD-ROM SA.74A.01.T.E

Navy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See CD-ROM SA.74A.01.T.E

Add-on Ground Fault Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Internal Accessories

Alarm Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Auxiliary Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Auxiliary and Alarm Switch Combination . . . . . . . . . . 145

Shunt Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Low Energy Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Undervoltage Release Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Communication Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

External Accessories

Termination Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Mounting Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Locking Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Interlocking Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Electric Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Plug-in Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Rear Connecting Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Panelboard Connecting Straps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Circuit Breaker Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Website: www.cutlerhammer.eaton.com

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

2March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

Selection Guide

Circuit Breaker Type Codes: P Plug-in; B Bolt-on; C Cable-in/Cable-out; GF Ground Fault, 5 ma; GFEP Ground Fault, 30 ma.

For Types SPCL and SPHM Supplementary Protectors, see pages 20 and 23.

For Types GHBS and GBHS Solenoid-operated, Remote-controlled Circuit Breakers, see page 14.

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Circuit

Breaker

Type Code

Cont.

Ampere

Rating

At 40°C

Number

Poles

Volts Federal

Spec.

W-C-375b

Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes Page

Number

Ac Dc Ac Ratings Volts Dc➁

120 120/240 240 24-48 62.5 80

Quicklag Industrial Circuit Breakers➀

Plug-in, Bolt-on, Cable-in/Cable-out

HQP

P 10-70

10-125

10-100

2, 3

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a

10b, 11b, 12b

–

10,000

–

10,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

QPHW

P 15-70

15-125

15-100

2, 3

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

14a

14b

–

22,000

–

22,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

QHPX

P 15-70

15-100

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

42,000

–

42,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

QHPW

P 15-30

15-30

15-20

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

15a

15b

–

65,000

–

65,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

QPGF

P, GF 15-40

15-50

120

120/240

–

10a, 11a, 12a

10,000

–

10,000

–

QPHGF

P, GF 15-30

15-50

120

120/240

–

10a, 11a, 12a

22,000

–

22,000

–

QPGFEP

P, GFEP 15-40

15-50

120

120/240

–

10,000

–

10,000

–

QPHGFEP

P, GFEP 15-30

15-30

120

120/240

–

22,000

–

22,000

–

BAB

B 10-70

10-125

10-100

2, 3

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a

10b, 11b, 12b

–

10,000

–

10,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

QBHW

B 15-70

15-125

15-100

2, 3

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

14a

14b

–

22,000

–

22,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

HBAX

B 15-70

15-100

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

42,000

–

42,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

HBAW

B 15-30

15-30

15-20

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

15a

15b

–

65,000

–

65,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

QBGF

B, GF 15-40

15-50

120

120/240

–

10a, 11a, 12a

10,000

–

10,000

–

QBHGF

B, GF 15-30

15-30

120

120/240

–

10a, 11a, 12a

22,000

–

22,000

–

QBGFEP

B, GFEP 15-40

15-50

120

120/240

–

10,000

–

10,000

–

QBHGFEP

B, GFEP 15-30

15-30

120

120/240

–

22,000

–

22,000

–

C 10-70

10-100

2, 3, 4

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

10a, 11a, 12a

10a, 12a

10b, 11b, 12b

–

10,000

–

10,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

QCF

QCR

C 10-60

15-20

15-30

10-60

15-20

15-30

1, 2

2, 3

1, 2

2, 3

120/240

240

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

–

10,000

22,000

–

10,000

22,000

–

10,000

–

10,000

–

10,000

–

3,000

➂

3,000

2,000

3,000

–

QCHW

C 15-70

15-100

2, 3

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

14a

14b

–

22,000

–

22,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

QHCX

C 15-70

15-100

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

42,000

–

42,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

QHCW

C 15-30

15-30

15-20

120/240

240

24, 48, 62.5

24, 48, 80

–

15a

15b

–

65,000

–

65,000

5,000

–

➂

5,000

–

5,000

–

QCGF

C, GF 15-40

15-50

120

120/240

–

10,000

–

10,000

–

QCHGF

C, GF 15-30

15-30

120

120/240

–

22,000

–

22,000

–

QCGFEP

C, GFEP 15-40

15-50

120

120/240

–

10,000

–

10,000

–

QCHGFEP

C, GFEP 15-30

15-30

120

120/240

–

22,000

–

22,000

–

➁Two-pole dc interrupting ratings based on

2 poles connected in series.

➀QUICKLAG circuit breakers are suitable for

application in relative humidity 0-95% non-

condensating.

➂62.5 Vac interrupting rating is 3800 AIC 10-50

amperes and 2500 AIC 55-100 amperes

continuous.

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 3

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Selection Guide

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Cont.

Amp

Rating

At 40°C

No.

Poles

Volts Type

Trip➀

Federal

Spec.

W-C-375b

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes Page

Number

Ac Dc Ac Ratings Volts Dc➁

120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250

Series C® Industrial Circuit Breakers

G-Frame

15-100

2, 3

120

240

125

125/250

N.I.T. 11a

10b, 11b,

12b, 14b,

15b

65,000

–

65,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

GHB

15-100

2, 3

120

240

277

277/480

125

125/250

125

125/250

N.I.T. 11a

10b, 11b,

12b, 14b,

15b

12c, 13a

13b

65,000

–

65,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

15-100

2, 3

120

240

125

125/250

N.I.T. 11a

10b, 11b,

12b, 14b,

15b

65,000

–

65,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

GHC

15-100

2, 3

120

240

277

277/480

125

125/250

125

125/250

N.I.T. 12c, 13a

13b

12c, 13a

13b

65,000

–

65,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

–

14,000

F-Frame

GD 15-100 3 480 250 N.I.T. 13b – – 65,000 – 22,000 – – 10,000 – 26

EDH

EDC

100-255

2, 3

240

125

N.I.T. 12b

14b

–

65,000

100,000

200,000

–

10,000

–

EHD

15-100

2, 3

277

480

125

250

N.I.T. 13a

13b

–

18,000

14,000

–

14,000

–

10,000

–

10,000

–

FDB

15-150

2, 3

600

250

N.I.T. 18a

➂

–

18,000

–

14,000

–

10,000

–

15-150

2, 3

277

600

125

250

N.I.T. 13a

22a

➂

–

65,000

25,000

–

25,000

–

18,000

10,000

–

10,000

–

HFD

15-150

2,3

277

600

125

250

N.I.T. 13a

22a

➂

–

100,000

65,000

–

65,000

–

25,000

10,000

–

20,000

–

FDC

15-150

2, 3

600

250

N.I.T. 24a

➂

–

200,000

–

100,000

35,000

–

20,000

–

J-Frame

JDB

HJD

JDC

70-250

2, 3

2, 3, 4

600

250

N.I.T.

I.T

22a

–

65,000

100,000

200,000

–

25,000

65,000

100,000

18,000

25,000

35,000

–

10,000

22,000

–

K-Frame

DK 250-400 2, 3 240 250 N.I.T. 14b – – 65,000 – – – – 10,000 – 47

KDB

CKD

HKD

CHKD

KDC

100-400

2, 3

2, 3, 4

600

250

N.I.T.

I.T

23a

–

65,000

100,000

200,000

–

35,000

65,000

100,000

25,000

35,000

50,000

–

10,000

22,000

–

45, 46, 49

48, 50

45, 46, 49

48, 50

45, 46, 49

L-Frame

LDB

CLD

HLD

CHLD

LDC

CLDC

300-600

2, 3

2, 3, 4

600

250

N.I.T.

I.T

23a

–

65,000

100,000

200,000

–

35,000

65,000

100,000

25,000

35,000

50,000

–

22,000

25,000

–

57, 59

58, 61

57, 59

57, 60

➀N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and

I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.

➁Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of

three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.

➂Not defined in W-C-375b.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

4March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

Standards

Selection Guide

, Continued

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Cont.

Amp

Rating

At 40°C

No.

Poles

Volts Type

Trip➀

Federal

Spec.

W-C-375b

UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes Page

Number

Ac Dc Ac Ratings Volts Dc➁

120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250

Series C® Industrial Circuit Breakers

M-Frame

MDL

CMDL

HMDL

CHMDL

300-800

2, 3

600

250

I.T.

23a

–

65,000

100,000

–

50,000

65,000

25,000

35,000

–

22,000

25,000

–

69, 70

N-Frame

CND

HND

CHND

NDC

CNDC

600-1200

3, 4

600

–

N.I.T.

23A

–

65,000

100,000

200,000

–

50,000

65,000

100,000

25,000

35,000

50,000

–

77, 83

80, 84

78, 83

81, 84

79, 83

82, 84

R-Frame

RD 1600

CRD 1600

RD 2000

RD 2500

CRD 2000

RDC 1600

CRDC 1600

RDC 2000

RDC 2500

CRDC 2000

800-1600

1000-2000

1000-2500

1000-2000

800-1600

1000-2000

1000-2500

1000-2000

3, 4

600

–

N.I.T.

24a

25a

–

125,000

200,000

125,000

200,000

–

65,000

100,000

50,000

65,000

–

Series C HMCP Motor Circuit Protectors 107

Current Limit R Current Limiting Circuit Breakers – Non-Fused Type

FCL 15-100 2, 3 480 – N.I.T. – – – 200,000 – 150,000 – – – – 115

LCL 125-400 2, 3 600 – N.I.T. – – – 200,000 – 200,000 100,000 – – – 116

Tri-Pac Current Limiting Circuit Breakers – Fused Type

FB 15-100 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T. 16a, 16b,

17a, 26a

– – 200,000 – 200,000 200,000 – – 100,000 117

LA 70-400 2, 3 600 250 I.T. 16a, 16b,

17a, 26a

– – 200,000 – 200,000 200,000 – – 100,000 118

NB 300-800 2, 3 600 250 I.T. 16b, 17a,

26a

– – 200,000 – 200,000 200,000 – – 100,000 119

PB 600-1600 2, 3 600 250 I.T. 17a, 26a – – 200,000 – 200,000 200,000 – – 100,000 120

➀N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and

I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.

➁Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of

three-pole circuit breaker at 250 Vdc.

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 5

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Plug-on

Description

Built and Listed to UL 489

QUICKLAG Circuit Breakers

Plug-on Type

Type HQP: 10-150 Amperes,

10,000 AIC

Type QPHW: 15-125 Amperes,

22,000 AIC

Type QHPX: 15-100 Amperes,

42,000 AIC

Type QHPW: 15-30 Amperes,

65,000 AIC

Breaker Catalog Numbers

Continuous Ampere

Rating at

40°C

Catalog Number

1-Pole➀➁ 2-Pole➀➁ 3-Pole➀➁

120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac

QUICKLAG Type: HQP 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

100

110

125

150

HQP1010

HQP1015➂➃

HQP1020➂➃

HQP1025

HQP1030

HQP1035

HQP1040

HQP1045

HQP1050

HQP1055

HQP1060

HQP1070

–

HQP1100

–

HQP2010

HQP2015

HQP2020

HQP2025

HQP2030

HQP2035

HQP2040

HQP2045

HQP2050

HQP2055

HQP2060

HQP2070

HQP2080

HQP2090

HQP2100

HQP2110

HQP2125

HQP2150

HQP2010H

HQP2015H

HQP2020H

HQP2025H

HQP2030H

HQP2035H

HQP2040H

HQP2045H

HQP2050H

HQP2055H

HQP2060H

HQP2070H

HQP2080H

HQP2090H

HQP2100H

–

HQP3010H

HQP3015H

HQP3020H

HQP3025H

HQP3030H

HQP3035H

HQP3040H

HQP3045H

HQP3050H

HQP3055H

HQP3060H

HQP3070H

HQP3080H

HQP3090H

HQP3100H

–

QUICKLAG Type: QPHW 22,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

100

110

125

QPHW1015➂

QPHW1020➂

QPHW1025

QPHW1030

QPHW1035

QPHW1040

QPHW1045

QPHW1050

QPHW1055

QPHW1060

QPHW1070

–

QPHW2015

QPHW2020

QPHW2025

QPHW2030

QPHW2035

QPHW2040

QPHW2045

QPHW2050

QPHW2055

QPHW2060

QPHW2070

QPHW2080

QPHW2090

QPHW2100

QPHW2110

QPHW2125

QPHW2015H

QPHW2020H

QPHW2025H

QPHW2030H

QPHW2035H

QPHW2040H

QPHW2045H

QPHW2050H

QPHW2055H

QPHW2060H

QPHW2070H

QPHW2080H

QPHW2090H

QPHW2100H

–

QPHW3015H

QPHW3020H

QPHW3025H

QPHW3030H

QPHW3035H

QPHW3040H

QPHW3045H

QPHW3050H

QPHW3055H

QPHW3060H

QPHW3070H

QPHW3080H

QPHW3090H

QPHW3100H

–

QUICKLAG Type: QHPX 42,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

100

QHPX1015➂

QHPX1020➂

QHPX1025

QHPX1030

QHPX1035

QHPX1040

QHPX1045

QHPX1050

QHPX1055

QHPX1060

QHPX1070

–

QHPX2015

QHPX2020

QHPX2025

QHPX2030

QHPX2035

QHPX2040

QHPX2045

QHPX2050

QHPX2055

QHPX2060

QHPX2070

QHPX2080

QHPX2090

QHPX2100

–

QHPX3015H

QHPX3020H

QHPX3025H

QHPX3030H

QHPX3035H

QHPX3040H

QHPX3045H

QHPX3050H

QHPX3055H

QHPX3060H

QHPX3070H

QHPX3080H

QHPX3090H

QHPX3100H

QUICKLAG Type: QHPW 65,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QHPW1015➂

QHPW1020➂

QHPW1025

QHPW1030

QHPW2015

QHPW2020

QHPW2025

QHPW2030

–

QHPW3015H

QHPW3020H

–

Shipping Data

Poles Carton

Quantity

Approximate

Weight Lbs. (Kgs)

Dimensions

Inches (mm)

9.000 (4.09)

12.500 (317.50) x 7.500 (190.50) x 5.000 (127.00)

QUICKLAG Type HQP 1-Pole

QUICKLAG Type HQP 2-Pole

QUICKLAG Type HQP 3-Pole

➀All products UL and CSA listed.

➁All products 15-100A are HACR rated.

➂Switching duty rated for 120 Vac

fluorescent light applications.

➃For special low-magnetic breaker order

HQP1015L1 or HQP1020L1

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

6March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Breakers and Equipment Protectors Plug-on

Description

Plug-on Type

Built and Listed to UL 489

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit

Breakers, Class A GFCI

Built and Tested to UL 943

5mA Trip Sensitivity

Type QPGF: 15-50 Amperes,

10,000 AIC

Type QPHGF: 15-30 Amperes,

22,000 AIC

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Equipment

Protectors

Built and Listed to UL 1053

30mA Trip Sensitivity

Type QPGFEP: 15-50 Amperes,

10,000 AIC

Type QPHGFEP: 15-30 Amperes,

22,000 AIC

QUICKLAG Type QPGF 1-Pole

Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

QUICKLAG Type QPGF 2-Pole

Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

Shipping Data

Shipped individually or in carton

quantities.

Poles Carton

Quantity

Approximate

Weight Lbs. (Kgs)

Dimensions

Inches (mm)

11.000 (4.99)

5.000 (2.29)

12.500 (317.50) x

6.500 (165.10) x

5.000 (127.00)

15.500 (393.70) x

6.000 (152.40) x

4.500 (114.30)

Blue Wire

Red Wire

Black Wire

Ground

Fault

Breaker

Single-throw double-pole contacts are UL and CSA listed for 5 Amperes at 250 Vac.

Bell Alarm (W1) – contacts change state when breaker trips.

Auxiliary Switch (W2) – contacts change state when breaker is opened (or tripped) or closed.

14-inch long #18 AWG pigtail wire leads provided.

Bell Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Schematic

Blue

Red

Breaker Catalog Numbers

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at

40°C

Catalog Number

1-Pole 2-Pole

120 Vac 120/240 Vac

Ground Fault Circuit Breakers – 5mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QPGF 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QPGF1015

QPGF1020

QPGF1025

QPGF1030

QPGF1040

–

QPGF2015

QPGF2020

QPGF2025

QPGF2030

QPGF2040

QPGF2050

QUICKLAG Type: QPHGF 22,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QPHGF1015

QPHGF1020

QPHGF1025

QPHGF1030

QPHGF2015

QPHGF2020

QPHGF2025

QPHGF2030

Ground Fault Equipment Protectors – 30mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QPGFEP 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QPGFEP1015

QPGFEP1020

QPGFEP1025

QPGFEP1030

QPGFEP1040

–

QPGFEP2015

QPGFEP2020

QPGFEP2025

QPGFEP2030

QPGFEP2040

QPGFEP2050

QUICKLAG Type: QPHGFEP 22,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QPHGFEP1015

QPHGFEP1020

QPHGFEP1025

QPHGFEP1030

QPHGFEP2015

QPHGFEP2020

QPHGHEP2025

QPHGFEP2030

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors – 5mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QPGF 10,000 Ampere I.C. with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2)

QPGF1015W1

QPGF1020W1

QPGF1025W1

QPGF1030W1

–

QPGF2015W1

QPGF2020W1

QPGF2025W1

QPGF2030W1

QPGF2040W1

QPGF2050W1

QPGF1015W2

QPGF1020W2

QPGF1025W2

QPGF1030W2

–

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors – 30mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QPGFEP 10,000 Ampere I.C. with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2)

QPGFEP1015W1

QPGFEP1020W1

QPGFEP1025W1

QPGFEP1030W1

–

QPGFEP2015W1

QPGFEP2020W1

QPGFEP2025W1

QPGFEP2030W1

QPGFEP2040W1

QPGFEP2050W1

QPGFEP1015W2

QPGFEP1020W2

QPGFEP1025W2

QPGFEP1030W2

–

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 7

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Bolt-on

Description

Built and Listed to UL 489

QUICKLAG Circuit Breakers

Bolt-on Type

Type BA: 10-125 Amperes,

10,000 AIC

Type QBHW: 15-125 Amperes,

22,000 AIC

Type HBAX: 15-100 Amperes,

42,000 AIC

Type HBAW: 15-30 Amperes,

65,000 AIC

QUICKLAG Type BA 1-Pole

QUICKLAG

Type BA 3-Pole

QUICKLAG Type BA 2-Pole

Breaker Catalog Numbers

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at

40°C

Catalog Number

1-Pole➀➁ 2-Pole➀➁ 3-Pole➀➁

120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac

QUICKLAG Type: BA 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

100

110

125

BAB1010

BAB1015➂➃

BAB1020➂➃

BAB1025

BAB1030

BAB1035

BAB1040

BAB1045

BAB1050

BAB1055

BAB1060

BAB1070

–

BAB1100

–

BAB2010

BAB2015

BAB2020

BAB2025

BAB2030

BAB2035

BAB2040

BAB2045

BAB2050

BAB2055

BAB2060

BAB2070

BAB2080

BAB2090

BAB2100

BAB2110

BAB2125

BAB2010H

BAB2015H

BAB2020H

BAB2025H

BAB2030H

BAB2035H

BAB2040H

BAB2045H

BAB2050H

BAB2055H

BAB2060H

BAB2070H

BAB2080H

BAB2090H

BAB2100H

–

BAB3010H

BAB3015H

BAB3020H

BAB3025H

BAB3030H

BAB3035H

BAB3040H

BAB3045H

BAB3050H

BAB3055H

BAB3060H

BAB3070H

BAB3080H

BAB3090H

BAB3100H

–

QUICKLAG Type: QBHW 22,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

100

110

125

QBHW1015➂

QBHW1020➂

QBHW1025

QBHW1030

QBHW1035

QBHW1040

QBHW1045

QBHW1050

QBHW1055

QBHW1060

QBHW1070

–

QBHW2015

QBHW2020

QBHW2025

QBHW2030

QBHW2035

QBHW2040

QBHW2045

QBHW2050

QBHW2055

QBHW2060

QBHW2070

QBHW2080

QBHW2090

QBHW2100

QBHW2110

QBHW2125

QBHW2015H

QBHW2020H

QBHW2025H

QBHW2030H

QBHW2035H

QBHW2040H

QBHW2045H

QBHW2050H

QBHW2055H

QBHW2060H

QBHW2070H

QBHW2080H

QBHW2090H

QBHW2100H

–

QBHW3015H

QBHW3020H

QBHW3025H

QBHW3030H

QBHW3035H

QBHW3040H

QBHW3045H

QBHW3050H

QBHW3055H

QBHW3060H

QBHW3070H

QBHW3080H

QBHW3090H

QBHW3100H

–

QUICKLAG Type: HBAX 42,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

100

HBAX1015➂

HBAX1020➂

HBAX1025

HBAX1030

HBAX1035

HBAX1040

HBAX1045

HBAX1050

HBAX1055

HBAX1060

HBAX1070

–

HBAX2015

HBAX2020

HBAX2025

HBAX2030

HBAX2035

HBAX2040

HBAX2045

HBAX2050

HBAX2055

HBAX2060

HBAX2070

HBAX2080

HBAX2090

HBAX2100

–

HBAX3015H

HBAX3020H

HBAX3025H

HBAX3030H

HBAX3035H

HBAX3040H

HBAX3045H

HBAX3050H

HBAX3055H

HBAX3060H

HBAX3070H

HBAX3080H

HBAX3090H

HBAX3100H

QUICKLAG Type: HBAW 65,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

HBAW1015➂

HBAW1020➂

HBAW1025

HBAW1030

HBAW2015

HBAW2020

HBAW2025

HBAW2030

–

HBAW3015H

HBAW3020H

–

Shipping Data

Poles Carton

Quantity

Approximate

Weight Lbs. (Kgs)

Dimensions Inches (mm)

9.000 (4.09)

12.500 (317.50) x 7.500 (190.50) x 5.000 (127.00)

➀All products UL and CSA listed.

➁All products 15-100A are HACR rated.

➂Switching duty rated for 120 Vac

fluorescent light applications.

➃For special low-magnetic breaker order

BAB1015L1 or BAB1020L1.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

8March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors Bolt-on

Description

Bolt-on Type

Built and Listed to UL 489

QUICKLAG Ground Fault Circuit

Breakers, Class A GFCI

Built and Tested to UL 943

5mA Trip Sensitivity

Type QBGF: 15-50 Amperes,

10,000 AIC

Type QBHGF: 15-30 Amperes,

22,000 AIC

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

Equipment Protectors

Built and Tested to UL 1053

30mA Trip Sensitivity

Type QBGFEP: 15-50 Amperes,

10,000 AIC

Type QBHGFEP: 15-30 Amperes,

22,000 AIC

QUICKLAG Type QBGF 1-Pole

Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

QUICKLAG Type QBGF 2-Pole

Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

Breaker Catalog Numbers

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at

40°C

Catalog Number

1-Pole 2-Pole

120 Vac 120/240 Vac

Ground Fault Circuit Breakers – 5mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QBGF 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QBGF1015

QBGF1020

QBGF1025

QBGF1030

QBGF1040

–

QBGF2015

QBGF2020

QBGF2025

QBGF2030

QBGF2040

QBGF2050

QUICKLAG Type: QBHGF 22,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QBHGF1015

QBHGF1020

QBHGF1025

QBHGF1030

QBHGF2015

QBHGF2020

QBHGF2025

QBHGF2030

Ground Fault Equipment Protectors – 30mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QBGFEP 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QBGFEP1015

QBGFEP1020

QBGFEP1025

QBGFEP1030

QBGFEP1040

–

QBGFEP2015

QBGFEP2020

QBGFEP2025

QBGFEP2030

QBGFEP2040

QBGFEP2050

QUICKLAG Type: QBHGFEP 22,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QBHGFEP1015

QBHGFEP1020

QBHGFEP1025

QBHGFEP1030

QBHGFEP2015

QBHGFEP2020

QBHGFEP2025

QBHGFEP2030

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors – 5mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QBGF 10,000 Ampere I.C. with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2)

QBGF1015W1

QBGF1020W1

QBGF1025W1

QBGF1030W1

–

QBGF2015W1

QBGF2020W1

QBGF2025W1

QBGF2030W1

QBGF2040W1

QBGF2050W1

QBGF1015W2

QBGF1020W2

QBGF1025W2

QBGF1030W2

–

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protectors – 30mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QBGFEP 10,000 Ampere I.C. with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2)

QBGFEP1015W1

QBGFEP1020W1

QBGFEP1025W1

QBGFEP1030W1

–

QBGFEP2015W1

QBGFEP2020W1

QBGFEP2025W1

QBGFEP2030W1

QBGFEP2040W1

QBGFEP2050W1

QBGFEP1015W2

QBGFEP1020W2

QBGFEP1025W2

QBGFEP1030W2

–

Shipping Data

Poles Carton

Quantity

Approximate

Weight Lbs.

(Kgs)

Dimensions

Inches (mm)

11.000 (4.99)

5.000 (2.29)

12.500 (317.50)

x 6.500 (165.10)

x 5.000 (127.00)

15.500 (393.70)

x 6.000 (152.40)

x 4.500 (114.30)

Blue Wire

Red Wire

Black Wire

Ground

Fault

Breaker

Single-throw double-pole contacts are UL and CSA listed for 5 Amperes at 250 Vac.

Bell Alarm (W1) – contacts change state when breaker trips.

Auxiliary Switch (W2) – contacts change state when breaker is opened (or tripped) or closed.

14-inch long #18 AWG pigtail wire leads provided.

Bell Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Schematic

Blue

Red

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 9

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Cable-in/Cable-out (1 inch per pole)

Breaker Catalog Numbers

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at

40°C

Catalog Number

1-Pole➀➁ 2-Pole➀➁ 3-Pole➀➁ 4-Pole➀➁

120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac

QUICKLAG Type: QC 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

100

QC1010

QC1015➂➃

QC1020➂➃

QC1025

QC1030

QC1035

QC1040

QC1045

QC1050

QC1055

QC1060

QC1070

–

QC1100

QC2010

QC2015

QC2020

QC2025

QC2030

QC2035

QC2040

QC2045

QC2050

QC2055

QC2060

QC2070

QC2080

QC2090

QC2100

QC2010H

QC2015H

QC2020H

QC2025H

QC2030H

QC2035H

QC2040H

QC2045H

QC2050H

QC2055H

QC2060H

QC2070H

QC2080H

QC2090H

QC2100H

QC3010H

QC3015H

QC3020H

QC3025H

QC3030H

QC3035H

QC3040H

QC3045H

QC3050H

QC3055H

QC3060H

QC3070H

QC3080H

QC3090H

QC3100H

QC4010H

QC4015H

QC4020H

QC4025H

QC4030H

QC4035H

QC4040H

QC4045H

QC4050H

QC4055H

QC4060H

QC4070H

QC4080H

QC4090H

QC4100H

QUICKLAG Type: QCHW 22,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

100

QCHW1015➂

QCHW1020➂

QCHW1025

QCHW1030

QCHW1035

QCHW1040

QCHW1045

QCHW1050

QCHW1055

QCHW1060

QCHW1070

–

QCHW2015

QCHW2020

QCHW2025

QCHW2030

QCHW2035

QCHW2040

QCHW2045

QCHW2050

QCHW2055

QCHW2060

QCHW2070

QCHW2080

QCHW2090

QCHW2100

QCHW2015H

QCHW2020H

QCHW2025H

QCHW2030H

QCHW2035H

QCHW2040H

QCHW2045H

QCHW2050H

QCHW2055H

QCHW2060H

QCHW2070H

QCHW2080H

QCHW2090H

QCHW2100H

QCHW3015H

QCHW3020H

QCHW3025H

QCHW3030H

QCHW3035H

QCHW3040H

QCHW3045H

QCHW3050H

QCHW3055H

QCHW3060H

QCHW3070H

QCHW3080H

QCHW3090H

QCHW3100H

QCHW4015H

QCHW4020H

QCHW4025H

QCHW4030H

QCHW4035H

QCHW4040H

QCHW4045H

QCHW4050H

QCHW4055H

QCHW4060H

QCHW4070H

QCHW4080H

QCHW4090H

QCHW4100H

QUICKLAG Type: QHCX 42,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

100

QHCX1015➂

QHCX1020➂

QHCX1025

QHCX1030

QHCX1035

QHCX1040

QHCX1045

QHCX1050

QHCX1055

QHCX1060

QHCX1070

–

QHCX2015

QHCX2020

QHCX2025

QHCX2030

QHCX2035

QHCX2040

QHCX2045

QHCX2050

QHCX2055

QHCX2060

QHCX2070

QHCX2080

QHCX2090

QHCX2100

–

QHCX3015H

QHCX3020H

QHCX3025H

QHCX3030H

QHCX3035H

QHCX3040H

QHCX3045H

QHCX3050H

QHCX3055H

QHCX3060H

QHCX3070H

QHCX3080H

QHCX3090H

QHCX3100H

–

QUICKLAG Type: QHCW 65,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QHCW1015➂

QHCW1020➂

QHCW1025

QHCW1030

QHCW2015

QHCW2020

QHCW2025

QHCW2030

–

QHCW3015H

QHCW3020H

–

QUICKLAG Type QC 4-Pole

Description

Built and Listed to UL 489

QUICKLAG Circuit Breakers

Cable-in/Cable-out Type

Type QC: 10-100 Amperes,

10,000 AIC

Type QCHW: 15-100 Amperes,

22,000 AIC

Type QHCX: 15-100 Amperes,

42,000 AIC

Type QHCW: 15-30 Amperes,

65,000 AIC

QUICKLAG Type QC 1-Pole

QUICKLAG Type QC 3-Pole

➀All products UL and CSA listed.

➁All products 10-100A are HACR rated.

➂Switching duty rated for 120 Vac

fluorescent light applications only.

➃For special low-magnetic breaker order

QC1015L1 or QC1020L1.

Shipping Data

Poles Carton

Quantity

Approximate

Weight Lbs. (Kgs)

Dimensions Inches (mm)

9.000 (4.09)

12.500 (317.50) x 7.500 (190.50) x 5.000 (127.00)

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

10 March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Cable-in/Cable-out (1/2 inch per pole)

Description

Built and Listed to UL 489

Type QCR and QCF Circuit Breakers

are UL listed Circuit Breakers that

are suitable for use as branch circuit

protectors.

Applications

QCR and QCF Circuit Breakers are

only 1/2-inch wide per pole and

are excellent for general purpose

industrial applications where space

savings is required.

Product Features and Ratings

■1/2-inch wide per pole

■Cable-in/Cable-out

■Black cases with black handles

■Three position handle: ON,

Tripped (center), OFF

■Thermal-Magnetic Protection

■UL File E7819

■CSA File LR48907

■One, two and three pole

■10 kAIC at 120/240 Vac,

10-60 Amperes

■22 kAIC at 120/240 Vac,

15-20 Amperes

■10 kAIC at 240 Vac, 10-30 Amperes

■3 kAIC at 62.5 Vdc (1 Pole)

■3 kAIC at 130 Vdc (2 Poles

in Series)

■Normal Operating Environment:

0-40°C

5-95% Humidity

(Non-Condensating)

Additional Ratings

In addition to the ratings shown for

the 1/2-inch wide QCR and QCF, the

complete QC breaker line includes:

■1-4 Poles

■5-100 Amperes

■10 through 65 kAIC

■120/240 and 240 Vac

■1-inch per pole

QCR (Rear-Mounted Breakers) QCF (Front-Mounted Breakers)

1-Pole 2-Pole 1-Pole 2-Pole

Type QCF have two threaded steel

inserts to facilitate front mounting

with #6-32 steel screws. The clamp

type terminals accessible from the

rear of the breaker so that cables can

be accessed without removal of the

breaker from the front cover.

Type QCR have as a standard feature

provisions for 35mm DIN-Rail rear

mounting with a spring-loaded

release. Optional clips for individual

mounting are available as a separate

accessory.

QCR 1-Pole Breaker with QCRMTGFT

Clips (Qty. 2) Individually Mounted

QCF Breaker Front Panel Mounted

QCR (Rear-Mounted Breakers)

3-Pole

QCF (Front-Mounted Breakers)

3-Pole

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 11

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Cable-in/Cable-out (1/2 inch per pole)

Breaker Catalog Numbers➀➁➂➃

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at

40°C

QCR Breaker 10 kAIC Interruption Ratings➄QCF Breaker 10 kAIC Interruption Ratings➄

120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac➅120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac➅

1-Pole 2-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 1-Pole 2-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

QCR Breaker 10 kAIC Interruption Ratings➄QCF Breaker 10 kAIC Interruption Ratings➄

10 QCR1010

QCR1010T

–

QCR2010

QCR2010T

QCR2010P

–

QCF1010

QCF1010T

–

QCF2010

QCF2010T

–

15 QCR1015➆

QCR1015T➆

–

QCR2015

QCR2015T

QCR2015P

QCR2015H

QCR2015HT

–

QCR3015H

QCR3015HT

–

QCF1015➁

QCF1015T➁

–

QCF2015

QCF2015T

–

QCF2015H

QCF2015HT

–

QCF3015H

QCF3015HT

–

20 QCR1020➆

QCR1020T➆

–

QCR2020

QCR2020T

QCR2020P

QCR2020H

QCR2020HT

–

QCR3020H

QCR3020HT

–

QCF1020➁

QCF1020T➁

–

QCF2020

QCF2020T

–

QCF2020H

QCF2020HT

–

QCF3020H

QCF3020HT

–

25 QCR1025

QCR1025T

–

QCR2025

QCR2025T

QCR2025P

QCR2025H

QCR2025HT

–

QCR3025H

QCR3025HT

–

QCF1025

QCF1025T

–

QCF2025

QCF2025T

–

QCF2025H

QCF2025HT

–

QCF3025H

QCF3025HT

–

30 QCR1030

QCR1030T

–

QCR2030

QCR2030T

QCR2030P

QCR2030H

QCR2030HT

–

QCR3030H

QCR3030HT

–

QCF1030

QCF1030T

–

QCF2030

QCF2030T

–

QCF2030H

QCF2030HT

–

QCF3030H

QCF3030HT

–

35 QCR1035

–

QCR2035

QCR2035P

–

QCF1035

–

QCF2035

–

40 QCR1040

–

QCR2040

QCR2040P

–

QCF1040

–

QCF2040

–

45 QCR1045

–

QCR2045

QCR2045P

–

QCF1045

–

QCF2045

–

50 QCR1050

–

QCR2050

QCR2050P

–

QCF1050

–

QCF2050

–

55 QCR1055

–

QCR2055

QCR2055P

–

QCF1055

–

QCF2055

–

60➇QCR1060

–

QCR2060

QCR2060P

–

QCF1060

–

QCF2060

–

QCR Breaker 22 kAIC Interruption Ratings QCF Breaker 22 kAIC Interruption Ratings

15 QCRH1015➆

QCRH1015T➆

QCRH2015

QCRH2015T

–

QCFH1015➆

QCFH1015T➆

QCFH2015

QCFH2015T

–

20 QCRH1020➆

QCRH1020T➆

QCRH2020

QCRH2020T

–

QCFH1020➆

QCFH1020T➆

QCFH2020

QCFH2020T

–

Available QCR and QCF Breaker Accessories

Catalog Number Description

QCRMTGFT Steel mounting clip mounts QCR breaker if individual mounting is required. Quantity two required for 1- and 2-pole and four required

for 3-pole breakers.

QCRFPL1P Removable padlock device for single-pole QCR or QCF breaker.

QCRFPLMP Removable padlock device for multi-pole QCR or QCF breaker.

QCRFLOFF Padlock bracket assembly for QCR or QCF single or multi-pole breakers (off only).

➀Standard breaker terminals are box type

lugs.

➁Breakers with “T” Catalog Number Suffix are

suitable for line and load side ring terminal

connection (#10-32 plus/minus terminal

screw provided).

➂Breakers with “P” Catalog Number Suffix are

suitable for terminating 2 #10 AWG Quick-

Connect Type Terminals per phase on

breaker load side.

➃Breakers with Shunt Trip Attachment (extra

pole required on breaker right-hand side) are

available. Contact Cutler-Hammer.

➄All ratings 15 to 60 amperes are HACR rated.

➅Breakers with “H” Catalog Suffix have

240 Vac construction.

➆All 15 and 20 ampere single-pole breakers

are SWD (Switching Duty) rated for fluores-

cent lighting applications.

➇60/75°C Cu/Al wire on all ratings except 60

amperes which requires Cu only conductor.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

12 March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Cable-in/Cable-out (1/2 inch per pole)

QCR and QCF Breaker Factory Installed Terminals

Catalog Suffix “P”

Catalog Suffix “T”

QCR and QCF Standard Box Terminals

Factory installed line and load side

breaker terminal to accommodate

#14 AWG to #4 AWG wire.

QCR Quick-Connect Terminals

Factory installed two-prong quick-

connect terminal on breaker load

side suitable for terminating two

#10 AWG wire with insulated slip-on

terminals as shown. Line side term-

inal is the standard type.

QCR and QCF Ring or

Spade Lug Terminals

(10 to 30 ampere ratings only):

Factory installed line and load side

terminals each equipped with a

#10-32 screw suitable for terminating

one #10 AWG wire with insulated

ring or spade type terminal as shown.

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 13

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Breakers and Equipment Protectors Cable-in/Cable-out

Description

Cable-in/Cable-out Type

Built and Listed to UL 489

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

Circuit Breakers, Class A GFCI

Built and Tested to UL 943

5mA Trip Sensitivity

Type QCGF: 15-50 Amperes,

10,000 AIC

Type QCHGF: 15-30 Amperes,

22,000 AIC

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

Equipment Protectors

Built and Tested to UL 1053

30mA Trip Sensitivity

Type QCGFEP: 15-50 Amperes,

10,000 AIC

Type QCHGFEP: 15-30 Amperes,

22,000 AIC

QUICKLAG Type QCGF 1-Pole

Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

QUICKLAG Type QCGF 2-Pole

Ground Fault Circuit Breaker

Breaker Catalog Numbers

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at

40°C

Catalog Number

1-Pole➀2-Pole➀

120 Vac 120/240 Vac

Ground Fault Circuit Breakers – 5mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QCGF 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QCGF1015

QCGF1020

QCGF1025

QCGF1030

QCGF1040

–

QCGF2015

QCGF2020

QCGF2025

QCGF2030

QCGF2040

QCGF2050

QUICKLAG Type: QCHGF 22,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QCHGF1015

QCHGF1020

QCHGF1025

QCHGF1030

QCHGF2015

QCHGF2020

QCHGF2025

QCHGF2030

Ground Fault Equipment Protectors – 30mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QCGFEP 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QCGFEP1015

QCGFEP1020

QCGFEP1025

QCGFEP1030

QCGFEP1040

–

QCGFEP2015

QCGFEP2020

QCGFEP2025

QCGFEP2030

QCGFEP2040

QCGFEP2050

QUICKLAG Type: QCHGFEP 22,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QCHGFEP1015

QCHGFEP1020

QCHGFEP1025

QCHGFEP1030

QCHGFEP2015

QCHGFEP2020

QCHGFEP2025

QCHGFEP2030

Special Application Ground Fault Circuit Protector – 5mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QCGF 10,000 Ampere I.C. with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2)

QCGF1015W1

QCGF1020W1

QCGF1025W1

QCGF1030W1

–

QCGF2015W1

QCGF2020W1

QCGF2025W1

QCGF2030W1

QCGF2040W1

QCGF2050W1

QCGF1015W2

QCGF1020W2

QCGF1025W2

QCGF1030W2

–

Special Application Ground Fault Equipment Protectors – 30mA Sensitivity

QUICKLAG Type: QCGFEP 10,000 Ampere I.C. with Bell Alarm (W1) or Auxiliary Switch (W2)

QCGFEP1015W1

QCGFEP1020W1

QCGFEP1025W1

QCGFEP1030W1

–

QCGFEP2015W1

QCGFEP2020W1

QCGFEP2025W1

QCGFEP2030W1

QCGFEP2040W1

QCGFEP2050W1

QCGFEP1015W2

QCGFEP1020W2

QCGFEP1025W2

QCGFEP1030W2

–

Blue Wire

Red Wire

Black Wire

Ground

Fault

Breaker

Single-throw double-pole contacts are UL and CSA listed for 5 Amperes at 250 Vac.

Bell Alarm (W1) – contacts change state when breaker trips.

Auxiliary Switch (W2) – contacts change state when breaker is opened (or tripped) or closed.

14-inch long #18 AWG pigtail wire leads provided.

Bell Alarm and Auxiliary Contact Schematic

Blue

Red

➀All products UL and CSA listed.

Shipping Data

Poles Carton

Quantity

Approximate

Weight Lbs.

(Kgs)

Dimensions

Inches (mm)

11.000 (4.99)

5.000 (2.29)

12.500 (317.50) x

6.500 (165.10) x

5.000 (127.00)

15.500 (393.70) x

6.000 (152.40) x

4.500 (114.30)

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

14 March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Types GHBS and GBHS Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled

Description

GHBS and GBHS circuit breakers are

bolt-on branch circuit breakers

designed for use in panelboards and

are ideally suited for lighting control

applications. In addition to provid-

ing conventional branch circuit

protection, they include a unique

solenoid-operated mechanism that

provides for efficient breaker pulse-

on and pulse-off operation when

used with a suitable controller like

the Cutler-Hammer Pow-R-Com-

mand lighting control system.

Product Features

■Bolt-on Line-Side Terminal

■Cable Connected Load-Side

Terminal

■3-Prong Control Terminal (Com-

mon, Solenoid, Auxiliary Switch)

■Bi-Metal Assembly for Thermal

Overload Protection

■Fast Acting Short Circuit

Protection

■Arc-Runner and Arc-Chute

Assembly for Fast Acting Arc

Extinction

■Three Position Handle: OFF, TRIP

(Center), ON

■Handle in “ON” Position Enables

Remote Control

■Handle in “OFF” Position Disables

Remote Control

■Handle Permits Manual Switch-

ing When Control Power is Lost

■Mechanical Trip Indicator Window

(Red-ON, Green-OFF/TRIPPED)

■15 and 20 Ampere Breakers SWD

(Switching Duty) Rated

■HID Ratings for HID (High Inten-

sity Discharge) Lighting

■Auxiliary Switch for Control

Circuit Feedback

➀All UL listed circuit breakers are HID (High

Intensity Discharge) rated.

➁Continuous current rating at 40°C.

Dimensions in parentheses in millimeters.

Dimensions Per Pole, Inches (mm)

Width Height Depth

1.000

(25.40)

4.125

(104.78)

2.810

(71.37)

1-Pole 2-Pole

Terminal Type

For load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below.

Circuit Breaker

Amperes

Terminal

Type

Screw Head

Type

Wire

Type

AWG Wire

Range

15-20 Clamp Slotted Cu/Al #14-#10

30 Box Slotted Cu/Al #14-#2

15-20 Amperes 30 Amperes

GBHS CSA 22.2 Interrupting Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Rating

Amperes➁

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)

347/600

GBHS1015D

GBHS1020D

10,000

GBHS2015D

GBHS2020D

10,000

GHBS UL 489 Interrupting Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type➀

Number of Poles Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes)

Rating

Amperes➁

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)

120 240 277/480

GHBS1015D

GHBS1020D

GHBS1030D

65,000

–

14,000

GHBS2015D

GHBS2020D

GHBS2030D

–

65,000

14,000

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15546

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 15

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

Types GHBS and GBHS Solenoid-Operated, Remote-Controlled

Typical Single-Pole Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram and

Conductor Plug Wiring Connections

Circuit Breaker Schematic Diagram and Conductor Plug Wiring

Connections for 2-Pole

2-Pole Circuit Breaker

SolenoidCommon

28 Vac

Auxiliary

Solenoid

Solenoid a

1/2 Cycle

Maximum

28 Vac

Pulse Source

AMP Inc.

Conductor

Plug

Circuit

Breaker

Open/Closed

Status

Solenoid

Auxiliary

Switch

Common

Conductor

Plug (As Viewed

From End)

Circuit Breaker

Solenoid

Auxiliary

Switch

Common

28 Vac

Common

AMP Inc.

Conductor

Plug

1/2 Cycle

Maximum

28 Vac

Pulse Source

Circuit Breaker

Open/Closed

Status

Conductor

Plug (As

Viewed From

End)

Auxiliary

Remote Control Operation

The remote-control capability of

the breaker is “armed” when the

breaker handle is manually switched

to the “ON” position. Once armed,

the breaker can be pulsed “ON” and

“OFF” by a controller device which

provides an ac pulse of specified

magnitude and duration to the sole-

noid operated mechanism. Control

connections to the breaker are pro-

vided through a male conductor

plug (supplied by others) which

snaps into the female connector

provided with the breaker.

A normally open (a) auxiliary con-

tact provides for breaker “ON”/“OFF”

status indication to the remote

controller and/or indicating lamp.

The remote-control capability of the

breaker is “disarmed” when the

breaker handle is in the “OFF” or

“TRIPPED” position. In the event

the breaker automatically trips, the

breaker must be reset manually.

Breaker Solenoid and

Operating Data

■Ambient Temperature:

0-40° C

■Nominal Pulse Magnitude:

28 volts ac RMS

■Tolerance: +10% to -15% of

Nominal Voltage

■Pulse Duration: 1/2 cycle (8-10 ms)

■Minimum Recommended Pulse

Current at Nominal Voltage:

1-Pole: 4.9 Amperes Peak,

3.5 Amperes RMS

2-Pole: 7.84 Amperes Peak,

5.6 Amperes RMS

■Breaker Operating Time: 20-40 ms

■Maximum Breaker Cycling:

6 Operations per Minute

■Humidity: 0-95% non-Condensing

Wiring Diagrams

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

16 March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG International Rated Industrial Circuit Breakers Plug-on, Bolt-on and Cable-in/Cable-out

Description

QUICKLAG International

Circuit Breakers

Plug-on Type HQP: 10-100 Amperes

Bolt-on Type BA: 10-100 Amperes

Cable-in/Cable-out Type QC:

10-100 Amperes

Built and Test Certified to BS3871,

Pt. 1 50/60 Hz, 40°C

QUICKLAG International Ground

Fault Circuit Breakers

Plug-on Type GFXB: 10-40 Amperes

Bolt-on Type GFXBB: 10-40 Amperes

Cable-in/Cable-out Type GFXBC:

10-40 Amperes

Built and Test Certified to

BS3871, Pt. 1

BS3871, Section 31-C

BS4293

50/60 Hz, 40°C

30 mA Sensitivity

Interrupting Ratings

Suffix E Suffix HE

NEMA

120/240 Vac

10,000 AIC 10,000 AIC

BS3871

220/380,

240/415 Vac

3,000 AIC 6,000 AIC

Interrupting Rating

BS3871

220/380, 240/415 Vac

3,000 AIC

Shipping Data

Miniature

Circuit

Breaker

No.

Poles

Std.

Carton

Qty.

Approx.

Carton

Weight

Lbs.

(Kgs)

Approx.

Standard

Carton

Dimensions

Inches (mm)

QUICKLAG

Types B,

P, C – All

1 24 9.000

(4.09)

12.500 (317.50)

x 7.500 (190.50)

x 5.000 (127.00)

QUICKLAG

Types B,

P, C – All

2 12 9.000

(4.09)

12.500 (317.50)

x 7.500 (190.50)

x 5.000 (127.00)

QUICKLAG

Types B,

P, C – All

3 8 9.000

(4.09)

12.500 (317.50)

x 7.500 (190.50)

x 5.000 (127.00)

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

Type P –

All

1 20 11.000

(4.99)

12.500 (317.50)

x 6.500 (165.10)

x 5.000 (127.00)

Types B

and

C – All

1 20 11.000

(4.99)

12.500 (317.50)

x 7.000 (177.80)

x 5.500 (139.70)

Types P

and

B – All

2 5 5.000

(2.27)

12.500 (317.50)

6.000 (152.40)

4.500 (114.30)

Breaker Catalog Numbers

Continuous

Ampere

Rating at

40°C

Catalog Number

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Gound Fault

1-Pole 30 mA

Sensitivity

240/415 Vac 240/415 Vac 240/415 Vac 240/415 Vac

3,000 Amperes I.C. (M3) Plug-on Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

100

HQP1010E

HQP1015E

–

HQP1020E

HQP1025E

HQP1030E

–

HQP1040E

HQP1050E

HQP1060E

HQP1070E

–

HQP2010E

HQP2015E

–

HQP2020E

HQP2025E

HQP2030E

–

HQP2040E

HQP2050E

HQP2060E

HQP2070E

HQP2090E

HQP2100E

HQP3010E

HQP3015E

–

HQP3020E

HQP3025E

HQP3030E

–

HQP3040E

HQP3050E

HQP3060E

HQP3070E

HQP3090E

HQP3100E

GFXB110B2

GFXB115B2

GFXB116B2

GFXB120B2

GFXB125B2

GFXB130B2

GFXB132B2

GFXB140B2

–

6,000 Ampere I.C. (M6) Plug-on Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

100

HQP1015HE

HQP1020HE

HQP1025HE

HQP1030HE

HQP1040HE

HQP1050HE

HQP1060HE

HQP1070HE

–

HQP2015HE

HQP2020HE

HQP2025HE

HQP2030HE

HQP2040HE

HQP2050HE

HQP2060HE

HQP2070HE

HQP2090HE

HQP2100HE

HQP3015HE

HQP3020HE

HQP3025HE

HQP3030HE

HQP3040HE

HQP3050HE

HQP3060HE

HQP3070HE

HQP3090HE

HQP3100HE

–

3,000 Ampere I.C. (M3) Bolt-on Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

100

BAB1010E

BAB1015E

–

BAB1020E

BAB1025E

BAB1030E

–

BAB1040E

BAB1050E

BAB1060E

BAB1070E

–

BAB2010E

BAB2015E

–

BAB2020E

BAB2025E

BAB2030E

–

BAB2040E

BAB2050E

BAB2060E

BAB2070E

BAB2090E

BAB2100E

BAB3010E

BAB3015E

–

BAB3020E

BAB3025E

BAB3030E

–

BAB3040E

BAB3050E

BAB3060E

BAB3070E

BAB3090E

BAB3100E

GFXBB110B2

GFXBB115B2

GFXBB116B2

GFXBB120B2

GFXBB125B2

GFXBB130B2

GFXBB132B2

GFXBB140B2

–

6,000 Ampere I.C. (M6) Bolt-on Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

100

BAB1015HE

BAB1020HE

BAB1025HE

BAB1030HE

BAB1040HE

BAB1050HE

BAB1060HE

BAB1070HE

–

BAB2015HE

BAB2020HE

BAB2025HE

BAB2030HE

BAB2040HE

BAB2050HE

BAB2060HE

BAB2070HE

BAB2090HE

BAB2100HE

BAB3015HE

BAB3020HE

BAB3025HE

BAB3030HE

BAB3040HE

BAB3050HE

BAB3060HE

BAB3070HE

BAB3090HE

BAB3100HE

–

3,000 Ampere I.C. (M3) Cable-in/Cable-out Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

100

QC1010E

QC1015E

–

QC1020E

QC1025E

QC1030E

–

QC1040E

QC1050E

QC1060E

QC1070E

–

QC2010E

QC2015E

–

QC2020E

QC2025E

QC2030E

–

QC2040E

QC2050E

QC2060E

QC2070E

QC2090E

QC2100E

QC3010E

QC3015E

–

QC3020E

QC3025E

QC3030E

–

QC3040E

QC3050E

QC3060E

QC3070E

QC3090E

QC3100E

GFXBC110B2

GFXBC115B2

GFXBC116B2

GFXBC120B2

GFXBC125B2

GFXBC130B2

GFXBC132B2

GFXBC140B2

–

6,000 Ampere I.C. (M6) Cable-in/Cable-out Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

100

QC1015HE

QC1020HE

QC1025HE

QC1030HE

QC1040HE

QC1050HE

QC1060HE

QC1070HE

–

QC2015HE

QC2020HE

QC2025HE

QC2030HE

QC2040HE

QC2050HE

QC2060HE

QC2070HE

QC2090HE

QC2100HE

QC3015HE

QC3020HE

QC3025HE

QC3030HE

QC3040HE

QC3050HE

QC3060HE

QC3070HE

QC3090HE

QC3100HE

–

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 17

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Special Application Breakers

Description

QUICKLAG Switching Neutral

Circuit Breakers

Plug-on Type HQP: 10-30 Amperes,

1 and 2 Poles, 10,000 AIC

Bolt-on Type BA: 10-30 Amperes,

1 and 2 Poles, 10,000 AIC

Cable-in Type QC: 10-30 Amperes,

1 and 2 Poles, 10,000 AIC

Switching Neutral QUICKLAG Break-

ers available in one- and two-pole

configurations, plus neutral pole for

applications in accordance with NEC

514-5, 240-22, and 380-2. A one-pole

device takes two pole spaces, and a

two-pole device takes three pole

spaces.

QUICKLAG Type P

Switching Neutral

QUICKLAG HID (High Intensity

Discharge) Breakers

Plug-on Type HQP: 15-60 Amperes,

1 and 2 Poles, 10,000 AIC

Bolt-on Type BA: 15-60 Amperes,

1 and 2 Poles, 10,000 AIC

Cable-in Type QC: 15-60 Amperes,

1 and 2 Poles, 10,000 AIC

Breakers designed specifically for

use with high intensity discharge

(HID) lighting applications. (UL listed

as standard lighting breakers.)

Molded Case Switches

Non-Automatic QUICKLAG Molded

Case Switch

Plug-on Type HQP: 50, 60,100

Amperes, 1, 2 and 3 Poles

Bolt-on Type BA: 50, 60,100

Amperes, 1, 2 and 3 Poles

Cable-in Type QC: 50, 60,100

Amperes, 1, 2 and 3 Poles

Breaker Catalog Numbers

Continuous

Ampere

Rating 40°C

Catalog Number

1-Pole➀2-Pole➀3-Pole➀

120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 240 Vac 240 Vac

QUICKLAG Type: HQP Switching Neutral Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

HQP2010B

HQP2015B

HQP2020B

HQP2025B

HQP2030B

HQP3010B

HQP3015B

HQP3020B

HQP3025B

HQP3030B

–

QUICKLAG Type: BA Switching Neutral Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

BAB2010C

BAB2015C

BAB2020C

BAB2025C

BAB2030C

BAB3010C

BAB3015C

BAB3020C

BAB3025C

BAB3030C

–

QUICKLAG Type: QC Switching Neutral Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QC2010B

QC2015B

QC2020B

QC2025B

QC2030B

QC3010B

QC3015B

QC3020B

QC3025B

QC3030B

–

QUICKLAG Type: HQP HID (High Intensity Discharge) Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

HQP1015D

HQP1020D

HQP1025D

HQP1030D

HQP1035D

HQP1040D

HQP1050D

HQP1060D

HQP2015D

HQP2020D

HQP2025D

HQP2030D

HQP2035D

HQP2040D

HQP2050D

HQP2060D

–

QUICKLAG Type: BA HID (High Intensity Discharge) Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

BAB1015D

BAB1020D

BAB1025D

BAB1030D

BAB1035D

BAB1040D

BAB1050D

BAB1060D

BAB2015D

BAB2020D

BAB2025D

BAB2030D

BAB2035D

BAB2040D

BAB2050D

BAB2060D

–

QUICKLAG Type: QC HID (High Intensity Discharge) Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

QC1015D

QC1020D

QC1025D

QC1030D

QC1035D

QC1040D

QC1050D

QC1060D

QC2015D

QC2020D

QC2025D

QC2030D

QC2035D

QC2040D

QC2050D

QC2060D

–

QUICKLAG Type: HQP Non-Auto Molded Case Switches

100

HQP1050N

HQP1060N

HQP1100N

–

HQP2050N

HQP2060N

HQP2100N

HQP3050N

HQP3060N

HQP3100N

QUICKLAG Type: BA Non-Auto Molded Case Switches

100

BAB1050N

BAB1060N

BAB1100N

–

BAB2050N

BAB2060N

BAB2100N

BAB3050N

BAB3060N

BAB3100N

QUICKLAG Type: QC Non-Auto Molded Case Switches

100

QC1050N

QC1060N

QC1100N

–

QC2050N

QC2060N

QC2100N

QC3050N

QC3060N

QC3100N

Shipping Data

Miniature Circuit Breaker No.

Poles

Standard

Carton

Quantity

Approximate

Carton Weight

Lbs. (Kgs)

Approximate Standard Carton

Dimensions Inches (mm)

QUICKLAG Types B, P, C – All

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

Type P – All

Types B and C – All

Types P and B – All

9.000 (4.09)

11.000 (4.99)

5.000 (2.27)

12.500 (317.50) x 7.500 (190.50) x 5.000 (127.00)

12.500 (317.50) x 6.500 (165.10) x 5.000 (127.00)

12.500 (317.50) x 7.000 (177.80) x 5.500 (139.70)

12.500 (317.50) x 6.000 (152.40) x 4.500 (114.30)

➀All products UL and CSA listed.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

18 March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Accessories

Accessory Type➀Catalog Number Description Order in Multiples of

Handle Locks:

Non-padlockable

QL1NPL

QL23NPL

QUICKLAG Type P, B, C – 1 Pole

QUICKLAG Type P, B, C – 2, 3 Poles

Handle Locks:

Padlockable

QL1PL

QLPB123PL

QC123PL

QLGF12PL

QUICKLAG Type P, B, C – 1 Pole

QUICKLAG Type P, B – 1, 2, 3 Poles

QUICKLAG Type C – 1, 2, 3 Poles

Ground Fault Padlock Device Type P, B – 1, 2 Poles

Handle Tie QL1HT QUICKLAG Handle Tie - 1 Pole 100

Mounting Hardware QCFCLIP

QC1FP

QC2FP

QC3FP

QC1FPLOFF

QC2FPLOFF

QC3FPLOFF

QCBCLIP

QC6BP

QC4CONB

QCDINADAPT

QUICKLAG Type C Face Mounting Clip

QUICKLAG Type C Face Mounting Plate – 1 Pole

QUICKLAG Type C Face Mounting Plate – 2 Poles

QUICKLAG Type C Face Mounting Plate – 3 Poles

QUICKLAG Type C Face Mounting Plate and Lock-off (Off Only) – 1 Pole

QUICKLAG Type C Face Mounting Plate and Lock-off (Off Only) – 2 Pole

QUICKLAG Type C Face Mounting Plate and Lock-off (Off Only) – 3 Pole

QUICKLAG Type C Base Mounting Clamp

QUICKLAG Base Mounting Plate – 6 Poles Total

QUICKLAG Type C Single Point Connector

QUICKLAG Type C DIN Rail Adapter

100

Dummy Breakers HQP1000

BAB1000

QC1000

QC30SAMPLE

QUICKLAG Type P

QUICKLAG Type B

QUICKLAG Type C

QUICKLAG Type C Clear Choice Breaker

QL23NPL QL1PL

QCBCLIP QC6BP QC4CONB QCDINADAPT

➀See pages 7 and 8 for QCR and QCF accessories.

QL1NPL QLPB123PL QC123PL

QL1HT QCFCLIP QC1FP QC2FP QC3FP

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 19

Miniature Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers

QUICKLAG Industrial Circuit Breakers Modifications/Terminals

Spare Terminal Hardware Screws (Lugs not Included)

Catalog Number Order in Multiples of Terminal Type Description

QLLDTSA

QLLDTSB

QLLDTSC

QLBHTSE

QLLNTSFG

F and G

QUICKLAG Terminal Screw

QUICKLAG Binding Head Terminal Screw and Clamp

QUICKLAG Terminal Screw

Factory Modifications➀

Type of Modification Breaker Types Catalog Suffix

Shunt Trip (Requires 1 extra pole space on right side)

120, 208, 240 Vac

12, 24, 48 Vac/dc

Draws 2.6A at 120V

Draws 11A at 24Vdc

QUICKLAG Types P, B and C

Special Calibration (50°C) QUICKLAG Types P, B and C V

Shock Testing QUICKLAG Types P, B and C L

Freeze Testing QUICKLAG Types P, B and C Y

Moisture-Fungus Treatment QUICKLAG Types P, B, C and Ground Fault F

Factory Installed Breaker Terminals

Breaker Type Continuous

Ampere

Rating

Standard Line Terminal Standard Load Terminal Optional Terminals

(20% List Price Adder)

Term

Type

Wire

Type

Wire

Range

Term

Type

Wire

Type

Wire

Range

Line Load

QUICKLAG Type P

HQP, QPHW,

QHPX, QHPW

10 to 30

35 to 50

55 to 125

Plug-on female clips which mate

with the bus stabs

Cu/Al

#14-#4

#8-1/0

N/A C

–

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QPGF, QPHGF,

QPGFEP, QPHGFEP

10 to 30

Plug-on female clips which mate

with the bus stabs

A – 1-pole

D – 2-pole

Cu/Al

#14-#4

#14-#8

N/A C

–

QUICKLAG Type B

BAB, QBHW,

HBAX, HBAW

10 to 30

35 to 50

55 to 125

Extended tangs which bolt

directly to the bus

A – 1- and 2- pole

B – 3-pole

Cu/Al

#14-#4

#8-1/0

N/A C

–

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QBGF, QBHGF,

QBGFEP, QBHGFEP

10 to 30

Extended tangs which bolt

directly to the bus

A – 1-pole

D – 2-pole

Cu/Al

#14-#4

#14-#8

N/A N/A

QUICKLAG Type C

QC, QCHW,

QHCX, QHCW

10 to 20

25 to 60

70 to 100

Cu/Al

#14-#10 E

Cu/Al

#14-#10

#14-#4

#8-1/0

F, G

E, G

F, G, H

E, F, G, H

E, G, H

QUICKLAG

QCR, QCF

10-55

Cu/Al

-#14

-#4

Cu/Al

#14

-#4

N/A N/A

QUICKLAG Ground Fault

QCGF, QCHGF,

QCGFEP, QCHGFEP

10 to 20

25 to 50

Cu/Al

#14-#10 A

Cu/Al

#14-#4

F, G

E, G

N/A

➀Contact Cutler-Hammer for factory modifications available for QCR and QCF breakers.

ABCD

E F G H

Catalog Suffix “P”

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

20 March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

SPCL Supplementary Protectors

Supplementary Protectors Current Limiting Type Cable-in/Cable-out DIN Rail

➀130 Vdc rating based on 2 poles connected in

series.

Normally stocked.

Special order, contact Cutler-Hammer.

Minimum quantities apply.

SPCL Specifications

Standards

and Approvals

Number

of Poles

Electrical Ratings

Continuous Current

(Amperes)

Vac

50/60 Hz

Vdc Ampere Interrupting

Capacity

UL 1077

File No. E162396

CSA 22.2

File No. LR105580-1

1 0.5-63 120 12-65 10 kA

2 0.5-63 240 12-130➀10 kA

3-4 0.5-63 240 10 kA

1 0.5-63 277 6 kA

2-4 0.5-63 480 5 kA

EN60898

VDE0660

1-4 0.5-63 240/415 10 kA

Overcurrent Curves Overcurrent Curve Type B (3-5X) and Type C (5-10X) per VDE 0641, Part 11.

Degree of Protection IP20.

Connecting

Terminals

Suitable for Single-Core, Standard, and Flexible Conductors from #14 to #6 AWG (Cu).

Recommended Torque is 27 Inch-Pounds.

SPCL Supplementary Protector Catalog Numbers

Continuous

Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

C Curve

0.5

SPCL1C00

SPCL1C01

SPCL1C02

SPCL1C03

SPCL1C04

SPCL1C05

SPCL1C06

SPCL1C07

SPCL1C08

SPCL1C10

SPCL1C13

SPCL1C16

SPCL1C20

SPCL1C25

SPCL1C32

SPCL1C40

SPCL1C50

SPCL1C63

SPCL2C00

SPCL2C01

SPCL2C02

SPCL2C03

SPCL2C04

SPCL2C05

SPCL2C06

SPCL2C07

SPCL2C08

SPCL2C10

–

SPCL2C16

SPCL2C20

SPCL2C25

SPCL2C32

SPCL2C40

SPCL2C50

SPCL2C63

SPCL3C00

SPCL3C01

SPCL3C02

–

SPCL3C04

–

SPCL3C06

–

SPCL3C10

–

SPCL3C16

SPCL3C20

SPCL3C25

SPCL3C32

SPCL3C40

SPCL3C50

SPCL3C63

SPCL4C00

SPCL4C01

SPCL4C02

–

SPCL4C04

–

SPCL4C06

–

SPCL4C10

–

SPCL4C16

SPCL4C20

SPCL4C25

SPCL4C32

SPCL4C40

SPCL4C50

SPCL4C63

B Curve

SPCL1B06

SPCL1B10

SPCL1B13

SPCL1B16

SPCL1B20

SPCL1B25

SPCL1B32

SPCL1B40

SPCL1B50

SPCL1B63

SPCL2B06

SPCL2B10

–

SPCL2B16

SPCL2B20

SPCL2B25

SPCL2B32

SPCL2B40

SPCL2B50

SPCL2B63

SPCL3B06

SPCL3B10

–

SPCL3B16

SPCL3B20

SPCL3B25

SPCL3B32

SPCL3B40

SPCL3B50

SPCL3B63

SPCL4B06

SPCL4B10

–

SPCL4B16

SPCL4B20

SPCL4B25

SPCL4B32

SPCL4B40

SPCL4B50

SPCL4B63

Shipping Data

Packed in

Cartons of:

Carton Dimensions

Inches (mm)

Approximate

Weight Lbs.

(Kgs)

1-Pole Units

2-Pole Units

3-Pole Units

4-Pole Units

9.000 (228.60) x 4.000 (101.60) x 4.000 (101.60)

10.000 (4.54)

SPCL protectors carry the CE mark in

accordance with Low Voltage Directive

(LVD) (73/23/EEC)

CE Mark

Description

UL 1077 Supplementary Protectors

Type SPCL Supplementary Protec-

tors are IEC circuit breakers that are

recognized by UL under UL 1077.

They are intended for use as over-

current protection within an appli-

ance or electrical equipment where

branch circuit protection (for exam-

ple a UL listed Molded Case Circuit

Breaker) has already been provided

or is not required.

Equipment and Control

Circuit Protection

These protectors are ideal for replac-

ing fuses in control circuits. Applica-

tions include protecting motor

control circuits, small control circuit

transformers, relays, contactor coils,

power supplies, PLC I/O points, appli-

ances, and electronic equipment.

Product Features

The Type SPCL Supplementary

Protectors are provided in light gray

cases with charcoal gray handles.

DIN-Rail Mounting: A quick snap-on

clip design allows easy installation

on 35mm DIN Rail.

Current-Limiting Design: Fast short

circuit interruption reduces let-

through energy, reducing damage

to the circuit.

Thermal-Magnetic Overcurrent

Protection: Types B and C overcur-

rent curves provide maximum

reliability and accuracy. Type B

protection is normally used for low

inrush applications. Type C protec-

tion is used for general purpose

industrial applications that require

higher inrush tolerance.

Center Trip Position: The breaker

handle has a unique center trip

“Reset” position that indicates an

overcurrent trip. “Off” (O) and “On”

(I) handle positions are visually indi-

cated by red and green flags.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 21

Miniature Circuit Breakers

SPCL Supplementary Protectors

Supplementary Protectors Current Limiting Type Cable-in/Cable-out DIN Rail

SPCL Accessories

Auxiliary/Signal Switch Kit

Catalog Number SPCLUAUX is a

field mountable switch kit that

attaches to the left side of a SPCL

Protector. It is field selectable to

auxiliary or signal (bell alarm) con-

figuration. The switch is UL and CSA

approved for general purpose

ratings of 6 ampere at 240 Vac or

1 ampere at 125 Vdc. Contacts are

provided as indicated on the wiring

diagram. Screw-type terminals are

provided to accommodate up to #16

AWG wire. Recommended torque is

approximately 13 inch-pounds.

Wiring Diagram

Contact Charts

Contacts Auxiliary Switch Mode

Protector

Open

Protector Closed

11 to 12 X 0

11 to 14 0 X

21 to 22 X 0

Contacts Signal Switch Mode

Protector

Open

Protector

Closed

Protector

Tripped

11 to 12 0 0 X

11 to 14 X X 0

21 to 22 0 0 X

Technical Data

Rated Voltage: 230 Vac/110 Vdc

Rated Current: 6A Ac/1A Dc

Conductor Cross

Section:

To 1.5 mm2

(No 16 AWG)

Tightening Torque: 1 Nm

(13 inch-pounds)

Product: Catalog Number

Universal Auxiliary

Switch:

SPCLUAUX

Figure 1

Figure 2

Signaling

Switch

Auxiliary

Switch

Figure 3

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

22 March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

SPCL Supplementary Protectors

Supplementary Protectors Current Limiting Type Cable-in/Cable-out DIN Rail

Lock-off Devices

Catalog Number Description

SPCLPLDEV Padlockable device, mounts on protector and includes provisions to accept

catalog number SPCLOCKEY Padlock

SPCLOCKEY Padlock with 3 keys

➀Per VDE 0606.

SPCL Accessories

Lock-off Devices

Bus Bar Systems

Finger Proofing Shield

Catalog Number Description

SPCL2000 Clip-on finger proofing shield to enhance finger protection on SPCL protectors.

Plastic finger proofing shield clips into upper or lower terminal poles as required.

Bus Bar Systems

Catalog Number Description

SPCLIPB10MM Single-phase 240 Vac VDE approved Bus Bar, 1 meter in length, 10mm2 density

SPCL1PB16MM Single-phase 240 Vac VDE approved Bus Bar, 1 meter in length, 16mm2 density

Maximum Bus Bar Current➀

Conductor Density End Connect Center Connect

10 sq. mm 50 Amperes 100 Amperes

16 sq. mm 65 Amperes 130 Amperes

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 23

Miniature Circuit Breakers

SPHM Supplementary Protectors

Supplementary Protectors Hydraulic Magnetic Type Cable-in/Cable-out DIN Rail

Description

UL 1077 Supplementary Protectors

Type SPHM Supplementary Protec-

tors are IEC circuit breakers that are

recognized by UL under UL 1077.

They are intended for use as over-

current protection within an appli-

ance or electrical equipment where

branch circuit protection (for exam-

ple a UL listed Molded Case Circuit

Breaker) has already been provided

or is not required.

Equipment and Control Circuit

Applications

These protectors are ideal for protect-

ing motor control circuits, CPTs,

relays, contactor coils, power supplies,

PLC I/O points, lighting circuits, appli-

ances, electronic equipment, and

replacing fuses.

Product Features

The Type SPHM Supplementary Pro-

tectors are provided in light gray cases

with charcoal gray handles. Handles

are marked with “O” for “Off” and “I”

for “On”.

DIN Rail Mounting: Easy installation

on 35mm DIN Rail. A spring loaded

clip is provided for quick release

from the DIN Rail mounting.

Heat-Induced Nuisance Tripping

Eliminated: The protector is designed

to “hold in” at 100% of continuous

rated current regardless of ambient

temperatures from -40 to +85°C.

Immediate Reset After Trip: The pro-

tector can be reset (closed) immedi-

ately after an overcurrent trip

without a “cooling off” period.

Precise Overcurrent Calibration: The

protector can be precisely calibrated

to a wide variety of current ranges

from 0.1 to 50 amperes continuous.

For special ratings not shown, con-

tact Cutler-Hammer.

Flexible Time-Characteristic Curves:

Long, Medium, and Short Delay

Curves are available. Long Delay are

for special extended inrush, Medium

Catalog Numbering System

Supplementary

Protector

Hydraulic

Magnetic

Code Delay Voltage Code Delay Curve

H 8X 50/60 Hz M

Medium

Short

R 18X 50/60 Hz L

Long

Medium

Short

Y➃25X 50/60 Hz L

Long

Medium

Short

251

252

253

J8XDc M

Medium

Short

S 18X Dc L

Long

Medium

Short

Z➃25X Dc L

Long

Medium

Short

251

252

253

S Switch Dc, 50/60 Hz W Switch –

Code Current➂

00R1 0.10 Ampere

0R25 0.25 Ampere

0R50 0.50 Ampere

0R75 0.75 Ampere

0001 1 Ampere

02R5 2.5 Ampere

0005 5 Ampere

07R5 7.5 Ampere

0010 10 Ampere

0015 15 Ampere

0020 20 Ampere

0025 25 Ampere

0030 30 Ampere

0035➂35 Ampere

0040➂40 Ampere

0050➂50 Ampere

Code Current

A➀Normally

Open➁

B➀Normally

Closed➁

Poles

Delay

Current

Rating

Auxiliary

Switch

S P H M 3 H M0 0 3 0

Inrush

Code Poles

1 1-Pole

2 2-Pole

3 3-Pole

4 4-Pole

Type

for general purpose, and Short Delay

for sensitive electronic applications.

1/2 Cycle High-Inrush Tolerance: The

protector can be provided with toler-

ance to various levels of 1/2 cycle

current spikes. General purpose

tolerance is 8X the continuous

current rating. Tolerance to 18X

and 25X are also available.

Environmental, Vibration, and

Shock Resistance: Mil-Spec qualifi-

cation for fungus resistance, humid-

ity, salt-spray resistance, and shock

vibration resistance.

Integral Auxiliary Switch (Optional):

One auxiliary switch contact (a or b)

can be factory installed per protector

pole. A separate pole for the contact

is not required.

➀One A or B contact maximum per pole.

Contacts will be arranged left to right (e.g.,)

BAB suffix on 3-pole breaker.

➁Contact position when breaker in open condi-

tion. Contacts rated 10 amperes at 250 Vac.

➂UL recognized to 250 Vac, 5 kA above 30

amperes.

➃Maximum of 40 amperes available at 25X

inrush.

General Specifications and Electrical Ratings

Standards and

Approvals

Continuous

Current Rating

Vac 50/60 Hz Vdc Interruption Cap Capacity

RMS Symmetrical

UL 1077 0.1 to 30 Amperes 277/480 3 kA

0.1 to 50 Amperes 250 5 kA

CSA 22.2 0.1 to 50 Amperes 80 5 kA

VDE 0660 0.1 to 50 Amperes 230/400 1.5 kA

IEC-380 0.1 to 50 Amperes 80 2 kA

Standards: UL Recognized under

UL 1077, CSA Certified to CSA 22.2.

Meets the requirements of IEC-380,

IEC-435, IEC-601, VDE 0660, VDE

601, VDE 0730, VDE 0750, VDE 0804,

VDE 0806

Inrush Tolerance: 8X (Standard),

18X, or 25X

Overcurrent Curves: Long Delay,

Medium Delay, or Short Delay

Operating Temperature: -40 to +85°C

Wire Range: Breaker Terminals:

14-6 AWG Copper, 35-inch-lbs

torque Auxiliary Switch Terminals:

16 AWG Copper, 3.5-inch-lbs torque

Auxiliary Switch: 10 Amperes at

250 Vac

Degree of Protection: IP-20

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

24 March 1999

Miniature Circuit Breakers

SPHM Supplementary Protectors

Supplementary Protectors Hydraulic Magnetic Type Cable-in/Cable-out DIN Rail

SPHM Catalog Numbers

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Catalog Number

8X (Standard Inrush Tolerance) Medium Delay Curve 2

1-Pole 277 Vac 2-Pole 277/480 Vac 3-Pole 277/480 Vac 4-Pole 277/480 Vac

0.1

0.25

0.50

0.75

2.5

5.0

7.5

SPHM1HM00R1

SPHM1HM0R25

SPHM1HM0R50

SPHM1HM0R75

SPHM1HM0001

SPHM1HM02R5

SPHM1HM0005

SPHM1HM07R5

SPHM1HM0010

SPHM1HM0015

SPHM1HM0020

SPHM1HM0025

SPHM1HM0030

SPHM2HM00R1

SPHM2HM0R25

SPHM2HM0R50

SPHM2HM0R75

SPHM2HM0001

SPHM2HM02R5

SPHM2HM0005

SPHM2HM07R5

SPHM2HM0010

SPHM2HM0015

SPHM2HM0020

SPHM2HM0025

SPHM2HM0030

SPHM3HM00R1

SPHM3HM0R25

SPHM3HM0R50

SPHM3HM0R75

SPHM3HM0001

SPHM3HM02R5

SPHM3HM0005

SPHM3HM07R5

SPHM3HM0010

SPHM3HM0015

SPHM3HM0020

SPHM3HM0025

SPHM3HM0030

SPHM4HM00R1

SPHM4HM0R25

SPHM4HM0R50

SPHM4HM0R75

SPHM4HM0001

SPHM4HM02R5

SPHM4HM0005

SPHM4HM07R5

SPHM4HM0010

SPHM4HM0015

SPHM4HM0020

SPHM4HM0025

SPHM4HM0030

Continuous

Current Rating

(Amperes)

8X (Standard Inrush Tolerance) Medium Delay Curve 2

1-Pole 250 Vac 2-Pole 250 Vac 3-Pole 250 Vac 4-Pole 250 Vac

SPHM1HM0035

SPHM1HM0040

SPHM1HM0050

SPHM2HM0035

SPHM2HM0040

SPHM2HM0050

SPHM3HM0035

SPHM3HM0040

SPHM3HM0050

SPHM4HM0035

SPHM4HM0040

SPHM4HM0050

Continuous

Current Rating

(Amperes)

18X (High Inrush Tolerance) Medium Delay Curve 20

1-Pole 277 Vac 2-Pole 277/480 Vac 3-Pole 277/480 Vac 4-Pole 277/480 Vac

0.1

0.25

0.50

0.75

2.5

7.5

SPHM1RM00R1

SPHM1RM0R25

SPHM1RM0R50

SPHM1RM0R75

SPHM1RM0001

SPHM1RM02R5

SPHM1RM0005

SPHM1RM07R5

SPHM1RM0010

SPHM1RM0015

SPHM1RM0020

SPHM1RM0025

SPHM1RM0030

SPHM2RM00R1

SPHM2RM0R25

SPHM2RM0R50

SPHM2RM0R75

SPHM2RM0001

SPHM2RM02R5

SPHM2RM0005

SPHM2RM07R5

SPHM2RM0010

SPHM2RM0015

SPHM2RM0020

SPHM2RM0025

SPHM2RM0030

SPHM3RM00R1

SPHM3RM0R25

SPHM3RM0R50

SPHM3RM0R75

SPHM3RM0001

SPHM3RM02R5

SPHM3RM0005

SPHM3RM07R5

SPHM3RM0010

SPHM3RM0015

SPHM3RM0020

SPHM3RM0025

SPHM3RM0030

SPHM4RM00R1

SPHM4RM0R25

SPHM4RM0R50

SPHM4RM0R75

SPHM4RM0001

SPHM4RM02R5

SPHM4RM0005

SPHM4RM07R5

SPHM4RM0010

SPHM4RM0015

SPHM4RM0020

SPHM4RM0025

SPHM4RM0030

Continuous

Current Rating

(Amperes)

18X (High Inrush Tolerance) Medium Delay Curve 20

1-Pole 250 Vac 2-Pole 250 Vac 3-Pole 250 Vac 4-Pole 250 Vac

SPHM1RM0035

SPHM1RM0040

SPHM1RM0050

SPHM2RM0035

SPHM2RM0040

SPHM2RM0050

SPHM3RM0035

SPHM3RM0040

SPHM3RM0050

SPHM4RM0035

SPHM4RM0040

SPHM4RM0050

1-Pole 4-Pole3-Pole2-Pole

Normally stocked.

Special order, contact Cutler-Hammer.

Minimum quantities apply. Contact

Cutler-Hammer for price and availability

for 400 Hz, Dc, Auxiliary Switch, and other

catalog number combinations not shown.

Shipping Data

Shipped in

Cartons of:

Carton Dimensions Inches (mm) Approx. Weight

Lbs. (Kgs)

1-Pole Units

2-Pole Units

3-Pole Units

4-Pole Units

10.500 (266.70) x 4.125 (104.78) x 4.500 (114.30)

15.000 (6.81)

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 25

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

15-100 Amperes

Series C G-Frame

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc

120 240 277 480 125 250➀➁

GD 3 – 65 – 22 – 10 26

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc

120 240 277 480Y/277 125 125/250

GB 1

2, 3

–

14➂

–

GHB 1

2, 3

–

14➂

–

GC 1

2, 3

–

14➂

–

GHC 1

2, 3

–

14➂

–

➀Two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.

➁Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.

➂15 through 70A breakers only.

➃Not UL listed sizes.

■All two- and three-pole circuit

breakers are of the common trip

type. On all 3-phase Delta (240V)

Grounded B phase applications,

refer to Cutler-Hammer.

■Single-pole circuit breakers, 15

and 20 amperes. Switching duty

rated (SWD) for fluorescent light-

ing applications.

■All G-frame circuit breakers are

suitable for reverse feed use.

■HACR rated.

Catalog Numbering System

This information is presented only as an aid to under-

standing catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build

catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Number

GD 3 100

Circuit

Breaker

Type

GHB

GHC

Number

of Poles

1: 1 Pole

2: 2 Pole

3: 3 Pole

Trip

Amperes

100

Suffix

K: Molded Case Switch

D: Ring Type Terminals

C: Steel Collars

V: 50°C

J01: Fungus Proofed

R01: Shock Tested

F01: Freeze Tested

Terminal Types

For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable

for wire type and size given below.

Circuit

Breaker

Amperes

Terminal

Type

Material

Screw

Head

Type

Wire

Type

AWG

Wire

Range

Metric Wire➃

Range (mm2)

Standard

15-20

25-100

Clamp (Plated Steel)

Pressure (Aluminum Body)

Slotted

Cu/Al

#14-10

#10-1/0

2.5-4

4-50

Optional

15-50 Pressure (Steel Body) Slotted Cu – –

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

26 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

15-100 Amperes

Series C G-Frame

Typical Series C G-Frame Circuit Breaker

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C102

Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable

Trip-Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc➀Catalog Number

(Includes binding

head screws)

22 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Catalog Number (Includes Line and

Load Terminals)

3-Pole

100

GD3015

GD3020

GD3025

GD3030

GD3035

GD3040

GD3045

GD3050

GD3060

GD3070

GD3080

GD3090

GD3100

GD3015D

GD3020D

GD3025D

GD3030D

GD3035D

GD3040D

GD3045D

GD3050D

GD3060D

GD3070D

GD3080D

GD3090D

GD3100D

Molded Case Switches

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C102

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

Catalog Number (Includes Line and Load Terminals)

3-Pole

100

GD3060K

GD3100K

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 27

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

15-100 Amperes

Series C G-Frame

Type GHBGFEP Bolt-on Panelboard 30mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors

15-60 Amperes, 277 Volt, 50/60 Hz

These circuit breakers meet the

requirements of UL489 and UL1053.

Operational voltage 240V to 305V.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles

Interrupting Capacity

(Symmetrical Amperes)

277 Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)

GHBGFEP 2 14,000

Single Phase

(Requires 2 Poles)

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C193

Type GHBGFEP Bolt-on Panelboard 30mA

Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors

with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

One Phase (Requires 2 Poles)

277V, 30mA

Catalog Number

GHBGFEP1015

GHBGFEP1020

GHBGFEP1030

GHBGFEP1040

GHBGFEP1050

GHBGFEP1060

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15547

Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units➃

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

277/480 Vac Maximum,

125 Vdc Maximum➀

277/480 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum

277/480 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum➁

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

Catalog Number

100

GHB1015➂

GHB1020➂

GHB1025

GHB1030

GHB1035

GHB1040

GHB1045

GHB1050

GHB1060

GHB1070

GHB1080

GHB1090

GHB1100

GHB2015➂

GHB2020➂

GHB2025

GHB2030

GHB2035

GHB2040

GHB2045

GHB2050

GHB2060

GHB2070

GHB2080

GHB2090

GHB2100

GHB3015➂

GHB3020➂

GHB3025

GHB3030

GHB3035

GHB3040

GHB3045

GHB3050

GHB3060

GHB3070

GHB3080

GHB3090

GHB3100

➀15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only.

➁Use (2) outside poles.

➂Uses .190-32 screw type clamp terminals.

➃480Y/277V, circuit breakers (Type GHB)

not suitable for 3-phase Delta (480V).

These breakers meet the require-

ments of Federal Specification

W-C-375b as follows:

Types GB, GHB, 120 and 240 Volts:

1 Pole: Class 11a.

2, 3 Poles: Classes 10b, 11b, 12b,

14b, 15b

Type GHB, 277 and 480Y/277 Volts:

1 Pole: Classes 12c, 13a

2, 3 Poles: Class 13b

Type GB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

120 Vac Maximum,

125 Vdc Maximum➀

240 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum

240 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum➁

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

Catalog Number

100

GB1015➂

GB1020➂

GB1025

GB1030

GB1035

GB1040

GB1045

GB1050

GB1060

GB1070

GB1080

GB1090

GB1100

GB2015➂

GB2020➂

GB2025

GB2030

GB2035

GB2040

GB2045

GB2050

GB2060

GB2070

GB2080

GB2090

GB2100

GB3015➂

GB3020➂

GB3025

GB3030

GB3035

GB3040

GB3045

GB3050

GB3060

GB3070

GB3080

GB3090

GB3100

Types GB and GHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers

Typical GB

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

28 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

15-100 Amperes

Series C G-Frame

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15548

Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

277 Vac Maximum,

125 Vdc Maximum➀

480Y/277 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum

480Y/277 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum➁

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

Catalog Number

100

GHC1015➂

GHC1020➂

GHC1025

GHC1030

GHC1035

GHC1040

GHC1045

GHC1050

GHC1060

GHC1070

GHC1080

GHC1090

GHC1100

GHC2015➂

GHC2020➂

GHC2025

GHC2030

GHC2035

GHC2040

GHC2045

GHC2050

GHC2060

GHC2070

GHC2080

GHC2090

GHC2100

GHC3015➂

GHC3020➂

GHC3025

GHC3030

GHC3035

GHC3040

GHC3045

GHC3050

GHC3060

GHC3070

GHC3080

GHC3090

GHC3100

Type GHCGFEP Cable In/Cable Out 30mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors

15-60 Amperes, 277 Volt, 50/60 Hz

These circuit breakers meet the

requirements of UL489 and UL1053.

Operational voltage 240V to 305V.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles

Interrupting Capacity

(Symmetrical Amperes)

277 Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)

GHCGFEP 2 14,000

Single Phase

Requires 2 Poles)

Types GC and GHC Circuit Breakers

15-100 Amperes, 120, 240, 277,

480Y/277V, 50/60 Hz, 125, 125/250

Vdc, 1, 2, and 3 Poles

➀15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only.

➁Use (2) outside poles.

➂Uses .190-32 screw type clamp terminals.

These breakers meet the require-

ments of Federal Specification

W-C-37b as follows:

Types GC, 120 and 240 Volts:

1 Pole: Class 11a

2, 3 Poles: Classes 10b, 11b, 12b,

14b, 15b

Type GHC, 277 and 480Y/277 Volts:

1 Pole: Classes 12c, 13a

2, 3 Poles: Class 13b

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C193

Type GHBGFEP Bolt-on Panelboard 30mA

Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors

with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

One Phase (Requires 2 Poles)

277V, 30mA

Catalog Number

GHBGFEP1015

GHBGFEP1020

GHBGFEP1030

GHBGFEP1040

GHBGFEP1050

GHBGFEP1060

Type GC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

240 Vac Maximum,

125 Vdc Maximum➀

240 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum

240 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum➁

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

Catalog Number

100

GC1015➂

GC1020➂

GC1025

GC1030

GC1035

GC1040

GC1045

GC1050

GC1060

GC1070

GC1080

GC1090

GC1100

GC2015➂

GC2020➂

GC2025

GC2030

GC2035

GC2040

GC2045

GC2050

GC2060

GC2070

GC2080

GC2090

GC2100

GC3015➂

GC3020➂

GC3025

GC3030

GC3035

GC3040

GC3045

GC3050

GC3060

GC3070

GC3080

GC3090

GC3100

Typical GC

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 29

Type GC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

120 Vac Maximum,

125 Vdc Maximum

240 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum

240 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum➀

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

Catalog Number

GC1025D

GC1030D

GC1035D

GC1040D

GC1045D

GC1050D

GC1055D

GC1060D

GC2025D

GC2030D

GC2035D

GC2040D

GC2045D

GC2050D

GC2055D

GC2060D

GC3025D

GC3030D

GC3035D

GC3040D

GC3045D

GC3050D

GC3055D

GC3060D

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

15-100 Amperes

Series C G-Frame

➀Use (2) outside poles.

Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

277 Vac Maximum,

125 Vdc Maximum

480Y/277 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum

480Y/277 Vac Maximum,

125/250 Vdc Maximum➀

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

Catalog Number

GHC1025D

GHC1030D

GHC1035D

GHC1040D

GHC1045D

GHC1050D

GHC1055D

GHC1060D

GHC2025D

GHC2030D

GHC2035D

GHC2040D

GHC2045D

GHC2050D

GHC2055D

GHC2060D

GHC3025D

GHC3030D

GHC3035D

GHC3040D

GHC3045D

GHC3050D

GHC3055D

GHC3060D

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15548

marked “Special purpose breaker

not for general use.” To order this

special breaker, use the catalog

number below.

Special Purpose Breakers

These are Types GC and GHC circuit

breakers with binding head screw-

type terminals on line and load side.

These circuit breakers with screw-

type terminals (.190-32) will be

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

30 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

15-100 Amperes

Series C G-Frame

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker Type Number of Poles

123

GD 1.0

(.454)

1.5

(.680)

2.25

(1.021)

GHBGFEP – 1.2

(.545)

–

GHCGFEP – 1.1

(.499)

–

GB/GHC Carton Quantity

24 12 8

(7.264)

GC/GHC Carton Quantity

24 12 8

(8.172)

Dimensions/Weights

Dimensions, Inches (mm)

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

1 1.0

(25.33)

4.88

(123.95)

2.81

(71.41)

2 2.0

(50.78)

4.88

(123.95)

2.81

(71.41)

3 3.0

(76)

4.88

(123.95)

2.81

(71.41)

Accessories

Internal

Alarm Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Auxiliary Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Undervoltage Release

Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

External

Base Mounting Hardware . . . . . . 163

Base Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . 167

DIN Rail Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Key Operated Attachment. . . . . . 167

Lock Dog (non-padlockable) . . . . 168

Padlockable Handle . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . 180

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 31

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

10-225 Amperes

Series C F-Frame

IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings (P1)

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc➀

220, 240 380, 415 440 500 125 250➁➂

EDH

EDC

2, 3

100

200

–

FDB 2, 3, 4 18 14 14 14 – 10 32

FD 1

2, 3, 4

–

HFD 1

2, 3, 4

100

–

FDC 2, 3, 4 200 100 100 35 – 22 33

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc➀

240 277 480 600 125 250➁➂

EDH

EDC

2, 3

100

200

–

EHD 1

2, 3

–

FDB 2, 3, 4 18 – 14 14 – 10 32

FD 1

2, 3, 4

–

HFD 1

2, 3, 4

–

100

–

FDC 2, 3, 4 200 – 100 35 – 22 33

➀Dc ratings apply to substantially

non-inductive circuits.

➁2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole

circuit breaker.

➂Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at

10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.

Typical Series C F-Frame Breaker

■All Series C F-frame circuit breakers

are HACR rated.

■All circuit breakers 10 through 50

amperes are suitable for HID (high

intensity discharge) use.

■All F-frame circuit breakers are

suitable for reverse feed use.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

32 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

10-225 Amperes

Series C F-Frame

Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with

Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

277 Vac Maximum, 125

Vdc

480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

14 kAIC @ 277 Vac 14 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Type EHD

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

Catalog Number (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

10➀

100

EHD1010

EHD1015➁

EHD1020➁

EHD1025

EHD1030

EHD1035

EHD1040

EHD1045

EHD1050

EHD1060

EHD1070

EHD1080

EHD1090

EHD1100

EHD2010

EHD2015

EHD2020

EHD2025

EHD2030

EHD2035

EHD2040

EHD2045

EHD2050

EHD2060

EHD2070

EHD2080

EHD2090

EHD2100

EHD3010

EHD3015

EHD3020

EHD3025

EHD3030

EHD3035

EHD3040

EHD3045

EHD3050

EHD3060

EHD3070

EHD3080

EHD3090

EHD3100

Types ED, EDH, and EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit

Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Suitable for Reverse Feed

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc

65 kAIC @ 240 Vac 100 kAIC @ 240 Vac 200 kAIC @ 240 Vac

Type ED Type EDH Type EDC Current

Limiting

2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

Catalog Number (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

100

125

150

175

200

225

ED2100

ED2125

ED2150

ED2175

ED2200

ED2225

ED3100

ED3125

ED3150

ED3175

ED3200

ED3225

EDH2100

EDH2125

EDH2150

EDH2175

EDH2200

EDH2225

EDH3100

EDH3125

EDH3150

EDH3175

EDH3200

EDH3225

EDC2100

EDC2125

EDC2150

EDC2175

EDC2200

EDC2225

EDC3100

EDC3125

EDC3150

EDC3175

EDC3200

EDC3225

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C101

➀Not UL listed. 5 kAIC interrupting rating.

➁UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC

Article 240-83 (d).

Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

14 kAIC @ 600 Vac 25 kAIC @ 277 Vac 25 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Type FDB Type FD

2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

Catalog Number (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

10➀

100

110

125

150

175

200

225

FDB2010

FDB2015

FDB2020

FDB2025

FDB2030

FDB2035

FDB2040

FDB2045

FDB2050

FDB2060

FDB2070

FDB2080

FDB2090

FDB2100

FDB2110

FDB2125

FDB2150

–

FDB3010

FDB3015

FDB3020

FDB3025

FDB3030

FDB3035

FDB3040

FDB3045

FDB3050

FDB3060

FDB3070

FDB3080

FDB3090

FDB3100

FDB3110

FDB3125

FDB3150

–

FDB4010

FDB4015

FDB4020

FDB4025

FDB4030

FDB4035

FDB4040

FDB4045

FDB4050

FDB4060

FDB4070

FDB4080

FDB4090

FDB4100

FDB4110

FDB4125

FDB4150

–

FD1010

FD1015➁

FD1020➁

FD1025

FD1030

FD1035

FD1040

FD1045

FD1050

FD1060

FD1070

FD1080

FD1090

FD1100

FD1110

FD1125

FD1150

–

FD2015

FD2020

FD2025

FD2030

FD2035

FD2040

FD2045

FD2050

FD2060

FD2070

FD2080

FD2090

FD2100

FD2110

FD2125

FD2150

FD2175

FD2200

FD2225

–

FD3015

FD3020

FD3025

FD3030

FD3035

FD3040

FD3045

FD3050

FD3060

FD3070

FD3080

FD3090

FD3100

FD3110

FD3125

FD3150

FD3175

FD3200

FD3225

–

FD4015

FD4020

FD4025

FD4030

FD4035

FD4040

FD4045

FD4050

FD4060

FD4070

FD4080

FD4090

FD4100

FD4110

FD4125

FD4150

FD4175

FD4200

FD4225

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C101

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 33

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

10-225 Amperes

Series C F-Frame

Types HFD and FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 277 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

65 kAIC @ 277 Vac 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Type HFD Type FDC Current Limiting

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

Catalog Number (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)

100

110

125

150

175

200

225

HFD1015

HFD1020

HFD1025

HFD1030

HFD1035

HFD1040

HFD1045

HFD1050

HFD1060

HFD1070

HFD1080

HFD1090

HFD1100

HFD1110

HFD1125

HFD1150

–

HFD2015

HFD2020

HFD2025

HFD2030

HFD2035

HFD2040

HFD2045

HFD2050

HFD2060

HFD2070

HFD2080

HFD2090

HFD2100

HFD2110

HFD2125

HFD2150

HFD2175

HFD2200

HFD2225

HFD3015

HFD3020

HFD3025

HFD3030

HFD3035

HFD3040

HFD3045

HFD3050

HFD3060

HFD3070

HFD3080

HFD3090

HFD3100

HFD3110

HFD3125

HFD3150

HFD3175

HFD3200

HFD3225

HFD4015

HFD4020

HFD4025

HFD4030

HFD4035

HFD4040

HFD4045

HFD4050

HFD4060

HFD4070

HFD4080

HFD4090

HFD4100

HFD4110

HFD4125

HFD4150

HFD4175

HFD4200

HFD4225

FDC2015

FDC2020

FDC2025

FDC2030

FDC2035

FDC2040

FDC2045

FDC2050

FDC2060

FDC2070

FDC2080

FDC2090

FDC2100

FDC2110

FDC2125

FDC2150

FDC2175

FDC2200

FDC2225

FDC3015

FDC3020

FDC3025

FDC3030

FDC3035

FDC3040

FDC3045

FDC3050

FDC3060

FDC3070

FDC3080

FDC3090

FDC3100

FDC3110

FDC3125

FDC3150

FDC3175

FDC3200

FDC3225

FDC4015

FDC4020

FDC4025

FDC4030

FDC4035

FDC4040

FDC4045

FDC4050

FDC4060

FDC4070

FDC4080

FDC4090

FDC4100

FDC4110

FDC4125

FDC4150

FDC4175

FDC4200

FDC4225

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C101

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc

Complete Circuit Breaker

with Load Side Terminals Only

Complete Circuit Breaker

with Load Side Terminals Only

Catalog Number

2-Pole

100

150

225

EHD2100K

–

FD2100K

FD2150K

FD2225K

3-Pole

100

150

225

EHD3100K

–

FD3100K

FD3150K

FD3225K

4-Pole

100

150

225

–

FD4100K

FD4150K

FD4225K

Molded Case Switches

Molded case switches are used as compact switches in

applications requiring high current switching capabilities.

Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker

components and are of the high instantaneous automatic

type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL 1087.

Note: Molded Case Switches may open above

1800 amperes.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C101

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

34 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

10-225 Amperes

Series C F-Frame

Collar

Screw

Washer

Conductor

Screw

Wire Clamp

Conductor

Assemble wire clamp to bottom of con-

ductor as shown.

Insert collar enclosing conductor as

shown. Locate nut on top of conductor

and tighten securely with screw and

washer. Caution: Collar must surround

conductor.

Insert collar enclosing conductor and cen-

ter on extrusion on collar. Install clip with

legs on top of conductor and snap end

around bottom of collar.

Assemble collar on top of conductor as

shown. Tighten securely with screw and

washer.

Collar slides onto conductor and is held in

position by a screw and lockwasher.

Assemble collar on top of conductor as

shown. Tighten securely with screw and

washer. Terminal shield must be used

with this collar.

Conductor

Collar

Washer

Screw

Conductor

Extrusion

Clip

Collar

Line and Load Terminals

Line and load terminals provide wire

connecting capabilities for specific

ranges of continuous current ratings

and wire types. Except as noted,

terminals comply with Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc., Standards UL486A

and UL486B. Unless otherwise

specified, F-frame circuit breakers

are factory equipped with load ter-

minals only.

Ordering Information

F-frame circuit breakers and molded

case switches have load terminals

only as standard equipment. When

standard line-end terminals (same as

standard load-end terminals) are

required, add suffix L to the circuit

breaker catalog number. When non-

standard or optional line and/or load

terminals are required, order by

style number. Specify if factory

installation is required.

Line and Load Terminals

Maximum Breaker

Amperes

Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range mm2Package of 3 Terminals

Catalog Number

Standard Pressure Type Terminals

20 (EHD)

100

225

Steel

Aluminum

Cu/AI

#14-#10

#14-1/0

#14-4/0

2.5-4

2.5-50

25-95

3T20FB➀

3T100FB

3TA225FD

Optional Pressure Terminals

100

200

225

Aluminum

Stainless Steel

Aluminum

Cu/AI

#14-#4

#14-1/0

#4-4/0

#6-300 kcmil

2.5-16

2.5-50

25-95

16-150

3TA50FB➀

3TA100FD

3T150FB

3TA225FDK➁

➀Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.

➁Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approxi-

mately 3 inches to breaker height. Available

for use on 3-pole breaker only.

3T20FB 3T100FB, 3T150FB 3TA225FD

3TA150FB 3TA100FD 3TA225FDK

Screw

Washer

Collar

Conductor

Nut

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 35

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

10-225 Amperes

Series C F-Frame

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker Type Number of Poles

1234

ED, EDH, EDC – 3

(1.361)

4.5

(2.041)

–

EHD, FDB, FD,

HFD, FDC

(.907)

(1.361)

4.5

(2.041)

(2.721)

Dimensions/Weights

Dimensions, Inches (mm)

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

1 1.375

(35)

(152)

3.375

(86)

2 2.75

(70)

(152)

3.375

(86)

3 4.125

(105)

(152)

3.375

(86)

4 5.5

(140)

(152)

3.375

(86)

Catalog Numbering System

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog

numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

Circuit Breaker Catalog Number

FDC 3 100 L

Circuit

Breaker

Type

EHD

FDB

HFD

FDC

Number

of Poles

1: 1 Pole

2: 2 Poles

3: 3 Poles

4: 4 Poles

Trip

Amperes

100

110

125

150

175 (FD, HFD, FDC, 2-, 3-, 4-Pole Only)

200 (FD, HFD, FDC, 2-, 3-, 4-Pole Only)

225 (FD, HFD, FDC, 2-, 3-, 4-Pole Only)

Suffix

E: 100% Protected (4-Pole only) Neutral Pole

EH: 50% Protected (4-Pole only)

K: High Magnetic Molded

Case Switch

L: Line and Load Terminals

S: Stainless Steel Terminals

V: 50˚C Calibration

W: Without Terminals

Y: Line Terminals Only

Z: Aluminum Terminals (≤ 100 Amperes)

EDC 3 200 L

Circuit

Breaker

Type

EDH

EDC

Number

of Poles

2: 2 Poles

3: 3 Poles

Trip

Amperes

100

125

150

175

200

225

Suffix

L: Line and Load Terminals

W: Without Terminals

Y: Line Terminals Only

Z: Aluminum Terminals (100 Amperes)

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

36 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

10-225 Amperes

Series C F-Frame

Allowable Accessory Combinations

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles

in the circuit breaker.

Refer-

ence

Page

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

Internal Accessories

Alarm Lockout Switch (Make Only) 139 ■

Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) 139 ■❏❏■

Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) 139 ■❏❏■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) 142 ■■■■ ■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) 142 ■■■■ ■

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 145 ■❏❏■

Shunt Trip – Standard 148 ■■■■ ■

Shunt Trip – Low Energy 152 ■■■■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism 154 ■■■■

External Accessories

End Cap Kit 161 ●● ●

Keeper Nut 161 ●● ● ●

Control Wire Terminal Kit 162 ●● ● ●

Multiwire Connectors 162 ●● ● ●

Base Mounting Hardware 163 ●● ● ●

Terminal Shields 165 ●● ● ●

Terminal End Covers 166 ●

Interphase Barriers 166 ●● ●

Non-Padlockable Handle Block 168 ■■■■

Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 168 ■■■■

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 169 ■❏❏❏❏

Cylinder Lock 169 ■

Key Interlock Kit 170 ■❏❏❏❏

Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●

Walking Beam Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●●

Electrical (Solenoid) Operator 172 ●●

Plug-in Adapters 174 ●● ●

Rear Connecting Studs 175 ●● ● ●

Panelboard Connecting Straps 177 ●● ● ●

Handle Mechanisms 178 ●

Door Hardware/Accessories 182 ●●

LFD Current Limiter 183 ●

IQ Energy Sentinel 184 ●●

Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer)

Special Calibration 186 ●● ● ●

Moisture Fungus Treatment 186 ●● ● ●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 186 ●● ● ●

Marine Application 186 ●● ● ●

■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –

not both

●Accessory available/Modification available

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 37

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-250 Amperes

Series C J-Frame

IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc

240 380 415 600 125 250➀➁

HJD

JDC

2, 3, 4

100

200

100

–

➀2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles

of 3-pole circuit breaker.

➁Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at

10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.

➂8 milliseconds time constant.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc

240 480 600 125 250➀➁ 500➂

JDB

HJD

JDC

2, 3

2, 3, 4

100

200

100

–

Typical Series C J-Frame Circuit Breaker

■All Series C J-frame Circuit Breakers

are HACR rated.

■J-frame circuit breakers are avail-

able as individual components

(Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals),

or factory assembled complete

breakers.

■J-frame circuit breakers with non-

interchangeable trip units are

suitable for reverse feed use.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

38 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-250 Amperes

Series C J-Frame

Types JD, HJD, and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Standard Interrupting Capacity

600 Vac Rated

25 kAIC @ 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity

600 Vac Rated

65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Ultra High Interrupting

Capacity Current Limiting

600 Vac Rated

100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Thermal Magnetic

Trip Unit Only

For Use With: Standard

or High or Ultra High

Interrupting Frames

Standard Terminals Only

See Page 40 for

Optional Terminals

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Catalog Number

2-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

JD2070

JD2090

JD2100

JD2125

JD2150

JD2175

JD2200

JD2225

JD2250

JD2250F HJD2070

HJD2090

HJD2100

HJD2125

HJD2150

HJD2175

HJD2200

HJD2225

HJD2250

HJD2250F JDC2070

JDC2090

JDC2100

JDC2125

JDC2150

JDC2175

JDC2200

JDC2225

JDC2250

JDC2250F JT2070T

JT2090T

JT2100T

JT2125T

JT2150T

JT2175T

JT2200T

JT2225T

JT2250T

TA250KB➀

3-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

JD3070

JD3090

JD3100

JD3125

JD3150

JD3175

JD3200

JD3225

JD3250

JD3250F HJD3070

HJD3090

HJD3100

HJD3125

HJD3150

HJD3175

HJD3200

HJD3225

HJD3250

HJD3250F JDC3070

JDC3090

JDC3100

JDC3125

JDC3150

JDC3175

JDC3200

JDC3225

JDC3250

JDC3250F JT3070T

JT3090T

JT3100T

JT3125T

JT3150T

JT3175T

JT3200T

JT3225T

JT3250T

TA250KB➀

4-Pole➁➂

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

JD4070

JD4090

JD4100

JD4125

JD4150

JD4175

JD4200

JD4225

JD4250

JD4250F HJD4070

HJD4090

HJD4100

HJD4125

HJD4150

HJD4175

HJD4200

HJD4225

HJD4250

HJD4250F JDC4070

JDC4090

JDC4100

JDC4125

JDC4150

JDC4175

JDC4200

JDC4225

JDC4250

JDC4250F JT4070T

JT4090T

JT4100T

JT4125T

JT4150T

JT4175T

JT4200T

JT4225T

JT4250T

TA250KB➀

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C103 for Breaker; 29C600 for Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit

➀Individually packed.

➁Fully rated neutral pole with no protection.

➂Neutral is in right pole.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 39

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-250 Amperes

Series C J-Frame

Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with

Non-Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc

Complete Circuit Breaker

Without Line and

Load Terminals

With Standard Line and Load

Terminals Only

Catalog Number

2-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

JDB2070W

JDB2090W

JDB2100W

JDB2125W

JDB2150W

JDB2175W

JDB2200W

JDB2225W

JDB2250W

JDB2070

JDB2090

JDB2100

JDB2125

JDB2150

JDB2175

JDB2200

JDB2225

JDB2250

3-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

JDB3070W

JDB3090W

JDB3100W

JDB3125W

JDB3150W

JDB3175W

JDB3200W

JDB3225W

JDB3250W

JDB3070

JDB3090

JDB3100

JDB3125

JDB3150

JDB3175

JDB3200

JDB3225

JDB3250

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C103 for Breaker

Molded Case Switches

Molded case switches are used as compact switches in

applications requiring high current switching capabilities.

Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker

components and are of the high instantaneous automatic

type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL 1087.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Standard Terminals

Only

See page 40 for

Optional Terminals

Complete Circuit Breaker Only Without Line

and Load Terminals

Suitable for Reverse

Feed Use

Catalog Number

2-Pole

250 JD2250WK JDB2250WK TA250KB➀

3-Pole

250 JD3250WK JDB3250WK TA250KB➀

➀Individually packed.

Note: Molded case switches may open above

2500 amperes.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C103

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

40 March 1999

Collar

Slotted

Screw

Nut

Slotted

Screw

Collar

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-250 Amperes

Series C J-Frame

Line and Load Terminals

Line and load terminals provide wire

connecting capabilities for specific

ranges of continuous current ratings

and wire types. All terminals comply

with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,

Standards UL486A and UL486B

and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65,

or Electrical Bulletin 1165. Unless

otherwise specified, J-frame circuit

breaker line and load terminals are

shipped separately for field

installation.

The bottom of the standard

TA250KB terminal contains a recess

which is positioned over the J-frame

circuit breaker terminal conductor.

Ordering Information

J-frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI

terminals as standard. When

optional copper-only terminals are

required, order by catalog number.

Specify if factory installation is

required.

Line and Load Terminals

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Terminal Body

Material

Wire Type AWG Wire Range/

No. Conductors

Metric Wire

Range mm2Catalog Numbers

Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals

250

Aluminum

Stainless Steel

Cu/AI

#4-350 kcmil

25-185

TA250KB

T250KB

T250KB Terminal TA250KB Terminal

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 41

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-250 Amperes

Series C J-Frame

Catalog Numbering System

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog

numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

Trip Unit Catalog NumberCircuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Number

JD 3 250 F

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Type

JDB

HJD

JDC

Number

of Poles

2: 2 Poles

3: 3 Poles

4: 4 Poles

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Ampere

Rating

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

Suffix

C: Non-Aluminum

Terminals

F: Frame Only

K: High Magnetic Molded

Case Switch

V: 50°C Calibration

W: Without Terminals

X: Load Side

Terminals Only

Y: Line Side

Terminals Only

JT 3 250 T

Trip Unit

Type

JT: Thermal-

Magnetic

Number

of Poles

Trip Unit/

Rating

Plug

Ampere

Rating

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

Suffix

T: Trip Unit

Thermal-Magnetic

Fixed Thermal

Adj. Magnetic

V: 50°C Calibration

(Thermal-Magnetic

Trip Units Only)

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker Type Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit➀

Number of Poles

234234234

JDB 11.25

(5.103)

12.5

(5.670)

–––––––

JD 11.25

(5.103)

12.5

(5.670)

13.25

(6.010)

(4.082)

(4.536)

10.5

(4.763)

(.907)

2.25

(1.021)

HJD 11.25

(5.103)

12.5

(5.670)

13.25

(6.010)

(4.082)

(4.536)

10.5

(4.763)

(.907)

2.25

(1.021)

JDC 12.25

(5.103)

13.5

(6.124)

14.25

(6.470)

(4.536)

(4.990)

11.5

(5.217)

(.907)

2.25

(1.021)

Dimensions/Weights

Dimensions, Inches (mm)

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2, 3 4.125

(105)

(255)

4.063

(103)

4 5.5

(140)

(254)

4.063

(103)

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

42 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-250 Amperes

Series C J-Frame

Series C J-Frame Allowable Accessory Combinations

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles

in the circuit breaker.

Reference

Page

2-, 3-Pole 4-Pole

Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)

Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) 140 ❏❏❏❏

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) 142 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) 142 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 145 ❏❏❏❏

Shunt Trip – Standard 148 ■■■■

Shunt Trip – Low Energy 152 ■■■■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism 155 ■■■■

External Accessories

End Cap Kit 161 ●●

Plug Nut 161 ●●

Control Wire Terminal Kit 162 ●●

Multiwire Connectors 162 ●●

Base Mounting Hardware 163 ●●

Terminal Shields 165 ●●

Interphase Barriers 166 ●●

Non-Padlockable Handle Block 168 ■■

Padlockable Handle Block 168 ■■

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 169 ❏❏❏❏

Cylinder Lock 169 ❏❏

Key Interlock Kit 170 ❏❏❏❏

Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●

Electrical (Solenoid) Operator 172 ●●

Plug-in Adapters 174 ●●

Rear Connecting Studs 176 ●●

Panelboard Connecting Straps 177 ●●

Handle Mechanisms 178 ●●

Door Hardware/Accessories 182 ●●

Handle Extension 182 ●●

IQ Energy Sentinel 184 ●

Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer)

Special Calibration 186 ●●

Moisture Fungus Treatment 186 ●●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 186 ●●

Marine/Naval Application 186 ●●

■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –

not both

●Accessory available/Modification available

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 43

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60Hz) Volts Dc

240 380 415 440 500 600 250➂

KDB

HKD

KDC

2, 3

2, 3, 4

100

200

–

100

–

100

–

45, 46, 49

➀Weights shown are for thermal magnetic

trip units. 3-pole electronic trip units weigh

2.5 lbs. (1.134 kg).

➁2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles

of 3-pole circuit breaker.

➂Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at

10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.

Typical Series C K-Frame Circuit Breaker

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

NEMA/UL489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60Hz) Volts Dc

240 277 480 600 250➁➂

KDB

HKD

2, 3

2, 3, 4

100

–

45, 46, 49

KDC

CKD

CHKD

2, 3, 4

200

100

–

100

45, 46, 49

48, 50

■All Series C K-frame Circuit Breakers

are HACR rated.

■K-frame circuit breakers are avail-

able as individual components

(Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or

factory assembled complete

breakers. OPTIM circuit breakers

are available as factory assembled

only.

■K-frame circuit breakers with non-

interchangeable trip units are

suitable for reverse feed use.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

44 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

➀Adjust by rating plug.

➁By OPTIMizer/BIM.

➂Cutler-Hammer PowerNet kit for field upgrade.

BIM = Breaker Interface Module

(A) = GF Alarm

Is = Sensor Rating

In = Rating Plug

Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting

K-Frame Digitrip Selection Guide

Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 550

RMS Sensing Yes Yes

Breaker Type

Frame KK

Ampere Range 70-400A 70-400A

Interrupting Rating at 480V 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA)

Protection

Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG

Fixed Rated Plug (In) Yes Yes Yes

Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes

Long Delay Protection (L)

Adjustable Rating Plug (In) Yes Yes No

Long Delay Pickup 0.5-1.0 (In)➀0.5-1.0 (In)➀0.4-1.0 x (In)

Long Delay Time I2T 12 Seconds 12 Seconds 2-24 Seconds

Long Delay Time I4T No No 1-5 Seconds

Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes

High Load Alarm No No 0.5-1.0 x Ir

Short Delay Protection (S)

Short Delay Pickup 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In) 150-800% x (Ir)

Short Delay Time I2T 100 ms No 100-500 ms

Short Delay Time Flat No Inst-300 ms 100-500 ms

Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No No

Instantaneous Protection (I)

Instantaneous Pickup No 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In)

Discriminator No No Yes

Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes

Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground Fault Alarm No No 20-100% x (Is)

Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 20-100% x (Is)

Ground Fault Delay I2T No No 100-500 ms

Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst-500 ms Inst-500 ms 100-500 ms

Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No No

Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes

System Diagnostics

Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes

Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes

Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes

Remote Signal Contact – Ground Alarm Yes Yes No

Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional

System Monitoring

Digital Display No No Yes➁

Current No No Yes

Power and Energy No No No

Power Quality-Harmonics No No No

Power Factor No No No

Communications

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No No➂

Testing

Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 45

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

Types KD, HKD, and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Standard Interrupting Capacity

600 Vac Rated

35 kAIC @ 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity

600 Vac Rated

65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Ultra High Interrupting

Capacity Current Limiting

600 Vac Rated

100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Thermal Magnetic

Trip Unit Only

For Use With: Standard

or High or Ultra High

Interrupting Frames

Standard Terminals Only

See Page 51 for

Optional Terminals

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Catalog Number

2-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

KD2100

KD2125

KD2150

KD2175

KD2200

KD2225

KD2250

KD2300

KD2350

KD2400

KD2400F HKD2100

HKD2125

HKD2150

HKD2175

HKD2200

HKD2225

HKD2250

HKD2300

HKD2350

HKD2400

HKD2400F KDC2100

KDC2125

KDC2150

KDC2175

KDC2200

KDC2225

KDC2250

KDC2300

KDC2350

KDC2400

KDC2400F KT2100T

KT2125T

KT2150T

KT2175T

KT2200T

KT2225T

KT2250T

KT2300T

KT2350T

KT2400T

TA300K➀

TA350K➀

2TA400K➁

3-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

KD3100

KD3125

KD3150

KD3175

KD3200

KD3225

KD3250

KD3300

KD3350

KD3400

KD3400F HKD3100

HKD3125

HKD3150

HKD3175

HKD3200

HKD3225

HKD3250

HKD3300

HKD3350

HKD3400

HKD3400F KDC3100

KDC3125

KDC3150

KDC3175

KDC3200

KDC3225

KDC3250

KDC3300

KDC3350

KDC3400

KDC3400F KT3100T

KT3125T

KT3150T

KT3175T

KT3200T

KT3225T

KT3250T

KT3300T

KT3350T

KT3400T

TA300K➀

TA350K➀

3TA400K➁

4-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

KD4100

KD4125

KD4150

KD4175

KD4200

KD4225

KD4250

KD4300

KD4350

KD4400

KD4400F HKD4100

HKD4125

HKD4150

HKD4175

HKD4200

HKD4225

HKD4250

HKD4300

HKD4350

HKD4400

HKD4400F KDC4100

KDC4125

KDC4150

KDC4175

KDC4200

KDC4225

KDC4250

KDC4300

KDC4350

KDC4400

KDC4400F KT3100T

KT3125T

KT3150T

KT3175T

KT3200T

KT3225T

KT3250T

KT3300T

KT3350T

KT3400T

TA300K➀

TA350K➀

4TA400K➁

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C104 for Breaker; 29C603 for Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit

➀Individually packed.

➁2TA400K, 3TA400K, and 4TA400K terminal

kits contain one terminal for each pole and

one terminal cover.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

46 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

Types KD, HKD, and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C➀

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only➁ Digitrip 310 Rating Plug Only Standard

Terminals Only

See Page 51

for Optional

Terminals

Standard

Interrupting

Capacity

600 Vac

Rated

35 kAIC @

480 Vac

High

Interrupting

Capacity

600 Vac

Rated

65 kAIC @

480 Vac

Ultra High

Interrupting

Capacity

Current

Limiting

600 Vac Rated

100 kAIC @

480 Vac

Standard Options Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

Adjustable

Rating Plugs

Adjustable

Short Time

Delay with

I2t Short

Delay Ramp

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup with

I2t Short

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Ampere

Rating

Catalog

Number

Catalog Number

3-Pole➂

125 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG 70

100

110

125

1KES070T

1KES090T

1KES100T

1KES110T

1KES125T

70/90/100/125

A1KES125T1

TA300K➃

250 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG 70

100

125

150

160

175

200

225

250

2KES070T

2KES100T

2KES125T

2KES150T

2KES160T

2KES175T

2KES200T

2KES225T

2KES250T

125/150/200/250

A2KES250T1

TA300K➃

400 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG 200

225

250

300

350

400

4KES200T

4KES225T

4KES250T

4KES300T

4KES350T

4KES400T

200/250/300/400

A4KES400T1

TA300K➃

TA350K➃

3TA400K➃

4-Pole➅➆

125 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4125LS KES4125LSI ––70

100

110

125

1KES070T

1KES090T

1KES100T

1KES110T

1KES125T

70/90/100/125

A1KES125T1

TA300K➃

250 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4250LS KES4250LSI ––70

100

125

150

160

175

200

225

250

2KES070T

2KES100T

2KES125T

2KES150T

2KES160T

2KES175T

2KES200T

2KES225T

2KES250T

125/150/200/250

A2KES250T1

TA300K➃

400 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4400LS KES4400LSI – – 200

225

250

300

350

400

4KES200T

4KES225T

4KES250T

4KES300T

4KES350T

4KES400T

200/250/300/400

A4KES400T1

TA300K➃

TA350K➃

3TA400K➃

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C104 for Breaker; 29C614 for Electronic Trip Unit

➀Ampere rating is established by rating plug.

➁For Ac use only.

➂3-pole KES Trip Units are for use in 3-pole

frames only.

➃Individually packed.

➄3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain

one terminal for each pole and one terminal

cover.

➅Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use

corresponding 3-pole trip unit if protected

neutral pole is not required.

➆Fully rated neutral pole protection is stan-

dard. For 50% rated protection on neutral

pole, add suffix E to 4-pole trip unit catalog

number.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 47

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

240 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc

Complete Circuit Breaker

Without Line and

Load Terminals

With Line

Terminals Only

With Standard Line

and Load Terminals Only

Catalog Number

2-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

–

DK2250W

DK2300W

DK2350W

DK2400W

–

DK2250Y

DK2300Y

DK2350Y

DK2400Y

–

DK2250

DK2300

DK2350

DK2400

3-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

–

DK3250W

DK3300W

DK3350W

DK3400W

–

DK3250Y

DK3300Y

DK3350Y

DK3400Y

–

DK3250

DK3300

DK3350

DK3400

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc

Complete Circuit Breaker

Without Line and

Load Terminals

With Standard Line

and Load Terminals

Catalog Number

2-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

KDB2100W

KDB2125W

KDB2150W

KDB2175W

KDB2200W

KDB2225W

KDB2250W

KDB2300W

KDB2350W

KDB2400W

KDB2100

KDB2125

KDB2150

KDB2175

KDB2200

KDB2225

KDB2250

KDB2300

KDB2350

KDB2400

3-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

KDB3100W

KDB3125W

KDB3150W

KDB3175W

KDB3200W

KDB3225W

KDB3250W

KDB3300W

KDB3350W

KDB3400W

KDB3100

KDB3125

KDB3150

KDB3175

KDB3200

KDB3225

KDB3250

KDB3300

KDB3350

KDB3400

Note: Molded case switches may open above

4000 amperes.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C104

Molded Case Switches

Molded case switches are used as compact switches in

applications requiring high current switching capabilities.

Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker

components and are of the high instantaneous automatic

type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL 1087.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

240 Vac Maximum,

250 Vdc

600 Vac Maximum,

250 Vdc

600 Vac Maximum,

250 Vdc

Complete Circuit

Breaker with Standard

Line and Load

Terminals

Complete Circuit

Breaker with

Standard Line and

Load Terminals

Complete Circuit

Breaker with Standard

Line and Load

Terminals. Suitable

for Reverse Feed Use

Catalog Number

2-Pole

400 DK2400K KD2400K KDB2400K

3-Pole

400 DK3400K KD3400K KDB3400K

4-Pole

400 – KD4400K –

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C104

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

48 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

the 75°C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Digitrip 310 Rating Plug Only Standard

Terminals Only

See Page 51

for Optional

Terminals

Standard

Interrupting

Capacity

35 kAIC @

480 Vac

High

Interrupting

Capacity

65 kAIC @

480 Vac

Standard Options Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

Adjustable

Rating Plug

Adjustable

Short Time

Delay with

I2t Short

Delay Ramp

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup with

I2t Short

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Ampere

Rating

Catalog

Number

Catalog Number

3-Pole

125 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG 70

100

110

125

1KES070T

1KES090T

1KES100T

1KES110T

1KES125T

70/90/100/125

A1KES125T1

TA300K➃

250 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG 70

100

125

150

160

175

200

225

250

2KES070T

2KES100T

2KES125T

2KES150T

2KES160T

2KES175T

2KES200T

2KES225T

2KES250T

125/150/200/250

A2KES250T1

TA300K➃

400 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG 200

225

250

300

350

400

4KES200T

4KES225T

4KES250T

4KES300T

4KES350T

4KES400T

200/250/300/400

A4KES400T1

TA300K➃

TA350K➃

3TA400K➃

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C104 for Breaker; 29C614 for KES Trip Unit

➀Individually packed.

➁TA400K, T400K and TA401K terminal kits

contain one terminal for each pole and one

terminal cover.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 49

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response)➀

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug

OPTIM 550

LSI LSIG LSIA

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 KD3125T52W KD3125T56W KD3125T57W 70

100

110

125

ORPK125A070

ORPK125A090

ORPK125A100

ORPK125A110

ORPK125A125

250 KD3250T52W KD3250T56W KD3250T57W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPK025A125

ORPK025A150

ORPK025A175

ORPK025A200

ORPK025A225

ORPK025A250

400 KD3400T52W KD3400T56W KD3400T57W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPK40A200

ORPK40A225

ORPK40A250

ORPK40A300

ORPK40A350

ORPK40A400

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 HKD3125T52W HKD3125T56W HKD3125T57W 70

100

110

125

ORPK125A070

ORPK125A090

ORPK125A100

ORPK125A110

ORPK125A125

250 HKD3250T52W HKD3250T56W HKD3250T57W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPK025A125

ORPK025A150

ORPK025A175

ORPK025A200

ORPK025A225

ORPK025A250

400 HKD3400T52W HKD3400T56W HKD3400T57W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPK40A200

ORPK40A225

ORPK40A250

ORPK40A300

ORPK40A350

ORPK40A400

3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 KDC3125T52W KDC3125T56W KDC3125T57W 70

100

110

125

ORPK125A070

ORPK125A090

ORPK125A100

ORPK125A110

ORPK125A125

250 KDC3250T52W KDC3250T56W KDC3250T57W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPK025A125

ORPK025A150

ORPK025A175

ORPK025A200

ORPK025A225

ORPK025A250

400 KDC3400T52W KDC3400T56W KDC3400T57W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPK40A200

ORPK40A225

ORPK40A250

ORPK40A300

ORPK40A350

ORPK40A400

➀Long delay I4t response selection limits short

delay time to flat response.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C104

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

50 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response)➀

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug

OPTIM 550

LSI LSIG LSIA

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 CKD3125T52W CKD3125T56W CKD3125T57W 70

100

110

125

ORPK125A070

ORPK125A090

ORPK125A100

ORPK125A110

ORPK125A125

250 CKD3250T52W CKD3250T56W CKD3250T57W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPK025A125

ORPK025A150

ORPK025A175

ORPK025A200

ORPK025A225

ORPK025A250

400 CKD3400T52W CKD3400T56W CKD3400T57W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPK40A200

ORPK40A225

ORPK40A250

ORPK40A300

ORPK40A350

ORPK40A400

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt AC Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 CHKD3125T52W CHKD3125T56W CHKD3125T57W 70

100

110

125

ORPK125A070

ORPK125A090

ORPK125A100

ORPK125A110

ORPK125A125

250 CHKD3250T52W CHKD3250T56W CHKD3250T57W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPK025A125

ORPK025A150

ORPK025A175

ORPK025A200

ORPK025A225

ORPK025A250

400 CHKD3400T52W CHKD3400T56W CHKD3400T57W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPK40A200

ORPK40A225

ORPK40A250

ORPK40A300

ORPK40A350

ORPK40A400

➀Long delay I4t response selection limits short

delay time to flat response.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C104

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 51

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

Line and Load Terminals

Line and load terminals provide wire

connecting capabilities for specific

ranges of continuous current ratings

and wire types. All terminals comply

with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,

Standards UL486A and UL486B

and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65,

or Electrical Bulletin 1165. Unless

otherwise specified, K-frame circuit

breaker line and load terminals

are shipped separately for field

installation.

Ordering Information

K-frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI

terminals as standard. When

optional copper or Cu/AI terminals

are required, order by catalog num-

ber. Specify if factory installation is

required.

Line and Load Terminals

Maximum Breaker

Amperes

Terminal Body

Material

Wire Type AWG Wire Range/

No. Conductors

Metric Wire

Range mm2Terminal

Catalog Number

Figure Terminals with Control Wire

Termination Catalog Number

Figure

Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals

225

350

400

Aluminum

Cu/AI

3-350/(1)

250-500/(1)

3/0-250/(2)

35-185

120-240

95-120

TA300K➀

TA350K➀

2TA400K➃

3TA400K➄

4TA400K➅

–

2TA400KCW➃

3TA400KCW➄

4TA400KCW➅

–

Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals

225

350

400

Copper

Aluminum

Cu/AI

3-350/(1)

250-500/(1)

3/0-250/(2)

2/0-250/(2)

2/0-500/(1)

500-750/(1)

35-185

120-240

95-120

70-120

70-240

300-400

T300K➀

T350K➀

2T400K➃

3T400K➄

4T400K➅

2TA401K➃

3TA401K➄

4TA401K➅

TA402K

–

2T400KCW➃

3T400KCW➄

4T400KCW➅

2TA401KCW➃

3TA401KCW➄

4TA401KCW➅

–

➀Individually packed.

➁Terminal kits contain one terminal for each

pole and one terminal cover.

➂Terminal kits contain one terminal for each

pole and three interphase barriers.

See page 53 for other termination accessories.

Figure 1. TA401K Figure 2. TA400K, T400K Figure 3. TA350K, T350K

Figure 4. TA300K, T300K Figure 5. T400KCW, TA400KCW, TA401KCW

➃2-Pole Kit.

➄3-Pole Kit.

➅4-Pole Kit.

Figure 6. TA402K

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

52 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

Dimensions/Weights

Dimensions, Inches (mm)

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2, 3 5.5

(140)

10.125

(257)

4.063

(103)

4 7.219

(183)

10.125

(257)

4.063

(103)

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker

Type

Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit➀

Number of Poles

232323

DK 10

(4.536)

11.5

(5.216)

––––

KDB 10

(4.536)

11.5

(5.216)

––––

KD 10

(4.536)

11.5

(5.216)

7.5

(3.402)

8.5

(3.856)

1.5

(.680)

1.5

(.680)

HKD 10

(4.536)

11.5

(5.216)

7.5

(3.402)

8.5

(3.856)

1.5

(.680)

1.5

(.680)

KDC 10

(4.536)

11.5

(5.216)

7.5

(3.402)

8.5

(3.856)

1.5

(.680)

1.5

(.680)

➀Ampere rating available with electronic trip

unit only.

Catalog Numbering System

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog

numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

Trip Unit Catalog NumberCircuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Number

KD 3 400 F

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Type

DKB

HKD

KDC

CKD

CHKD

Number

of Poles

2: 2 Poles

3: 3 Poles

4: 4 Poles

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Ampere

Rating

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

Suffix

C: Copper Terminals

E: 50% Protected

Neutral Pole (4-Pole

Electronic Trip Circuit

Breaker Only)

F: Frame Only

K: High Magnetic Molded

Case Switch

W: Without Terminals

X: Load Side

Terminals Only

Y: Line Side

Terminals Only

No Suffix Number

Indicates Standard

Load and Lineside

Terminals

KT 3 400 T

Trip Unit

Type

KT: Thermal-

Magnetic

KES: Electronic

Trip Unit/

Rating

Plug

Ampere

Rating

70➀

90➀

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

Suffix

LS: Electronic Trip Unit

Adjustable Short

Time Delay with I2t

Short Delay Ramp

LSI: Electronic Trip Unit

Independently

Adjustable Short

Time Pickup and

Delay

LSG: Electronic Trip Unit

Adjustable Short

Time Pickup with I2t

Short Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

LSIG: Electronic Trip Unit

Independently

Adjustable Short

Time Pickup and

Delay and Ground

Fault Protection

V: 50°C Calibration

(Thermal-Magnetic

Trip Units Only)

E: 50% Protected

Neutral Pole

(4-Pole Electronic

Trip Unit Only)

Terminals Only

T: Trip Unit Only

OPTIM Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Number

KD 3 125 T5 7 W

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Type

HKD

KDC

CKD

CHKD

Number

of Poles

3: 3 Poles

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Ampere

Rating

125

250

400

Suffix

W: Without

Terminals

Trip

Type

2 – LSI

6 – LSIG

7 – LSIA

Number

of Poles

2: 2 Poles

3: 3 Poles

4: 4 Poles

Trip

Model

T5 –

Model

550

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 53

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

70-400 Amperes

Series C K-Frame

Allowable Accessory Combinations

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles

in the circuit breaker.

Reference

Page

2-Pole➀ 3-Pole 4-Pole

Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)

Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) 140 ■❏❏■

Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) 140 ❏❏■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) 143 ■■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) 143 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) 143 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 145 ❏❏❏❏

Shunt Trip – Standard 149 ■■■■■

Shunt Trip – Low Energy 152 ■■■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism 156 ■■■■

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit

(OPTIM 550)

160 ■

External Accessories

End Cap Kit 161 ●● ●

Keeper Nut 161 ●● ●

Control Wire Terminal Kit 162 ●● ●

Multiwire Connectors 162 ●● ●

Base Mounting Hardware 163 ●● ●

Terminal Shields 165 ●● ●

Interphase Barriers 166 ●● ●

Non-Padlockable Handle Block 168 ■■■

Padlockable Handle Block 168 ■

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 169 ■❏❏❏❏

Cylinder Lock 169 ❏❏❏❏

Key Interlock Kit 170 ■❏❏❏❏❏

Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●

Walking Beam Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●●

Electrical (Solenoid) Operator 172 ●●

Plug-in Adapters 174 ●● ●

Rear Connecting Studs 176 ●● ●

Panelboard Connecting Straps 177 ●● ●

Handle Mechanisms 178 ●● ●

Door Hardware/Accessories 182 ●● ●

Handle Extension 182 ●● ●

IQ Energy Sentinel 184 ●●

Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit 184 ●● ●

OPTIM System Components 3-Poles

Breaker Interface Module (BIM) 185

Digitrip OPTIMizer 185

Auxiliary Power Module 185

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Software 185

Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer)

Special Calibration 186 ●● ●

Moisture Fungus Treatment 186 ●● ●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 186 ●● ●

Marine Application 186 ●● ●

➀2-pole breaker supplied in 3-pole frame.

Current carrying parts omitted from

center pole.

■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –

not both

●Accessory available/Modification available

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

54 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 55

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

Typical Series C L-Frame Circuit Breaker

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings ➀

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc

240 415 690 250➁➂

LDB 2, 3 Icu

Ics

LD 2, 3, 4 Icu

Ics

57, 59

CLD➃ 2, 3, 4 Icu

Ics

58, 61

HLD 2, 3, 4 Icu

Ics

100

57, 59

CHLD➃ 2, 3, 4 Icu

Ics

100

LDC 2, 3, 4 Icu

Ics

200

100

57, 60

CLDC➃ 2, 3, 4 Icu

Ics

200

100

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings➀

Circuit

Breaker Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (RMS Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc

240 277 480 600 125 250➁➂ 500

LDB

CLD

HLD

CHLD➃

2, 3

2, 3, 4

100

–

57, 59

58, 61

57, 59

LDC

CLDC➃

2, 3, 4

200

–

100

–

57, 60

➀Utilization category A circuit breakers.

➁L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum.

➂2-pole circuit breaker or two poles of

3-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating

Thermal-Magnetic trip unit only.

➃100% rated breakers

■All Series C L-frame circuit breakers

are HACR rated.

■L-frame circuit breakers are avail-

able as individual components

(Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or

factory assembled complete

breakers. OPTIM circuit breakers

are available as factory assembled

only.

■L-frame circuit breakers with non-

interchangeable trip units are

suitable for reverse feed use.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

56 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

➀Adjust by rating plug.

➁By OPTIMizer/BIM.

➂Cutler-Hammer PowerNet kit for field upgrade.

BIM = Breaker Interface Module

(A) = GF Alarm

Is = Sensor Rating

In = Rating Plug

Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting

L-Frame Digitrip Selection Guide

Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 750 Digitrip OPTIM 1050

RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes

Breaker Type

Frame L L L L

Ampere Range 300-600A 200-600A 200-600A 200-600A

Interrupting Rating @ 480V 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA) 35, 65, 100 (kA)

Protection

Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG

Fixed Rated Plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Long Delay Protection (L)

Adjustable Rating Plug (In) Yes Yes No No No

Long Delay Pickup 0.5-1.0 (In)➀0.5-1.0 (In)➀0.4-1.0 x (In) 0.4-1.0 x (In) 0.4-1.0 x (In)

Long Delay Time I2T 12 Seconds 12 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds

Long Delay Time I4T No No 1-5 Seconds 1-5 Seconds 1-5 Seconds

Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

High Load Alarm No No 0.5-1.0 x Ir0.5-1.0 x Ir0.5-1.0 x Ir

Short Delay Protection (S)

Short Delay Pickup 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In) 150-800% x (Ir) 150-800% x (Ir) 150-800% x (Ir)

Short Delay Time I2T 100 ms No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Short Delay Time Flat No Inst-300 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No No Yes Yes

Instantaneous Protection (I)

Instantaneous Pickup No 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In)

Discriminator No No Yes Yes Yes

Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground Fault Alarm No No 20-100% x (Is) 20-100% x (Is) 20-100% x (Is)

Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 20-100% x (Is) 20-100% x (Is) 20-100% x (Is)

Ground Fault Delay I2T No No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst-500 ms Inst-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No No Yes Yes

Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

System Diagnostics

Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Yes

Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes Yes

Remote Signal Contact – Ground Alarm Yes Yes No Yes Yes

Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included Included

System Monitoring

Digital Display No No Yes➁Yes➁Yes➁

Current No No Yes Yes Yes

Power and Energy No No No No Yes

Power Quality-Harmonics No No No No Yes

Power Factor No No No No Yes

Communications

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No No➂Yes Yes

Testing

Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 57

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

Types LD, HLD, and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Standard Interrupting Capacity

600 Vac Rated

35 kAIC @ 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity

600 Vac Rated

65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Ultra High Interrupting

Capacity Current Limiting

600 Vac Rated

100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Thermal Magnetic

Trip Unit Only

For Use With: Standard

or High or Ultra High

Interrupting Frames

Magnetic Trip Range

is 5-10 x Continuous

Ampere Rating

Standard Terminals Only

See Page 63 for

Optional Terminals

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Catalog Number

2-Pole

300

350

400

450

500

600

LD2300

LD2350

LD2400

LD2450

LD2500

LD2600

LD2600F HLD2300

HLD2350

HLD2400

HLD2450

HLD2500

HLD2600

HLD2600F LDC2300

LDC2350

LDC2400

LDC2450

LDC2500

LDC2600

LDC2600F LT2300T

LT2350T

LT2400T

LT2450T

LT2500T

LT2600T

TA602LD➀

2TA603LDK➁

3-Pole

300

350

400

450

500

600

LD3300

LD3350

LD3400

LD3450

LD3500

LD3600

LD3600F HLD3300

HLD3350

HLD3400

HLD3450

HLD3500

HLD3600

HLD3600F LDC3300

LDC3350

LDC3400

LDC3450

LDC3500

LDC3600

LDC3600F LT3300T

LT3350T

LT3400T

LT3450T

LT3500T

LT3600T

TA602LD➀

3TA603LDK➁

4-Pole➂

300

350

400

450

500

600

LD4300

LD4350

LD4400

LD4450

LD4500

LD4600

LD4600F HLD4300

HLD4350

HLD4400

HLD4450

HLD4500

HLD4600

HLD4600F LDC4300

LDC4350

LDC4400

LDC4450

LDC4500

LDC4600

LDC4600F LT4300T

LT4350T

LT4400T

LT4450T

LT4500T

LT4600T

TA602LD➀

4TA603LDK➁

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C607 for Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit

➀Individually packed.

➁Terminal kits contain one terminal for each

pole and one terminal cover.

Types LD, HLD, and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C➀

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only➃ Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only Standard

Terminals Only

See Page 63

for Optional

Terminals

Standard

Interrupting

Capacity

600 Vac

Rated

35 kAIC @

480 Vac

High

Interrupting

Capacity

600 Vac

Rated

65 kAIC @

480 Vac

Ultra High

Interrupting

Capacity

Current

Limiting

600 Vac Rated

100 kAIC @

480 Vac

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug)

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay

Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time

(Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay

Time to Instantaneous

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground

Fault Delay (Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

Adjustable

Rating Plug

Ampere

Rating

Catalog

Number

Catalog Number

3-Pole➂

600 LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG 300

350

400

500

600

6LES300T

6LES350T

6LES400T

6LES500T

6LES600T

300/400/500/600

A6LES600T1

TA602LD➀

3TA603LDK➁

4-Pole➂

600 LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F LES4600LS LES4600LSI – – 300

350

400

500

600

6LES300T

6LES350T

6LES400T

6LES500T

6LES600T

300/400/500/600

A6LES600T1

TA602LD➃

4TA603LDK➁

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C615 for LES Trip Unit

➂Neutral is in right pole.

➃For AC use only.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

58 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with

Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

600 Vac Rated, 250 Vdc

Complete Circuit Breaker

Without Line and

Load Terminals

With Standard Line

and Load Terminals Only

Catalog Number

2-Pole

300

350

400

450

500

600

LDB2300W

LDB2350W

LDB2400W

LDB2450W

LDB2500W

LDB2600W

LDB2300

LDB2350

LDB2400

LDB2450

LDB2500

LDB2600

3-Pole

300

350

400

450

500

600

LDB3300W

LDB3350W

LDB3400W

LDB3450W

LDB3500W

LDB3600W

LDB3300

LDB3350

LDB3400

LDB3450

LDB3500

LDB3600

100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD, and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

the 75°C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: Breaker

Frame, Trip Unit, Rating Plug and Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C➀

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only Standard

Terminals Only

See Page 63

for Optional

Terminals

Standard

Interrupting

Capacity

600 Vac

Rated

35 kAIC @

480 Vac

High

Interrupting

Capacity

600 Vac

Rated

65 kAIC @

480 Vac

Ultra High

Interrupting

Capacity

Current

Limiting

600 Vac Rated

100 kAIC @

480 Vac

Standard Options Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

Adjustable

Rating Plug

Adjustable

Short Time

Delay with

I2t Short

Delay Ramp

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay

Ground Fault

Protection

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup with

I2t Short

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Ampere

Rating

Catalog

Number

Catalog Number

3-Pole

600 CLD3600F CHLD3600F CLDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG 300

350

400

500

600

6LES300T

6LES350T

6LES400T

6LES500T

6LES600T

300/400/500/600

A6LES600T1

TA602LD➁

3TA603LDK➂

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C615 for LES Trip Unit

➀Ampere rating is established by rating plug.

➁Individually packed.

➂3TA603LDK and 4TA603LDK terminal kits

contain one terminal for each pole and one

terminal cover.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C105 for Breaker Note: Molded Case Switch may trip above 6000 amperes.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C105 for Molded Case Switch

Molded Case Switches

Molded case switches are used as compact switches in

applications requiring high current switching capabilities.

Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker

components and are of the high instantaneous automatic

type.➃ Molded case switches are listed in accordance

with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL 1087.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Standard Terminals Only

See Page 63 for

Optional Terminals

Circuit Breaker Only

Without Line and Load Terminals

Catalog Number

2-Pole

600 LD2600WK 2TA603LDK

3-Pole

600 LD3600WK 3TA603LDK

4-Pole

600 LD4600WK 4TA603LDK

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 59

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

Digitrip OPTIM➀ Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM

Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response)➁

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed Rating

Plug

OPTIM 550 OPTIM 750 OPTIM 1050

LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 –– –

LD3125T76W LD3125T77W LD3125T106W LD3125T107W 70

100

110

125

ORPL125A070

ORPL125A090

ORPL125A100

ORPL125A110

ORPL125A125

250 –– –

LD3250T76W LD3250T77W LD3250T106W LD3250T107W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPL025A125

ORPL025A150

ORPL025A175

ORPL025A200

ORPL025A225

ORPL025A250

400 LD3400T52W LD3400T56W LD3400T57W LD3400T76W LD3400T77W LD3400T106W LD3400T107W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPL40A200

ORPL40A225

ORPL40A250

ORPL40A300

ORPL40A350

ORPL40A400

600 LD3600T52W LD3600T56W LD3600T57W LD3600T76W LD3600T77W LD3600T106W LD3600T107W 300

350

400

500

600

ORPL60A300

ORPL60A350

ORPL60A400

ORPL60A500

ORPL60A600

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 –– –

HLD3125T76W HLD3125T77W HLD3125T106W HLD3125T107W 70

100

110

125

ORPL125A070

ORPL125A090

ORPL125A100

ORPL125A110

ORPL125A125

250 –– –

HLD3250T76W HLD3250T77W HLD3250T106W HLD3250T107W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPL025A125

ORPL025A150

ORPL025A175

ORPL025A200

ORPL025A225

ORPL025A250

400 HLD3400T52W HLD3400T56W HLD3400T57W HLD3400T76W HLD3400T77W HLD3400T106W HLD3400T107W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPL40A200

ORPL40A225

ORPL40A250

ORPL40A300

ORPL40A350

ORPL40A400

600 HLD3600T52W HLD3600T56W HLD3600T57W HLD3600T76W HLD3600T77W HLD3600T106W HLD3600T107W 300

350

400

500

600

ORPL60A300

ORPL60A350

ORPL60A400

ORPL60A500

ORPL60A600

➀One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C

bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as

standard, on models 750 and 1050.

➁Long delay I4t response selection limits short

delay time to flat response.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

60 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit

Digitrip OPTIM➀ Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM

Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response)➁

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed Rating

Plug

OPTIM 550 OPTIM 750 OPTIM 1050

LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA

Catalog Number

3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 –– –

LDC3125T76W LDC3125T77W LDC3125T106W LDC3125T107W 70

100

110

125

ORPL125A070

ORPL125A090

ORPL125A100

ORPL125A110

ORPL125A125

250 –– –

LDC3250T76W LDC3250T77W LDC3250T106W LDC3250T107W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPL025A125

ORPL025A150

ORPL025A175

ORPL025A200

ORPL025A225

ORPL025A250

400 LDC3400T52W LDC3400T56W LDC3400T57W LDC3400T76W LDC3400T77W LDC3400T106W LDC3400T107W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPL40A200

ORPL40A225

ORPL40A250

ORPL40A300

ORPL40A350

ORPL40A400

600 LDC3600T52W LDC3600T56W LDC3600T57W LDC3600T76W LDC3600T77W LDC3600T106W LDC3600T107W 300

350

400

500

600

ORPL60A300

ORPL60A350

ORPL60A400

ORPL60A500

ORPL60A600

➀One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C

bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as

standard, on models 750 and 1050.

➁Long delay I4t response selection limits short

delay time to flat response.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 61

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM➀ Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM

Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response)➁

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed Rating

Plug

OPTIM 550 OPTIM 750 OPTIM 1050

LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 –––

CLD3125T76W CLD3125T77W CLD3125T106W CLD3125T107W 70

100

110

125

ORPL125A07

ORPL125A09

ORPL125A10

ORPL125A11

ORPL125A125

250 –––

CLD3250T76W CLD3250T77W CLD3250T106W CLD3250T107W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPL025A12

ORPL025A15

ORPL025A17

ORPL025A20

ORPL025A22

ORPL025A250

400 CLD3400T52W CLD3400T56W CLD3400T57W CLD3400T76W CLD3400T77W CLD3400T106W CLD3400T107W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPL40A200

ORPL40A225

ORPL40A250

ORPL40A300

ORPL40A350

ORPL40A400

600 CLD3600T52W CLD3600T56W CLD3600T57W CLD3600T76W CLD3600T77W CLD3600T106W CLD3600T107W 300

350

400

500

600

ORPL60A300

ORPL60A350

ORPL60A400

ORPL60A500

ORPL60A600

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 –––

CHLD3125T76W CHLD3125T77W CHLD3125T106W CHLD3125T107W 70

100

110

125

ORPL125A070

ORPL125A090

ORPL125A100

ORPL125A110

ORPL125A125

250 –––

CHLD3250T76W CHLD3250T77W CHLD3250T106W CHLD3250T107W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPL025A125

ORPL025A150

ORPL025A175

ORPL025A200

ORPL025A225

ORPL025A250

400 CHLD3400T52W CHLD3400T56W CHLD3400T57W CHLD3400T76W CHLD3400T77W CHLD3400T106W CHLD3400T107W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPL40A200

ORPL40A225

ORPL40A250

ORPL40A300

ORPL40A350

ORPL40A400

600 CHLD3600T52W CHLD3600T56W CHLD3600T57W CHLD3600T76W CHLD3600T77W CHLD3600T106W CHLD3600T107W 300

350

400

500

600

ORPL60A300

ORPL60A350

ORPL60A400

ORPL60A500

ORPL60A600

➀One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C

bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as

standard, on models 750 and 1050.

➁Long delay I4t response selection limits short

delay time to flat response.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

62 March 1999

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM➀ Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM

Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response)➁

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed Rating

Plug

OPTIM 550 OPTIM 750 OPTIM 1050

LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA

Catalog Number

3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

125 –– –

CLDC3125T76W CLDC3125T77W CLDC3125T106W CLDC3125T107W 70

100

110

125

ORPL125A070

ORPL125A090

ORPL125A100

ORPL125A110

ORPL125A125

250 –– –

CLDC3250T76W CLDC3250T77W CLDC3250T106W CLDC3250T107W 125

150

175

200

225

250

ORPL025A125

ORPL025A150

ORPL025A175

ORPL025A200

ORPL025A225

ORPL025A250

400 CLDC3400T52W CLDC3400T56W CLDC3400T57W CLDC3400T76W CLDC3400T77W CLDC3400T106W CLDC3400T107W 200

225

250

300

350

400

ORPL40A200

ORPL40A225

ORPL40A250

ORPL40A300

ORPL40A350

ORPL40A400

600 CLDC3600T52W CLDC3600T56W CLDC3600T57W CLDC3600T76W CLDC3600T77W CLDC3600T106W CLDC3600T107W 300

350

400

500

600

ORPL60A300

ORPL60A350

ORPL60A400

ORPL60A500

ORPL60A600

➀One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C

bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as

standard, on models 750 and 1050.

➁Long delay I4t response selection limits short

delay time to flat response.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 63

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

Line and Load Terminals

Maximum Breaker

Amperes

Terminal Body

Material

Wire Type AWG Wire Range/

Number of Conductors

Metric Wire

Range mm2Terminal

Catalog Number

Terminals with Control Wire

Termination Catalog Numbers

Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals

400

450

500

600

Aluminum

Cu/AI

4/0-600 (1)

4-4/0 (2)

3/0-350 (2)

400-500 (2)

120-300

25-95

95-150

185-240

2TA401LDK– 2-Pole Kit➀

3TA401LDK– 3-Pole Kit➀

4TA401LDK– 4-Pole Kit➀

TA450LD➁

TA602LD➁

2TA603LDK– 2-Pole Kit➀

3TA603LDK– 3-Pole Kit➀

4TA603LDK– 4-Pole Kit➀

–

TA602LDCW

2TA602LDKW

3TA602LDKW

4TA602LDKW

Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals

600 Copper Cu 250-500 (2) 120-250 T602LD➁–

Line and Load Terminals

Line and load terminals provide wire

connecting capabilities for specific

ranges of continuous current ratings

and wire types. All terminals comply

with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,

Standards UL486A and UL486B

and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65M.

Unless otherwise specified, L-frame

circuit breaker line and load termi-

nals are shipped separately for field

installation.

The wire connecting terminal is

secured with two pan-head, slotted

screws and lock washers which can

be checked for the correct torque

loading or retightened from the

front of the circuit breaker before

installation of the conductors.

(Applies to all styles.) The circuit

breaker line/load terminal conduc-

tors are positioned in the conducting

holes in the wire connecting terminal

and are secured with recessed socket

screws which are tightened to the

correct torque loading from the front

of the circuit breaker.

Ordering Information

L-frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI

terminals as standard. When optional

copper terminals are required, order

by catalog number. Specify if factory

installation is required.

TA450LD or TA602LD

or T602LD Terminal

Pan-Head Screws and

Lockwashers (Installed

before Cable Clamping

Screws)

Terminal Cover

Screws

Retainer

➀Terminal kits contain one terminal for each

pole and one terminal cover.

➁Individually packed.

TA401LD or TA603LD

Terminal (Step-Type

Terminal Requires

Terminal Cover and

Warning Label.

See Inset.)

Pan-Head

Screws and

Lockwashers

Warning Label

Circuit Breaker

Line Terminal Cover

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

64 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

Catalog Numbering System

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog

numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Catalog NumberCircuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Number

LD 3 600 F

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Type

LDB

HLD

LDC

CLD

CHLD

CLDC

Number

of Poles

2: 2 Poles

3: 3 Poles

4: 4 Poles

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Ampere

Rating

300

350

400

450

500

600

Suffix

C: Copper Terminals

F: Frame Only

K: High Magnetic Molded

Case Switch

V: 50°C (Thermal-Mag-

netic Trip Units Only)

W: Without Terminals

X: Load Side

Terminals Only

Y: Line Side

Terminals Only

LT 3 400 T

Trip Unit

Type

LT: Thermal-

Magnetic

Number

of Poles

2: 2 Poles

3: 3 Poles

4: 4 Poles

Trip Unit/

Rating

Plug

Ampere

Rating

300

350

400

450

500

600

Suffix

T: Trip Unit

Thermal-Magnetic

Fixed Thermal

Adjustable Magnetic

V: 50°C Calibration

(Thermal-Magnetic

Trip Units Only)

OPTIM Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Number

LD 3 125 T5 7 W

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Type

HLD

LDC

CLD

CHLD

CLDC

Number

of Poles

3: 3 Poles

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Ampere

Rating

125

(Available

on Model

750 and

1050 only)

250

(Available

on Model

750 and

1050 only)

400

600

Suffix

W: Without

Terminals

Trip

Type

2 – LSI

(550 only)

6 – LSIG

7 – LSIA

Trip

Model

T5 –

Model 550

T7 –

Model 750

T10 –

Model 1050

Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Catalog Number

LES 3 600 LS P

Trip Unit

Type

LES: Electronic

Number

of Poles

3: 3 Poles

4: 4 Poles

Trip Unit

Ampere

Rating

600

Suffix

P: 100% Protected

Neutral on 4-Pole

Trip Unit

Suffix

LSI

LSG

LSIG

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker

Type

Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit

Number of Poles

234234234

LD, HLD,

LDC

(8.172)

(9.080)

(11.340)

(6.356)

(6.810)

(9.072)

(1.361)

(1.814)

(2.268)

LDB 18

(8.172)

(9.080)

(11.340)

––––––

Dimensions/Weights

Dimensions, Inches (mm)

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2, 3 8.25

(210)

10.75

(274)

4.062

(103)

4 11

(279)

10.75

(274)

4.062

(103)

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 65

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

➀2-pole breaker supplied in 3-pole frame.

Current carrying parts omitted from

center pole.

➁Refer to Cutler-Hammer for appropriate

neutral pole accessory combinations.

➂OPTIM models 750 and 1050 are factory

sealed and do not have the right pole space

available for accessories.

➃Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in

right poles on LES trip units.

■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –

not both

●Accessory available/Modification available

Allowable Accessory Combinations

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles

in the circuit breaker.

Reference

Page

2-Pole➀, 3-Pole 4-Pole

Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.➁

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)➂

Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) 140 ■■■■

Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) 140 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) 143 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) 143 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) 143 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination 146 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) and Alarm Switch Combination 146 ■■■■

Shunt Trip – Standard➃149 ■■■■

Shunt Trip – Low Energy➃152 ■■■■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism➃157 ■■■■

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit (OPTIM 550) 160 ■

External Accessories

End Cap Kit 161 ●●

Control Wire Terminal Kit 162 ●●

Base Mounting Hardware 163 ●●

Terminal Shields 165 ●●

Interphase Barriers 166 ●●

Non-Padlockable Handle Block 168 ■■

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 169 ❏❏❏❏

Key Interlock Kit 170 ❏❏❏❏

Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●

Walking Beam Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●●

Electrical (Motor) Operator 173 ●●

Plug-in Adapters 174 ●●

Rear Connecting Studs 176 ●●

Panelboard Connecting Straps 177 ●●

Handle Mechanisms 178 ●●

Door Hardware/Accessories 182 ●●

Handle Extension 182 ●●

Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit 184 ●●

OPTIM System Components 3-Poles

Ground Fault Alarm Unit 184

Potential Transformer Module 184

Breaker Interface Module (BIM) 185

Digitrip OPTIMizer 185

Auxiliary Power Module 185

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Software 185

Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer)

Special Calibration 186 ●●

Moisture Fungus Treatment 186 ●●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 186 ●●

Marine Application 186 ●●

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

66 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 67

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

300-800 Amperes

Series C M-Frame

Typical Series C M-Frame Circuit Breaker

➀Utilization category A circuit breakers.

➁Two poles or two poles of 3-pole circuit

breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only,

MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit

are not DC rated.

➂Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at

10 kA and 8 milliseconds at 22 kA.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

UL489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings➀

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc➁➂

240 480 600 250

MDL

CMDL

2, 3

69, 70

HMDL

CHMDL

2, 3

100

69, 70

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings➀

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity – RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA) ICU = ICS Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc➁➂

240 480 600 250

MDL

CMDL

2, 3

69, 70

HMDL

CHMDL

2, 3

100

69, 70

■All Series C M-frame circuit breakers

are HACR rated.

■MDL-frame circuit breakers are

available as individual compo-

nents (Frame, Trip Unit, Termi-

nals), or factory assembled

complete breakers.

■M-frame circuit breakers with

non-interchangeable trip units

are suitable for reverse feed use.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

68 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

300-800 Amperes

Series C M-Frame

➀Adjust by rating plug. In = Rating Plug

MDL-Frame Digitrip Selection Guide

Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310

RMS Sensing Yes

Breaker Type

Frame MDL

Ampere Range 400-800A

Interrupting Rating @ 480V 50, 65 (kA)

Protection

Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG

Fixed Rated Plug (In) Yes Yes

Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes

Long Delay Protection (L)

Adjustable Rating Plug (In) Yes Yes

Long Delay Pickup 0.5-1.0 (In) ➀0.5-1.0 (In) ➀

Long Delay Time I2T 12 Seconds 12 Seconds

Long Delay Time I4T No No

Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes

High Load Alarm No No

Short Delay Protection (S)

Short Delay Pickup 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In)

Short Delay Time I2T 100 ms No

Short Delay Time Flat No Inst-300 ms

Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No

Instantaneous Protection (I)

Instantaneous Pickup No 200-800% x (In)

Discriminator No No

Instantaneous Override Yes Yes

Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground Fault Alarm No No

Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame

Ground Fault Delay I2T No No

Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst-500 ms Inst-500 ms

Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No

Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes

System Diagnostics

Status LEDs Yes Yes

Cause of Trip LEDs No No

Magnitude of Trip Information No No

Remote Signal Contacts – Ground Alarm Yes Yes

System Monitoring

Digital Display No No

Current No No

Power and Energy No No

Power Quality – Harmonics No No

Power Factor No No

Communications

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No

Testing

Testing Method Test Set

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 69

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

300-800 Amperes

Series C M-Frame

Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Standard Interrupting Capacity

600 Vac Rated

50 kAIC @ 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity

600 Vac Rated

65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Thermal Magnetic

Trip Unit Only

For Use With: Standard

or High or Ultra High

Interrupting Frames

Magnetic Trip Range is 5-10

up through 600A;

4-8 on 700 and 800A x Continuous

Ampere Rating

Standard Terminals Only ➀

See Page 72 for

Optional Terminals

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Factory

Assembled

Circuit

Consisting

of Frame,

Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Frame

Only

Catalog Number

2-Pole

300

350

400

450

500

600

700

800

MDL2300

MDL2350

MDL2400

MDL2450

MDL2500

MDL2600

MDL2700

MDL2800

MDL2800F HMDL2300

HMDL2350

HMDL2400

HMDL2450

HMDL2500

HMDL2600

HMDL2700

HMDL2800

HMDL2800F MT2300T

MT2350T

MT2400T

MT2450T

MT2500T

MT2600T

MT2700T

MT2800T

TA700MA1

TA800MA2

3-Pole

300

350

400

450

500

600

700

800

MDL3300

MDL3350

MDL3400

MDL3450

MDL3500

MDL3600

MDL3700

MDL3800

MDL3800F HMDL3300

HMDL3350

HMDL3400

HMDL3450

HMDL3500

HMDL3600

HMDL3700

HMDL3800

HMDL3800F MT3300T

MT3350T

MT3400T

MT3450T

MT3500T

MT3600T

MT3700T

MT3800T

TA700MA1

TA800MA2

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C111 for Breaker

Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

Standard Interrupting Capacity

600 Vac Rated

50 kAIC @ 480 Vac

High Interrupting Capacity

600 Vac Rated

50 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Standard Terminals Only ➀

See Page 72 for

Optional Terminals

Factory Assembled Circuit

Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Factory Assembled Circuit

Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit,

and Terminals

Catalog Number

2-Pole

300

350

400

450

500

600

700

800

MDLB2300

MDLB2350

MDLB2400

MDLB2450

MDLB2500

MDLB2600

MDLB2700

MDLB2800

HMDLB2300

HMDLB2350

HMDLB2400

HMDLB2450

HMDLB2500

HMDLB2600

HMDLB2700

HMDLB2800

TA700MA1

TA800MA2

3-Pole

300

350

400

450

500

600

700

800

MDLB3300

MDLB3350

MDLB3400

MDLB3450

MDLB3500

MDLB3600

MDLB3700

MDLB3800

HMDLB3300

HMDLB3350

HMDLB3400

HMDLB3450

HMDLB3500

HMDLB3600

HMDLB3700

HMDLB3800

TA700MA1

TA800MA2

➀Two terminals are required per pole.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C111 for Breaker

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

70 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

300-800 Amperes

Series C M-Frame

Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units

Order as Individual Components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C➀

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only➁ Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only Terminals

Standard

Interrupting

Capacity

600 Vac

Rated

35 kAIC @

480 Vac

High

Interrupting

Capacity

600 Vac

Rated

65 kAIC @

480 Vac

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t

Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to

Instantaneous

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault

Delay (Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

Adjustable

Rating Plugs

Ampere

Rating

Catalog

Number

Catalog Number

3-Pole

800 MDL3800F HMDL3800F MES3800LS

MES3800LSI

MES3800LSG

MES3800LSIG

400

500

600

700

800

8MES400T

8MES500T

8MES600T

8MES700T

8MES800T

400/500/600/800

A8MES800T

See Page 72

for Standard

and Optional

Terminals

➀Ampere rating is established by rating plug.

➁For Ac use only.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C111 for Breaker; 29C615 for MES Trip Unit

Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Maximum

Continuous Ampere

Rating @ 40°C➀

Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit

LS LSI LSG LSIG

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kAIC @ 480 Vac

800 MDLB3800T33W MDLB3800T32W MDLB3800T35W MDLB3800T36W

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

800 HMDLB3800T33W HMDLB3800T32W HMDLB3800T35W HMDLB3800T36W

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C111 for Breaker; 29C615 for MES Trip Unit

100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

the 75°C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker

frame, trip unit, rating plug and terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C➀

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only➁ Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only Terminals

Standard

Interrupting

Capacity

50 kAIC @

480 Vac

High

Interrupting

Capacity

50 kAIC @

480 Vac

Standard Options Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

Adjustable

Rating Plug

Adjustable

Short Time

Delay with

I2t Short

Delay Ramp

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay

Ground Fault

Protection

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup with

I2t Short

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Ground Fault

Protection

Ampere

Rating

Catalog

Number

Catalog Number

3-Pole

800 CMDL3800F CHMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG 400

500

600

700

800

8MES400T

8MES500T

8MES600T

8MES700T

8MES800T

400/500/600/800

A8MES800T

See Page 72

for Standard

and Optional

Terminals

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C111 for Breaker; 29C615 for MES Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 71

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

300-800 Amperes

Series C M-Frame

Note: Molded case switch may trip above

6000 amperes.

Molded Case Switches

Molded case switches are used as compact switches in

applications requiring high current switching capabilities.

Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker

components and are of the high instantaneous automatic

type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL 1087.

Maximum Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

600 Vac Maximum,

250 Vdc

Circuit Breaker Only without Line and

Load Terminals

Catalog Number

2-Pole

800 MDL2800WK

3-Pole

800 MDL3800WK

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C111

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

72 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

300-800 Amperes

Series C M-Frame

Line and Load Terminals

M-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI

terminals as standard. When optional

copper or Cu/AI terminals are required,

order by catalog number. Specify if

factory installation is required.

Line and Load Terminals

Maximum Breaker

Amperes

Terminal Body

Material

Wire Type AWG Wire Range/

No. Conductors

Terminal

Catalog Number

Terminals with Control Wire

Termination Catalog Number

Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals

600

800

Aluminum

Cu/AI

(2) #1-500 kcmil

(3) 3/0-400 kcmil

(2) 500-750 kcmil

TA700MA1

TA800MA2

TA801MA

TA700MA1CWT

TA800MA2CWT

TA801MACWT

Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals

600

800

Copper

(2) 2/0-500 kcmil

(3) 3/0-300 kcmil

T600MA1

T800MA1

–

TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA801MA1

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 73

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

300-800 Amperes

Series C M-Frame

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker

Type

Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit➀

Number of Poles

232323

MDL, HMDL

(T/M T.U.)

26.5 29 24.5 26 2.5 3

MDL, HMDL

(Elec. T.U.)

–30–26– 4

Dimensions/Weights

Dimensions, Inches (mm)

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2, 3 8.250

(210)

16.000

(406)

4.062

(103)

Catalog Numbering System

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog

numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Catalog NumberCircuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Number

MDL 3 800 F

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Type

MDL

HMDL

Number

of Poles

2: 2 Poles

3: 3 Poles

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame

Ampere

Rating

300➀

350➀

400

450

500

600

700

800

Suffix

F: Frame Only

K: High Magnetic Molded

Case Switch

V: 50°C (Thermal-Mag-

netic Trip Units Only)

W: Without Terminals

X: Load Side

Terminals Only

Y: Line Side

Terminals Only

MT 3 800 T

Trip Unit

Type

MT:

MES:

Number

of Poles

2: 2 Poles

3: 3 Poles

Trip Unit/

Rating

Plug

Ampere

Rating

300➀

350➀

400

450

500

600

700

800

Suffix

T: Thermal-Magnetic

V: 50°C (Thermal-Mag-

netic Trip Units Only)

LS: Digitrip RMS 310

LSI: Digitrip RMS 310

LSG: Digitrip RMS 310

LSIG: Digitrip RMS 310

➀Thermal-Magnetic only.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

74 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

300-800 Amperes

Series C M-Frame

Allowable Accessory Combinations

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles

in the circuit breaker.

Reference

Page

2-Pole➀ 3-Pole

Left Right Left Center Right

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)

Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) 140 ■■■

Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) 140 ■■■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) 143 ■■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) 143 ■■■

Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) 143 ■■■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination 146 ■■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) and Alarm Switch Combination 146 ■■■

Shunt Trip – Standard➂ 149 ■■■

Shunt Trip – Low Energy➂ 152 ■■■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism➂ 157 ■■■

External Accessories

Base Mounting Hardware 163 ●

Terminal Shields 165 ●

Interphase Barriers 166 ●

Non-Padlockable Handle Block 168 ■

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 169 ❏❏❏

Key Interlock Kit 170 ❏❏❏

Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●●

Walking Beam Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●●

Electrical (Motor) Operator 173 ●●

Plug-in Adapters 174 ●●

Rear Connecting Studs 176 ●●

Panelboard Connecting Straps 177 ●●

Handle Mechanisms 178 ●●

Door Hardware/Accessories 182 ●●

Handle Extension 182 ●

Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit 184 ●●

Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer)

Special Calibration 186 ●●

Moisture Fungus Treatment 186 ●●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 186 ●●

Marine Application 186 ●●

➀2-pole breaker supplied in 3-pole frame. Cur-

rent carrying parts omitted from center pole.

➁Refer to Cutler-Hammer for appropriate

neutral pole accessory combinations.

➂Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in

right poles on LES trip units.

■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –

not both

●Accessory available/Modification available

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 75

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

Typical Series C N-Frame Circuit Breaker

➀Utilization Category A circuit breakers.

➁100% rated breakers.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings➀

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number

of Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)

240 277 480 600 125

CND➁

2, 3, 4

–

77, 83

80, 84

HND

CHND➁

2, 3, 4

100

–

78, 83

81, 84

NDC

CNDC➁

2, 3, 4

200

–

100

–

79, 83

82, 84

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings➀

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Page

Number

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)

240 415 690

Icu

Ics

2, 3, 4

77, 83

CND➁

Icu

Ics

2, 3, 4

80, 84

HND

Icu

Ics

2, 3, 4

100

78, 83

CHND➁

Icu

Ics

2, 3, 4

100

81, 84

NDC

Icu

Ics

2, 3, 4

200

100

79, 83

CNDC➁

Icu

Ics

2, 3, 4

200

100

82, 84

■All N-frame circuit breakers are

suitable for reverse feed use.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

76 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

➀Adjust by rating plug.

➁By OPTIMizer/BIM.

➂Cutler-Hammer PowerNet kit for field upgrade.

BIM = Breaker Interface Module

(A) = GF Alarm

Is = Sensor Rating

In = Rating Plug

Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting

N-Frame Digitrip Selection Guide

Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 750 Digitrip OPTIM 1050

RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes

Breaker Type

Frame N N N N

Ampere Range 400A-1200A 400A-1200A 400A-1200A 400A-1200A

Interrupting Rating @ 480V 50, 65, 100 (kA) 50, 65, 100 (kA) 50, 65, 100 (kA) 50, 65, 100 (kA)

Protection

Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LISG

Fixed Rated Plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Long Delay Protection (L)

Adjustable Rating Plug (In) Yes Yes No No No

Long Delay Pickup 0.5-1.0 (In)➀0.5-1.0 (In)➀0.4-1.0 x (In) 0.4-1.0 x (In) 0.4-1.0 x (In)

Long Delay Time I2T 12 Seconds 12 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds

Long Delay Time I4T No No 1-5 Seconds 1-5 Seconds 1-5 Seconds

Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

High Load Alarm No No No 0.5-1.0 x Ir0.5-1.0 x Ir

Short Delay Protection (S)

Short Delay Pickup 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In) 150-800% x (Ir) 150-800% x (Ir) 150-800% x (Ir)

Short Delay Time I2T 100 ms No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Short Delay Time Flat No Inst-300 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes Yes Yes

Instantaneous Protection (I)

Instantaneous Pickup No 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In) 200-800% x (In)

Discriminator No No Yes Yes Yes

Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground Fault Alarm No No 20-100% x (Is) 20-100% x (Is) 20-100% x (Is)

Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame➁Varies by Frame➁20-100% x (Is) 20-100% x (Is) 20-100% x (Is)

Ground Fault Delay I2T No No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst-500 ms Inst-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No No Yes Yes

Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

System Diagnostics

Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Yes

Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes Yes

Remote Signal Contact – Ground Alarm Yes Yes No Yes Yes

Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included Included

System Monitoring

Digital Display No No Yes➁Yes➁Yes➁

Current No No Yes Yes Yes

Power and Energy No No No No Yes

Power Quality-Harmonics No No No No Yes

Power Factor No No No No Yes

Communications

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No No➂Yes Yes

Testing

Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-

Hammer PowerNet

OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-

Hammer PowerNet

OPTIMizer, BIM, Cutler-

Hammer PowerNet

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 77

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

Type ND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only Standard Terminals Only➀

See Page 85 for

Optional Terminals

Standard Interrupting Capacity

600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plugs

Adjustable Rating Plug

Standard Options Adjustable Ampere Ratings

Catalog Number

Adjustable

Short Time

Delay with I2t

Short Delay

Ramp

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup with I2t

Short Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Catalog Number

2-Pole

800 ND2800T33W ND2800T32W ND2800T35W ND2800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

3-Pole

800 ND3800T33W ND3800T32W ND3800T35W ND3800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

4-Pole➁

800 ND4800T33W ND4800T32W – – 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

2-Pole

1200 ND212T33W ND212T32W ND212T35W ND212T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

3-Pole

1200 ND312T33W ND312T32W ND312T35W ND312T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

4-Pole➁

1200 ND412T33W ND412T32W – – 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C106

➀Two terminals are required per pole.

➁Neutral is in right pole.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

78 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

Type HND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only Standard Terminals Only➀

See Page 85 for

Optional Terminals

High Interrupting Capacity

600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plugs

Adjustable Rating Plug

Standard Options Adjustable Ampere Ratings

Catalog Number

Adjustable

Short Time

Delay with I2t

Short Delay

Ramp

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup with I2t

Short Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Catalog Number

2-Pole

800 HND2800T33W HND2800T32W HND2800T35W HND2800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

3-Pole

800 HND3800T33W HND3800T32W HND3800T35W HND3800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

4-Pole➁

800 HND4800T33W HND4800T32W – – 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

2-Pole

1200 HND212T33W HND212T32W HND212T35W HND212T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

3-Pole

1200 HND312T33W HND312T32W HND312T35W HND312T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

4-Pole➁

1200 HND412T33W HND412T32W – – 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C106

➀Two terminals are required per pole.

➁Neutral is in right pole.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 79

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

Type NDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only Standard Terminals Only➀

See Page 85 for

Optional Terminals

Ultra High Interrupting Capacity

600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plugs

Adjustable Rating Plug

Standard Options Adjustable Ampere Ratings

Catalog Number

Adjustable

Short Time

Delay with I2t

Short Delay

Ramp

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup with I2t

Short Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Catalog Number

2-Pole

800 NDC2800T33W NDC2800T32W NDC2800T35W NDC2800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

3-Pole

800 NDC3800T33W NDC3800T32W NDC3800T35W NDC3800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

4-Pole➁

800 NDC4800T33W NDC4800T32W – – 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

2-Pole

1200 NDC212T33W NDC212T32W NDC212T35W NDC212T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

3-Pole

1200 NDC312T33W NDC312T32W NDC312T35W NDC312T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

4-Pole➁

1200 NDC412T33W NDC412T32W – – 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

➀Two terminals are required per pole.

➁Neutral is in right pole.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C106

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

80 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

100% Rated Type CND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

the 75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only Standard Terminals Only➀

See Page 85 for

Optional Terminals

Standard Interrupting Capacity

600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plugs

Adjustable Rating Plug

Standard Options Adjustable Ampere Ratings

Catalog Number

Adjustable

Short Time

Delay with I2t

Short Delay

Ramp

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup with I2t

Short Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Independently

Adjustable

Short Time

Pickup and

Delay and

Ground Fault

Protection

Catalog Number

2-Pole

800 CND2800T33W CND2800T32W CND2800T35W CND2800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

3-Pole

800 CND3800T33W CND3800T32W CND3800T35W CND3800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

4-Pole➁

800 CND4800T33W CND4800T32W – – 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

2-Pole

1200 CND212T33W CND212T32W CND212T35W CND212T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

3-Pole

1200 CND312T33W CND312T32W CND312T35W CND312T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

4-Pole➁

1200 CND412T33W CND412T32W – – 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C106

➀Two terminals are required per pole.

➁Neutral is in right pole.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 81

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

100% Rated Type CHND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

the 75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only Standard Terminals Only➀

See Page 85 for

Optional Terminals

High Interrupting Capacity

600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plugs

Adjustable Rating Plug

Standard Options Adjustable Ampere Ratings

Catalog Number

Adjustable Short

Time Delay with

I2t Short Delay

Ramp

Independently

Adjustable Short

Time Pickup and

Delay

Adjustable Short

Time Pickup with

I2t Short Delay

and Ground Fault

Protection

Independently

Adjustable Short

Time Pickup and

Delay and Ground

Fault Protection

Catalog Number

2-Pole

800 CHND2800T33W CHND2800T32W CHND2800T35W CHND2800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

3-Pole

800 CHND3800T33W CHND3800T32W CHND3800T35W CHND3800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

4-Pole➁

800 CHND4800T33W CHND4800T32W – – 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

2-Pole

1200 CHND212T33W CHND212T32W CHND212T35W CHND212T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

3-Pole

1200 CHND312T33W CHND312T32W CHND312T35W CHND312T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

4-Pole➁

1200 CHND412T33W CHND412T32W – – 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C106

➀Two terminals are required per pole.

➁Neutral is in right pole.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

82 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

100% Rated Type CNDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

the 75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only Standard Terminals Only➀

See Page 85 for

Optional Terminals

Ultra High Interrupting Capacity

600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plugs

Adjustable Rating Plug

Standard Options Adjustable Ampere Ratings

Catalog Number

Adjustable Short

Time Delay with

I2t Short Delay

Ramp

Independently

Adjustable Short

Time Pickup and

Delay

Adjustable Short

Time Pickup with

I2t Short Delay

and Ground Fault

Protection

Independently

Adjustable Short

Time Pickup and

Delay and Ground

Fault Protection

Catalog Number

2-Pole

800 CNDC2800T33W CNDC2800T32W CNDC2800T35W CNDC2800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

3-Pole

800 CNDC3800T33W CNDC3800T32W CNDC3800T35W CNDC3800T36W 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

4-Pole➁

800 CNDC4800T33W CNDC4800T32W – – 400

450

500

600

700

800

8NES400T

8NES450T

8NES500T

8NES600T

8NES700T

8NES800T

Adjustable Settings are:

400, 500, 600, 800

A8NES800T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

2-Pole

1200 CNDC212T33W CNDC212T32W CNDC212T35W CNDC212T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

3-Pole

1200 CNDC312T33W CNDC312T32W CNDC312T35W CNDC312T36W 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

4-Pole➁

1200 CNDC412T33W CNDC412T32W – – 600

700

800

900

1000

1200

12NES600T

12NES700T

12NES800T

12NES900T

12NES1000T

12NES1200T

Adjustable Settings are:

600, 800, 1000, 1200

A12NES1200T1

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C106

➀Two terminals are required per pole.

➁Neutral is in right pole.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 83

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

Digitrip OPTIM➀ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating

Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response)➁

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

OPTIM 550 OPTIM 550 OPTIM 550 OPTIM 750 OPTIM 750 OPTIM 1050 OPTIM 1050

LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 480 Vac

800 ND3800T52W ND3800T56W ND3800T57W ND3800T76W ND3800T77W ND3800T106W ND3800T107W 400

450

500

550

600

700

800

ORPN80A400

ORPN80A450

ORPN80A500

ORPN80A550

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

1200 ND312T52W ND312T56W ND312T57W ND312T76W ND312T77W ND312T106W ND312T107W 600

700

800

1000

1200

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

ORPN80A100

ORPN80A120

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

800 HND3800T52W HND3800T56W HND3800T57W HND3800T76W HND3800T77W HND3800T106W HND3800T107W 400

450

500

550

600

700

800

ORPN80A400

ORPN80A450

ORPN80A500

ORPN80A550

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

1200 HND312T52W HND312T56W HND312T57W HND312T76W HND312T77W HND312T106W HND312T107W 600

700

800

1000

1200

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

ORPN80A100

ORPN80A120

3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

800 NDC3800T52W NDC3800T56W NDC3800T57W NDC3800T76W NDC3800T77W NDC3800T106W NDC3800T107W 400

450

500

550

600

700

800

ORPN80A400

ORPN80A450

ORPN80A500

ORPN80A550

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

1200 NDC312T52W NDC312T56W NDC312T57W NDC312T76W NDC312T77W NDC312T106W NDC312T107W 600

700

800

1000

1200

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

ORPN80A100

ORPN80A120

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C106 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip

➀1 Form C auxiliary switch and 1 Form C bell

(trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as

standard on models 750 and 1050.

➁Long delay I4t response selection limits short

delay time to flat response.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

84 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM➀ Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating

Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response)➁

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

OPTIM 550 OPTIM 550 OPTIM 550 OPTIM 750 OPTIM 750 OPTIM 1050 OPTIM 1050

LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 480 Vac

800

CND3800T52W CND3800T56W CND3800T57W CND3800T76W CND3800T77W CND3800T106W CND3800T107W

400

450

500

550

600

700

800

ORPN80A400

ORPN80A450

ORPN80A500

ORPN80A550

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

1200

CND312T52W CND312T56W CND312T57W CND312T76W CND312T77W CND312T106W CND312T107W

600

700

800

1000

1200

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

ORPN80A100

ORPN80A120

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

800

CHND3800T52W CHND3800T56W CHND3800T57W CHND3800T76W CHND3800T77W CHND3800T106W CHND3800T107W

400

450

500

550

600

700

800

ORPN80A400

ORPN80A450

ORPN80A500

ORPN80A550

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

1200

CHND312T52W CHND312T56W CHND312T57W CHND312T76W CHND312T77W CHND312T106W CNHD312T107W

600

700

800

1000

1200

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

ORPN80A100

ORPN80A120

3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

800

CNDC3800T52W CNDC3800T56W CNDC3800T57W CNDC3800T76W CNDC3800T77W CNDC3800T106W CNDC3800T107W

400

450

500

550

600

700

800

ORPN80A400

ORPN80A450

ORPN80A500

ORPN80A550

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

1200

CNDC312T52W CNDC312T56W CNDC312T57W CNDC312T76W CNDC312T77W CNDC312T106W CNDC312T107W

600

700

800

1000

1200

ORPN80A600

ORPN80A700

ORPN80A800

ORPN80A100

ORPN80A120

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C106 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip

➀1 Form C auxiliary switch and 1 Form C bell

(trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as

standard on models 750 and 1050.

➁Long delay I4t response selection limits short

delay time to flat response.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 85

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

T1000NB1

Note: Molded case switch may trip above 14,000 amperes.

For UL listed, series tested molded case switch applica-

tion data, refer to Cutler-Hammer.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C106

Type ND Molded Case Switches

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Catalog Number

2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole➀

Complete with Standard Line and Load Terminals (shipped separately)

Type ND – HIgh Instantaneous (K)

800 – ND3800WK ND4800WK

Type ND – HIgh Instantaneous (K)

1200 – ND312WK ND412WK

➀Neutral is in right pole.

➁Terminal rating is A19 Cu.

➂Terminal rating is A17 Cu.

Line and Load Terminals

Ordering Information

N-frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order

by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required.

Line and Load Terminals

Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm2Catalog Number

Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals

700

1000

1200

Aluminum

Cu/AI

(2) 1-500 kcmil

(3) 3/0-400 kcmil

(4) 4/0-500 kcmil

(3) 500-750 kcmil

50-300

95-185

120-300

300-400

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1➁

TA1200NB1➁

TA1201NB1➂

Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals

700

1000

1200

Copper

(2) 2/0-500 kcmil

(3) 3/0-500 kcmil

(4) 3/0-400 kcmil

70-300

95-300

95-185

T700NB1

T1000NB1

T1200NB3

TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA1200NB1

TA1201NB1 T700NB1

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

86 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

Dimensions/Weights

Dimensions, Inches (mm)

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2, 3 8.25

(210)

(407)

5.5

(140)

4 11.125

(283)

(407)

5.5

(140)

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker Type Complete Breaker

Number of Poles

234

ND, HND, NDC 37

(16.783)

(20.412)

(26.308)

Catalog Numbering System

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog

numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Number

ND 3 12 T3 2 W

Circuit Breaker/

Frame Type

HND

NDC

CND

CHND

CNDC

Number

of Poles

2: 2 Poles

3: 3 Poles

4: 4 Poles

Circuit Breaker/

Frame Ampere

Rating

8: 800 Amperes

12: 1200 Amperes

Suffix

E: 100% R.P. protected (4-Pole)

EH: 50% R.P. protected (4-Pole)

K: High Magnetic Molded

Case Switch

W: Without Terminals

X: Load Only Terminals

Y: Line Only Terminals

Trip Model

T3 – Model 310

T5 – Model 550

T7 – Model 750

T10 – Model 1050

Trip Type

2 – LSI

3 – LS

5 – LSG

6 – LSIG

7 – LSIA

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 87

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

400-1200 Amperes

Series C N-Frame

Allowable Accessory Combinations

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles

in the circuit breaker.

Reference

Page

3-Pole 4-Pole

Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)➀

Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) 141 ■■■■

Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) 141 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) 144 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) 144 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) 144 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (1A 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination 146 ■■■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A 2B) and Alarm Switch Combination 146 ■■■■

Shunt Trip – Standard 150 ■■

Shunt Trip – Low Energy 152 ■■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism 158 ■■

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit (OPTIM 550) 160 ■

External Accessories

Base Mounting Hardware 163 ●●

Interphase Barriers 166 ●●

Non-Padlockable Handle Block 168 ■■

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 169 ❏❏❏❏

Key Interlock Kit 170 ❏❏❏❏

Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●

Walking Beam Interlock – Requires Two Breakers 171 ●●

Electrical (Motor) Operator 173 ●●

Plug-in Adapters 174 ●●

Rear Connecting Studs 176 ●●

Panelboard Connecting Straps 177 ●●

Handle Mechanisms 178 ●●

Handle Extension 182 ●●

Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit 184 ●●

OPTIM System Components 3-Poles

Ground Fault Alarm Unit 184

Potential Transformer Module 184

Breaker Interface Module (BIM) 185

Digitrip OPTIMizer 185

Auxiliary Power Module 185

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Software 185

Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer)

Special Calibration 186 ●●

Moisture Fungus Treatment 186 ●●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 186 ●●

Marine Application 186 ●●

➀OPTIM 750 and 1050 are factory sealed

and do not have the right pole available for

accessories.

■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –

not both

●Accessory available/Modification available

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

88 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 89

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

Typical Series C R-Frame Circuit Breaker

➀Utilization Category A circuit breakers.

➁See page 90 for Trip Unit Selection Guide

➂100% Rated breakers.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

UL489/CSA Interrupting Capacity Ratings ➀

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Circuit

Breaker

Type

Page Numbers

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Trip Unit Types➁

240 277 480 600 310 510 610 810 910 OPTIM

RD 3, 4 125 – 65 50 RD 91 94 96 98 100 102

CRD ➂ 3, 4 125 – 65 50 CRD 93 95 97 99 101 103

RDC 3, 4 200 – 100 65 RDC 92 94 96 98 100 102

CRDC ➂ 3, 4 200 – 100 65 CRDC 93 95 97 99 101 103

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings ➀

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Number of

Poles

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA) Circuit

Breaker

Type

Page Numbers

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Trip Unit Types➁

240 415 690 310 510 610 810 910 OPTIM

ICU

ICS

3, 4

135

100

RD 91 94 96 98 100 102

RDC

ICU

ICS

3, 4

200

100

RDC 92 94 96 98 100 102

■R-frame circuit breakers are avail-

able as frame (which includes trip

unit), rating plug and terminals.

■All R-frame circuit breakers are

suitable for reverse feed use.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

90 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

125-600 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

➀Adjust by rating plug.

➁Except 2500 ampere frame is 200-600%.

➂Varies by frame.

➃LS/LSG only.

➄Not to exceed 1200 amperes.

➅By OPTIMizer/BIM.

BIM = Breaker Interface Module

(A) = GF Alarm

Is = Sensor Rating

In = Rating Plug

Ir = Long Delay Pickup Setting x In

R-Frame Digitrip Selection Guide

Trip Unit Type Digitrip

RMS 310

Digitrip

RMS 510

Digitrip

RMS 610

Digitrip

OPTIM 750

Digitrip

RMS 810

Digitrip

RMS 910

Digitrip

OPTIM 1050

RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Breaker Type

Frame R R R R R R R

Ampere Range 800A-2500A 800A-2500A 800A-2500A 800A-2500A 800A-2500A 800A-2500A 800A-2500A

Interrupting Rating @ 480V 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA) 65, 100 (kA)

Protection

Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LI, LS, LSI,

LIG, LSG,

LSIG

LI, LS, LSI, LIG

LSG, LSIG

LSI(A), LSIG LI, LS, LSI,

LIG, LSG,

LSIG

LI, LS, LSI,

LIG, LSG,

LSIG

LSI(A), LISG

Fixed Rated Plug (In) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Long Delay Protection (L)

Adjustable Rating Plug (In) Yes Yes No No No No No No

Long Delay Pickup 0.5-1.0 (In)➀0.5-1.0 (In)➀0.5-1.0 x (In) 0.5-1.0 x (In) 0.4-1.0 x (In) 0.5-1.0 x (In) 0.5-1.0 x (In) 0.4-1.0 x (In)

Long Delay Time I2T 12 Seconds 12 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds

Long Delay Time I4T No No No No 1-5 Seconds No No 1-5 Seconds

Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

High Load Alarm No No No 0.85 x Ir0.5-1.0 x Ir0.85 x Ir0.85 x Ir0.5-1.0 x Ir

Short Delay Protection (S)

Short Delay Pickup 200-800% x (In)➁200-800% x (In)➁200-600%

S1&S2 x (Ir)

200-600%

S1&S2 x (Ir)

150-800% x (Ir)➁➂ 200-600%

S1&S2 x (Ir)

200-600%

S1&S2 x (Ir)

150-800% x (Ir)➁➂

Short Delay Time I2T 100 ms No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Short Delay Time Flat No Inst-300 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Short Delay Time Zone

Selective Interlocking

No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Instantaneous Protection (I)

Instantaneous Pick Up No 200-800% x (In) 200-600%

M1&M2 x (In)

200-600%

M1&M2 x (In)

200-800% x (In)➂200-600%

M1&M2 x (In)

200-600%

M1&M2 x (In)

200-800% x (In)➂

Discriminator No No Yes➃Yes➃Yes Yes➃Yes➃Yes

Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ground Fault Protection (G)

Ground Fault Alarm➄No No No No 25-100% x (In) No No 25-100% x (In)

Ground Fault Pick Up➄Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 25-100% x (Is) 25-100% x (Is) 25-100% x (In) 25-100% x (Is) 25-100% x (Is) 25-100% x (In)

Ground Fault Delay I2T No No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst-500 ms Inst-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms

Ground Fault Zone

Selective Interlocking

No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

System Diagnostics

Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Magnitude of Trip Information No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Remote Signal Contacts Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

System Monitoring

Digital Display No No No Yes Yes➅Yes Yes Yes➅

Current No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Voltage No No No No No No Yes No

Power and Energy No No No No No Yes Yes Yes

Power Quality-Harmonics No No No No No No Yes Yes

Power Factor No No No No No Yes (Over

Cutler-Ham-

mer Power-

Net Only)

Yes Yes

Communications

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Testing

Testing Method Test Set Integral Integral OPTIMizer,

BIM, Cutler-Ham-

mer PowerNet

Integral Integral OPTIMizer,

BIM, Cutler-Ham-

mer PowerNet

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 91

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug)

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time

(I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

Adjustable Rating Plug

Adjustable Ampere Ratings

Catalog Number

LS LSI LSG➂LSIG➂

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600➀RD316T33W RD316T32W RD316T35W RD316T36W 800

1000

1200

1250

1400

1500

1600

16RES08T

16RES10T

16RES12T

16RES125T

16RES14T

16RES15T

16RES16T

Adjustable Settings are:

800, 1000, 1200, 1600

A16RES16T1

2000 RD320T33W RD320T32W RD320T35W RD320T36W 1000

1200

1250

1400

1600

2000

20RES10T

20RES12T

20RES125T

20RES14T

20RES16T

20RES20T

Adjustable Settings are:

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000

A20RES20T1

2500 RD325T33W RD325T32W RD325T35W RD325T36W 1200

1250

1600

2000

2500

25RES12T

25RES125T

25RES16T

25RES20T

25RES25T

Adjustable Settings are:

1200, 1600, 2000, 2500

A25RES25T1

4-Pole➁ Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600➀RD416T33W RD416T32W – – 800

1000

1200

1250

1400

1500

1600

16RES08T

16RES10T

16RES12T

16RES125T

16RES14T

16RES15T

16RES16T

Adjustable Settings are:

800, 1000, 1200, 1600

A16RES16T1

2000 RD420T33W RD420T32W – – 1000

1200

1250

1400

1600

2000

20RES10T

20RES12T

20RES125T

20RES14T

20RES16T

20RES20T

Adjustable Settings are:

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000

A20RES20T1

2500 RD425T33W RD425T32W – – 1200

1250

1600

2000

2500

25RES12T

25RES125T

25RES16T

25RES20T

25RES25T

Adjustable Settings are:

1200, 1600, 2000, 2500

A25RES25T1

➀For SCR application use 2000 ampere frame.

➁Unprotected right pole neutral. Add “P” to

catalog number for 100% protected right

pole neutral, i.e., “RD416T33PW”.

➂Add suffix “R” to breaker catalog number for

ground fault remote indication

compatibility.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29C883 for Digitrip 310 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

92 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C L-Frame

Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug)

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time

(I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

Adjustable Rating Plug

Adjustable Ampere Ratings

Catalog Number

LS LSI LSG➂LSIG➂

Catalog Number

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600➀RDC316T33W RDC316T32W RDC316T35W RDC316T36W 800

1000

1200

1250

1400

1500

1600

16RES08T

16RES10T

16RES12T

16RES125T

16RES14T

16RES15T

16RES16T

Adjustable Settings are:

800, 1000, 1200, 1600

A16RES16T1

2000 RDC320T33W RDC320T32W RDC320T35W RDC320T36W 1000

1200

1250

1400

1600

2000

20RES10T

20RES12T

20RES125T

20RES14T

20RES16T

20RES20T

Adjustable Settings are:

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000

A20RES20T1

2500 RDC325T33W RDC325T32W RDC325T35W RDC325T36W 1200

1250

1600

2000

2500

25RES12T

25RES125T

25RES16T

25RES20T

25RES25T

Adjustable Settings are:

1200, 1600, 2000, 2500

A25RES25T1

4-Pole➁ High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600➀RDC416T33W RDC416T32W – – 800

1000

1200

1250

1400

1500

1600

16RES08T

16RES10T

16RES12T

16RES125T

16RES14T

16RES15T

16RES16T

Adjustable Settings are:

800, 1000, 1200, 1600

A16RES16T1

2000 RDC420T33W RDC420T32W – – 1000

1200

1250

1400

1600

2000

20RES10T

20RES12T

20RES125T

20RES14T

20RES16T

20RES20T

Adjustable Settings are:

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000

A20RES20T1

2500 RDC425T33W RDC425T32W – – 1200

1250

1600

2000

2500

25RES12T

25RES125T

25RES16T

25RES20T

25RES25T

Adjustable Settings are:

1200, 1600, 2000, 2500

A25RES25T1

➀For SCR application use 2000 ampere frame.

➁Unprotected right pole neutral. Add “P” to

catalog number for 100% protected right

pole neutral, i.e., “RDC416T33PW”.

➂Add suffix “R” to breaker catalog number for

ground fault remote indication

compatibility.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29C883 for Digitrip 310 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 93

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers➀

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug)

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time

(I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response)

Ampere

Rating

Fixed

Rating

Plug

Adjustable Rating Plug

Adjustable Ampere Ratings

Catalog Number

LS LSI LSG➂LSIG➂

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600➁CRD316T33W CRD316T32W CRD316T35W CRD316T36W 800

1000

1200

1250

1400

1500

1600

16RES08T

16RES10T

16RES12T

16RES125T

16RES14T

16RES15T

16RES16T

Adjustable Settings are:

800, 1000, 1200, 1600

A16RES16T1

2000 CRD320T33W CRD320T32W CRD320T35W CRD320T36W 1000

1200

1250

1400

1600

2000

20RES10T

20RES12T

20RES125T

20RES14T

20RES16T

20RES20T

Adjustable Settings are:

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000

A20RES20T1

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600➀➁ CRDC316T33W CRDC316T32W CRDC316T35W CRDC316T36W 800

1000

1200

1250

1400

1500

1600

16RES08T

16RES10T

16RES12T

16RES125T

16RES14T

16RES15T

16RES16T

Adjustable Settings are:

800, 1000, 1200, 1600

A16RES16T1

2000 CRDC320T33W CRDC320T32W CRDC320T35W CRDC320T36W 1000

1200

1250

1400

1600

2000

20RES10T

20RES12T

20RES125T

20RES14T

20RES16T

20RES20T

Adjustable Settings are:

1000, 1200, 1600, 2000

A20RES20T1

➀Includes B2016RDL rear connections.

Refer to TD.29.02.T.E for dimensions.

➁For SCR application use 2000 ampere frame.

➂Add suffix “R” to breaker catalog number for

ground fault remote indication

compatibility.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29C883 for Digitrip 310 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

94 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Fixed Rating Plug

Rated

Current (In)

Catalog

Number

LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 RD316T51W RD316T53W RD316T52W RD316T54W RD316T55W RD316T56W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 RD320T51W RD320T53W RD320T52W RD320T54W RD320T55W RD320T56W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

2500 RD325T51W RD325T53W RD325T52W RD325T54W RD325T55W RD325T56W 1600

2000

2500

RP6R25A160

RP6R25A200

RP6R25A250

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 RDC316T51W RDC316T53W RDC316T52W RDC316T54W RDC316T55W RDC316T56W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 RDC320T51W RDC320T53W RDC320T52W RDC320T54W RDC320T55W RDC320T56W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

2500 RDC325T51W RDC325T53W RDC325T52W RDC325T54W RDC325T55W RDC325T56W 1600

2000

2500

RP6R25A160

RP6R25A200

RP6R25A250

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29C885 for Digitrip 510 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 95

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Fixed Rating Plug

Rated

Current (In)

Catalog

Number

LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 CRD316T51W CRD316T53W CRD316T52W CRD316T54W CRD316T55W CRD316T56W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 CRD320T51W CRD320T53W CRD320T52W CRD320T54W CRD320T55W CRD320T56W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 CRDC316T51W CRDC316T53W CRDC316T52W CRDC316T54W CRDC316T55W CRDC316T56W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 CRDC320T51W CRDC320T53W CRDC320T52W CRDC320T54W CRDC320T55W CRDC320T56W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29885 for Digitrip 510 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

96 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Fixed Rating Plug

Rated

Current (In)

Catalog

Number

LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 RD316T61W RD316T63W RD316T62W RD316T64W RD316T65W RD316T66W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 RD320T61W RD320T63W RD320T62W RD320T64W RD320T65W RD320T66W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

2500 RD325T61W RD325T63W RD325T62W RD325T64W RD325T65W RD325T66W 1600

2000

2500

RP6R25A160

RP6R25A200

RP6R25A250

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 RDC316T61W RDC316T63W RDC316T62W RDC316T64W RDC316T65W RDC316T66W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 RDC320T61W RDC320T63W RDC320T62W RDC320T64W RDC320T65W RDC320T66W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

2500 RDC325T61W RDC325T63W RDC325T62W RDC325T64W RDC325T65W RDC325T66W 1600

2000

2500

RP6R25A160

RP6R25A200

RP6R25A250

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29886 for Digitrip 610 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 97

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Fixed Rating Plug

Rated

Current (In)

Catalog

Number

LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 CRD316T61W CRD316T63W CRD316T62W CRD316T64W CRD316T65W CRD316T66W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 CRD320T61W CRD320T63W CRD320T62W CRD320T64W CRD320T65W CRD320T66W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 CRDC316T61W CRDC316T63W CRDC316T62W CRDC316T64W CRDC316T65W CRDC316T66W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 CRDC320T61W CRDC320T63W CRDC320T62W CRDC320T64W CRDC320T65W CRDC320T66W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29886 for Digitrip 610 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

98 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Fixed Rating Plug

Rated

Current (In)

Catalog

Number

LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 RD316T81W RD316T83W RD316T82W RD316T84W RD316T85W RD316T86W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 RD320T81W RD320T83W RD320T82W RD320T84W RD320T85W RD320T86W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

2500 RD325T81W RD325T83W RD325T82W RD325T84W RD325T85W RD325T86W 1600

2000

2500

RP6R25A160

RP6R25A200

RP6R25A250

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 RDC316T81W RDC316T83W RDC316T82W RDC316T84W RDC316T85W RDC316T86W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 RDC320T81W RDC320T83W RDC320T82W RDC320T84W RDC320T85W RDC320T86W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

2500 RDC325T81W RDC325T83W RDC325T82W RDC325T84W RDC325T85W RDC325T86W 1600

2000

2500

RP6R25A160

RP6R25A200

RP6R25A250

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29888 for Digitrip 810 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 99

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Fixed Rating Plug

Rated

Current (In)

Catalog

Number

LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 CRD316T81W CRD316T83W CRD316T82W CRD316T84W CRD316T85W CRD316T86W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 CRD320T81W CRD320T83W CRD320T82W CRD320T84W CRD320T85W CRD320T86W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 CRDC316T81W CRDC316T83W CRDC316T82W CRDC316T84W CRDC316T85W CRDC316T86W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 CRDC320T81W CRDC320T83W CRDC320T82W CRDC320T84W CRDC320T85W CRDC320T86W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29888 for Digitrip 810 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

100 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Fixed Rating Plug

Rated

Current (In)

Catalog

Number

LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 RD316T91W RD316T93W RD316T92W RD316T94W RD316T95W RD316T96W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 RD320T91W RD320T93W RD320T92W RD320T94W RD320T95W RD320T96W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

2500 RD325T91W RD325T93W RD325T92W RD325T94W RD325T95W RD325T96W 1600

2000

2500

RP6R25A160

RP6R25A200

RP6R25A250

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 RDC316T91W RDC316T93W RDC316T92W RDC316T94W RDC316T95W RDC316T96W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 RDC320T91W RDC320T93W RDC320T92W RDC320T94W RDC320T95W RDC320T96W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

2500 RDC325T91W RDC325T93W RDC325T92W RDC325T94W RDC325T95W RDC325T96W 1600

2000

2500

RP6R25A160

RP6R25A200

RP6R25A250

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29889 for Digitrip 910 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 101

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers

The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at

75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Fixed Rating Plug

Rated

Current (In)

Catalog

Number

LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 CRD316T91W CRD316T93W CRD316T92W CRD316T94W CRD316T95W CRD316T96W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 CRD320T91W CRD320T93W CRD320T92W CRD320T94W CRD320T95W CRD320T96W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 CRDC316T91W CRDC316T93W CRDC316T92W CRDC316T94W CRDC316T95W CRDC316T96W 800

1000

1200

1600

RP6R16A080

RP6R16A100

RP6R16A120

RP6R16A160

2000 CRDC320T91W CRDC320T93W CRDC320T92W CRDC320T94W CRDC320T95W CRDC320T96W 1000

1200

1600

2000

RP6R20A100

RP6R20A120

RP6R20A160

RP6R20A200

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29889 for Digitrip 910 Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

102 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Fixed Rating Plug

Ampere

Rating

Catalog

Number

LSIA 750 LSIG 750 LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050

Catalog Number

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 RD316T77W RD316T76W RD316T107W RD316T106W 800

1000

1200

1600

ORPR16A080

ORPR16A100

0RPR16A120

0RPR16A160

2000 RD320T77W RD320T76W RD320T107W RD320T106W 1000

1200

1600

2000

0RPR20A100

0RPR20A120

0RPR20A160

0RPR20A200

2500 RD325T77W RD325T76W RD325T107W RD325T106W 1600

2000

2500

0RPR25A160

0RPR25A200

0RPR25A250

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 RDC316T77W RDC316T76W RDC316T107W RDC316T106W 800

1000

1200

1600

ORPR16A080

ORPR16A100

0RPR16A120

0RPR16A160

2000 RDC320T77W RDC320T76W RDC320T107W RDC320T106W 1000

1200

1600

2000

0RPR20A100

0RPR20A120

0RPR20A160

0RPR20A200

2500 RDC325T77W RDC325T76W RDC325T107W RDC325T106W 1600

2000

2500

0RPR25A160

0RPR25A200

0RPR25A250

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 103

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

100% Rated 600 Volt AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs

Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only

L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time

S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)

I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup

G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)

Fixed Rating Plug

Ampere

Rating

Catalog

Number

LSIA 750 LSIG 750 LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050

3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 CRD316T77W CRD316T76W CRD316T107W CRD316T106W 800

1000

1200

1600

ORPR16A080

ORPR16A100

0RPR16A120

0RPR16A160

2000 CRD320T77W CRD320T76W CRD320T107W CRD320T106W 1000

1200

1600

2000

0RPR20A100

0RPR20A120

0RPR20A160

0RPR20A200

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 100 kAIC @ 480 Vac

1600 CRDC316T77W CRDC316T76W CRDC316T107W CRDC316T106W 800

1000

1200

1600

ORPR16A080

ORPR16A100

0RPR16A120

0RPR16A160

2000 CRDC320T77W CRDC320T76W CRDC320T107W CRDC320T106W 1000

1200

1600

2000

0RPR20A100

0RPR20A120

0RPR20A160

0RPR20A200

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C107 for Breaker; Number 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

104 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

Breaker Line/Load

Conductors

➀Catalog number includes bus connection,

terminals, and hardware for either line side

or load side of 3-pole breaker.

Line and Load Terminals

Line and load terminals provide wire

connecting capabilities for specific

ranges of continuous current rat-

ings and wire types. All terminals

comply with Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. Standards UL486A and

UL486B and CSA C22.2 No. 65M.

Unless otherwise specified, R-frame

Line and Load Terminals

Maximum

Breaker Amperes

Terminal

Body Material

Wire

Type

Hardware AWG/kcmil Wire

Range/No. Conductors

Metric Wire

Range mm2Catalog

Number

Wire Terminals

1600

2000

Aluminum

Copper

Aluminum

Cu/AI

English

500-1000 (4)

1-600 (4)

2-600 (6)

300-500

50-300

35-300

TA1600RD

T1600RD

TA2000RD➀

Rear Connectors

2000

2500

Copper

–

English

–

B2016RD

B2016RDL➁

B2500RD➂

TA2000RD

➁For use with 100% rated 1600A and 2000A

frame. Do not order separately unless for re-

placement purposes. Is included in breaker

carton when 100% rated device is ordered.

➂For use with 2500-amp frame. Do not order

separately unless for replacement purposes.

Included in breaker carton when 2500A

breaker is ordered.

Note: Molded case switch may trip

above 17500 amperes.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C106 for

Molded Case Switch

Molded Case Switches

For UL listed, series tested molded

case switch application data, refer to

Cutler-Hammer.

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Complete without Terminals

3-Pole 4-Pole

Catalog Number

1600 Type RD – HIgh Instantaneous (K)

RD316WK RD416WK

2000 Type RD – HIgh Instantaneous (K)

RD320WK RD420WK

2500 Type RD – HIgh Instantaneous (K)

––

circuit breaker line load terminals

are shipped separately for field

installation.

Ordering Information

R-frame circuit breakers have Cu/AI

terminals as standard and Cu only

terminals as an option. Specify if

factory installation is required.

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 105

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

Circuit Breaker/

Frame Ampere

Rating

16: 1600A

20: 2000A

25: 2500A

➀For complete list of available trip types refer

to pages 91 through 103.

Catalog Numbering System

This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog

numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalog Number

RD 3 16 T32 W

Circuit

Breaker/

Frame Type

RDC

CRD

CRDC

Number

of Poles

3: 3 Poles

4: 4 Poles

Suffix

W: Without

Terminals

P: 100% Protected

Neutral Pole

R: Ground Fault

Remote (310 Only)

K: Molded Case

Switch

Trip Type➀

T32: Digitrip RMS

310 LSI

T53: Digitrip RMS

510 LS

T65: Digitrip RMS

610 LSG

T86: Digitrip RMS

810 LSIG

T96: Digitrip RMS

910 LSIG

T77: Digitrip OPTIM

750 LSIA

T106: Digitrip OPTIM

1050 LSIG

Dimensions/Weights

Dimensions, Inches (mm)

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

3 15.5

(394)

(406)

9.75

(248)

4 20

(508)

(406)

9.75

(248)

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker

Type

Complete Breaker

Number of Poles

1600A

RD, CRD, RDC, CRDC 102

(46.266)

135

(61.235)

2000A

RD, RDC 102

(46.266)

135

(61.235)

CRD, CRDC 130

(58.967)

175

(79.378)

2500A

RD, RDC 135

(61.235)

182

(82.553)

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

106 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

800-2500 Amperes

Series C R-Frame

Allowable Accessory Combinations

Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles

in the circuit breaker.

Reference

Page

3-Pole 4-Pole

Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu.

Internal Accessories

Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) 141 ■■

Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) 141 ■■

Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) 144 ■■

Auxiliary Switch (4A, 4B) 144 ■■

Shunt Trip – Standard 151 ■■

Shunt Trip – Low Energy 152 ■■

Undervoltage Release Mechanism 159 ■■

Accessory Terminal Block➁ 160 ■■

External Accessories

Base Mounting Hardware 163

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp 169 ●●

Key Interlock Kit 170 ■■

Walking Beam Interlock 171

Electrical (Motor) Operator 173 ■■

Drawout Cassette 164 ●

Handle Mechanisms 178 ■■

Handle Extension➀ 182 ■■

Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit (310 Only) 184 ●●

OPTIM System Components

Breaker Interface Module (BIM) 185 ●

Digitrip OPTIMizer 185 ●

Auxiliary Power Module 185 ●

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Software 185 ●

Modifications (Refer to Cutler-Hammer)

Special Calibration 186 ●●

Moisture Fungus Treatment 186 ●●

Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 186 ●●

Marine Application 186 ●●

➀Included with breaker.

➁Mounts outside breaker.

■Applicable in indicated pole position ●Accessory available/Modification available

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 107

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Motor Circuit Protectors

General Information

Designated as the Cutler-Hammer Types GMCP, HMCP, the

Series C instantaneous-only motor circuit protector (MCP)

is available in ratings from 3A to 600A for motor starter

sizes 0 through 6. The MCP is designed to comply with

the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc. Standard UL489, Canadian Standards Association

Standard C22.2 No. 5, and International Electrotechnical

Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1.

An innovative design of internal components allows higher

MCP-starter combination interrupting ratings. The MCP is

marked to permit proper electrical application within the

assigned equipment ratings.

The MCP is a recognized component (UL File E7819) and

complies with the applicable requirements of Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. Standard UL489. It is also designed to

comply with the applicable requirements of Canadian

Standards Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, Interna-

tional Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations

IEC 157-1, and nameplates bear the CE marking.

Series C Motor Circuit Protectors

Catalog Numbering System

This information is presented only as an aid to under-

standing catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build

catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.

Motor Circuit Protector Catalog Number

HMCP 003 A0 C

Motor

Circuit

Protective

Type

HMCP: 3 Poles

HM2P: 2 Poles➀

HMCPS: 3 Poles

Contin-

uous

Ampere

Rating

003

007

015

025

030

050

070

100

150

250

400

600

Magnetic Trip

Range/NEMA

Starter Size

A0: 9-30/0

C0: 21-70/0

E0: 45-150/0

D0: 40-60/0

H1: 90-300/1

G2: 80-120/2

K2: 150-500/2

J2: 115-170/2

M2: 210-700/2

L3: 160-240/3

R3: 300-1000/3

T4: 450-1500/4

U4: 750-2500/4

A5: 350-700/5

C5: 450-900/5

D5: 500-1000/5

F5: 625-1250/5

G5: 750-1500/5

J5: 875-1750/5

K5: 1000-2000/5

L5: 1125-2250/5

W5: 1250-2500/5

N5: 1500-3000/5

R5: 1750-3500/5

X5: 2000-4000/5

L6: 1800-6000/6 Electronic)

Suffix

C: Non-Aluminum

Terminals

W: W/O Terminals

X: Load Terminals Only

Y: Line Terminals Only

S: Stainless Steel Termi-

nals (150A Frame Only)

No Suffix: Standard

Terminals on Line

and Load

GMCP 003 A0 C

Motor

Circuit

Protective

Device

GMCP: 3 Poles

Contin-

uous

Ampere

Rating

003

007

015

030

050

060

063

Magnetic Trip

Range/NEMA

Starter Size

A0: 15-30/0

C0: 35-70/0

E0: 75-150/0

H1: 150-300/1

K2: 250-500/2

J2: 300-600/2

M2: 320-630/2

Suffix

C: Non-Aluminum

Terminals

➀On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

108 March 1999

Modifications for GMCP

Internal Accessories

These modifications must be factory installed➀.

Note: No UVR available on GMCP.

Type

Accessory

Electrical Ratings Contact

Arrangement

Style

Number

Factory

Suffix

Volts Frequency Amperes

Shunt Trip➂

120

240

50/60 Hz

1.1

2.1

1373D62G18

1373D62G19

Auxiliary Switch➃

240

50/60 Hz

6.0

1a/1b

2a/2b

1288C74G03

1288C73G03

Alarm Switch➃240 50/60 Hz 6.0 Make/Break

1288C75G03

Alarm Switch➃

Alarm Switch

Combination

240 50/60 Hz 6.0 1a/1b

Make/Break

1288C76G09

B13

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Motor Circuit Protectors

G-Frame

480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15579

MCP

Catalog Number

NEMA

Starter Size

Continuous

Amperes

Cam

Setting

Motor Full Load

Center Amperes➄

MCP Trip

Setting

GMCP003A0C 03

1.1 - 1.2

1.3 - 1.5

1.6 - 1.7

1.8 - 1.9

2.0 - 2.2

2.3 - 2.5

GMCP007C0C 07

2.6 - 3.1

3.2 - 3.6

3.7 - 3.9

4.3 - 4.7

4.8 - 5.2

5.3 - 5.7

GMCP015E0C 015

5.7 - 6.8

6.9 - 7.9

8.0 - 9.1

9.2 - 10.3

10.4 - 11.4

11.5 - 12.6

105

120

135

150

GMCP030H1C 130

11.5 - 13.7

13.8 - 16.0

16.1 - 18.3

18.4 - 20.6

20.7 - 22.9

23.0 - 25.2

150

180

210

240

270

300

GMCP050K2C 250

19.3 - 22.9

23.0 - 26.8

26.9 - 30.6

30.7 - 34.5

34.6 - 38.3

38.4 - 42.1

250

300

350

400

450

500

GMCP060J2C 360

23.1 - 27.5

27.7 - 32.2

32.3 - 36.7

36.9 - 41.4

41.5 - 46.0

46.2 - 50.5

300

360

420

480

540

600

GMCP063M2C 363

24.2 - 32.1

29.1 - 34.8

33.9 - 39.4

38.8 - 46.4

43.6 - 48.9

48.5 - 53.7

320

380

440

500

570

630

➀Only one accessory may be installed in

GMCP.

➁For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such

as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN50022.

➂LH only.

➃RH only.

➄Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corre-

sponding trip setting is at 13 times the mini-

mum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times

setting is required for an intermediate FLA

value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP

ratings should be used.

➅For use with GMCP only.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15552 for Alarm Switch

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15551 for Auxiliary Switch

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15550 for Shunt Trip

External Mounted Accessories

Description Number Units

in Package

Style Number

Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable)

Mounting Hardware

DIN Rail Adapter➁

1294C01H01

624B375G23

1225C79G02

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C191 (DIN Rail Adapter)

Vari-Depth Handle Mechanism➅

Description Catalog Number

For Type 1 use

For Type 3R, 4X, 12 use

Close Coupled Black with Gray Handle

Close Coupled Red with Yellow Handle

HRGMV11L

HRGMV14L

HRGMC10

HRGMC30

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 109

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Motor Circuit Protectors

F-Frame

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

MCP

Catalog Number

NEMA

Starter Size

Continuous

Amperes

Cam

Setting

Motor Full Load

Center Amperes➀

MCP Trip

Setting

➁

HMCP003A0C 03

.69 - .91

.92 - 1.0

1.1 - 1.2

1.3 - 1.5

1.6 - 1.7

1.8 - 1.9

2.0 - 2.2

2.3 - 2.5

HMCP007C0C 07

1.5 - 2.0

2.1 - 2.5

2.6 - 3.1

3.2 - 3.6

3.7 - 3.9

4.3 - 4.7

4.8 - 5.2

5.3 - 5.7

HMCP015E0C 015

3.4 - 4.5

4.6 - 5.6

5.7 - 6.8

6.9 - 7.9

8.0 - 9.1

9.2 - 10.3

10.4 - 11.4

11.5 - 12.6

105

120

135

150

HMCP030H1C 130

6.9 - 9.1

9.2 - 11.4

11.5 - 13.7

13.8 - 16.0

16.1 - 18.3

18.4 - 20.6

20.7 - 22.9

23.0 - 25.2

120

150

180

210

240

270

300

HMCP050K2C 250

11.5 - 15.2

15.3 - 19.1

19.2 - 22.9

23.0 - 26.8

26.9 - 30.6

30.7 - 34.5

34.6 - 38.3

38.4 - 42.1

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

HMCP070M2C 270

16.1 - 21.4

21.5 - 26.8

26.9 - 32.2

32.3 - 37.5

37.6 - 42.9

43.0 - 48.3

48.4 - 53.7

53.8 - 59.1

210

280

350

420

490

560

630

700

HMCP100R3C 3 100

23.0 - 30.6

30.7 - 38.3

38.4 - 46.0

46.1 - 53.7

53.8 - 61.4

61.5 - 69.1

69.2 - 76.8

76.9 - 84.5

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

F-Frame

(Continued)

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C401

➀Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at

13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used.

➁For Dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher

than values shown.

➂Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article

430-110(a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be

not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.

MCP

Catalog Number

NEMA

Starter Size

Continuous

Amperes

Cam

Setting

Motor Full Load

Center Amperes➀

MCP Trip

Setting

➁

HMCP150T4C 4 150

34.6 - 46.0

46.1 - 57.5

57.6 - 69.1

69.2 - 80.6

80.7 - 92.2

92.3 -103.7

103.8 -115.2

115.3 -126.7

450

600

750

900

1050

1200

1350

1500

HMCP150U4C 4 150

57.0 - 75.0

76.0 - 95.0

96.0 -114.0

115.0 -130.7

➂

750

1000

1250

1500

1750

2000

2250

2500

Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

MCP

Catalog Number

NEMA

Starter Size

Continuous

Amperes

Cam

Setting

Motor Full Load

Center Amperes

MCP Trip

Setting

➁

HMCPO25D0C

–

25A

–

HMCP050G2C

–

50A

–

103

109

115

120

HMCP070J2C

–

70A

–

115

122

130

139

145

153

160

170

HMCP100L3C

–

100A

–

160

174

185

196

207

218

229

240

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C407

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

110 March 1999

MCP

Catalog Number

NEMA

Starter Size

Continuous

Amperes

Cam

Setting

Motor Full Load

Center Amperes➀

MCP Trip

Setting

➁

HMCPS003A0C 03

.69 - .91

.92 - 1.0

1.1 - 1.2

1.3 - 1.5

1.6 - 1.7

1.8 - 1.9

2.0 - 2.2

2.3 - 2.5

HMCPS007C0C 07

1.5 - 2.0

2.1 - 2.5

2.6 - 3.1

3.2 - 3.6

3.7 - 3.9

4.3 - 4.7

4.8 - 5.2

5.3 - 5.7

HMCPS015E0C 015

3.4 - 4.5

4.6 - 5.6

5.7 - 6.8

6.9 - 7.9

8.0 - 9.1

9.2 - 10.3

10.4 - 11.4

11.5 - 12.6

105

120

135

150

HMCPS030H1C 130

6.9 - 9.1

9.2 - 11.4

11.5 - 13.7

13.8 - 16.0

16.1 - 18.3

18.4 - 20.6

20.7 - 22.9

23.0 - 25.2

120

150

180

210

240

270

300

HMCPS050K2C 250

11.5 - 15.2

15.3 - 19.1

19.2 - 22.9

23.0 - 26.8

26.9 - 30.6

30.7 - 34.5

34.6 - 38.3

38.4 - 42.1

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

500

HMCPS100R3C 3 100

23.0 - 30.6

30.7 - 38.3

38.4 - 46.0

46.1 - 53.7

53.8 - 61.4

61.5 - 69.1

69.2 - 76.8

76.9 - 84.5

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

HMCPS150T4C 4 150

34.6 - 46.0

46.1 - 57.5

57.6 - 69.1

69.2 - 80.6

80.7 - 92.2

92.3 -103.7

103.8 -115.2

115.3 -126.7

450

600

750

900

1050

1200

1350

1500

HMCPS150U4C 4 150

57.0 - 75.0

76.0 - 95.0

96.0 -114.0

115.0 -130.7

➂

750

1000

1250

1500

1750

2000

2250

2500

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Motor Circuit Protectors

MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with

Electronic Overload Relays

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C401

The type ELC current limiter attachment for the Series C

MCP is designed to provide increased interrupting capac-

ity. The combination may be used for the application up

to 200,000A symmetrical at 600 Vac making the MCP suit-

able for use in network distribution systems or other

applications where unusually high fault currents are

available. The current limiter connects to the load end

of the MCP and is provided with terminals suitable for

copper or aluminum conductors. (See table).

Limiters are coordinated with the MCP so that normal

fault currents are interrupted automatically by the MCP

without any damage to the limiter. Only the rare very

high fault is opened by the limiter. Faults that are inter-

rupted by the limiter are inter

rupted by the limiter also

magnetically trip the MCP, open

ing all three poles,

preventing single-phase operation.

Each of the three poles of the type ELC limiter is

equipped with an indicator that extends when a fault is

interrupted by the limiter.

Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0-4)

ELC Current Limiter Attachment

MCP Rating (Amperes) Catalog Number

100

150

ELC3003R

ELC3007R

ELC3015R

ELC3030R

ELC3050R

ELC3100R

ELC3150R

Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes➃

Type ELC Current

Limiter Maxi-

mum Amperes

Standard Aluminum Terminals Nonstandard Terminals (Steel)

Wire Range

AWG

Metric (mm2) Wire Range

AWG

Metric (mm2)

100

150

#14-2

#1-4/0

2.5-35

50-95

#14-2➄

–

2.5-35

–

➀Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13

times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is

required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or

MCP ratings should be used.

➁For Dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than

values shown.

➂Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article

430-110(a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be

not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating.

➃Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes

as defined in UL486A or UL486B.

➄Optional on special order for copper cable only.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C401

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 111

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Motor Circuit Protectors

J-Frame

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

MCP

Catalog Number

➀

NEMA

Starter Size

Continuous

Amperes

Cam

Setting

Motor Full Load

Center Amperes

➁

MCP Trip

Setting

➂

HMCP250A5C

250

27.0 - 30.7

30.8 - 33.8

33.9 - 36.9

37.0 - 40.3

40.4 - 43.8

43.9 - 46.9

47.0 - 50.7

50.8 - 53.8

53.9 - 57.2

350

400

440

480

525

570

610

660

700

HMCP250C5C

250

34.7 - 38.8

38.9 - 43.4

43.5 - 47.6

47.7 - 52.2

52.3 - 56.5

56.6 - 60.7

60.8 - 64.9

65.0 - 69.2

69.3 - 73.5

450

505

565

620

680

735

790

845

900

HMCP250D5C

250

38.5 - 43.4

43.5 - 48.0

48.1 - 53.0

53.1 - 57.6

57.7 - 62.3

62.4 - 67.3

67.4 - 71.9

72.0 - 76.9

77.0 - 81.6

500

565

625

690

750

810

875

935

1000

HMCP250F5C

250

48.1 - 53.8

53.9 - 59.9

60.0 - 66.1

66.2 - 72.3

72.4 - 78.4

78.5 - 83.8

83.9 - 89.9

90.0 - 96.1

96.2 - 102.0

625

700

780

860

940

1020

1090

1170

1250

HMCP250G5C

250

57.7 - 64.6

64.7 - 71.9

72.0 - 79.2

79.3 - 86.5

86.6 - 93.8

93.9 - 101.1

101.2 - 108.4

108.5 - 115.3

115.4 - 122.4

750

840

935

1030

1125

1220

1315

1410

1500

➀Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-

pole catalog numbers begin with”HM2P” in

place of “HMCP.”

➁Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corre-

sponding trip setting is at 13 times the mini-

mum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times

setting is required for an intermediate FLA

value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP

ratings should be used.

➂For Dc applications, actual trip levels are

approximately 40% higher than values shown.

MCP

Catalog Number

➀

NEMA

Starter Size

Continuous

Amperes

Cam

Setting

Motor Full Load

Center Amperes

➁

MCP Trip

Setting

➂

HMCP250J5C

250

67.4 - 75.3

75.4 - 83.8

83.9 - 92.3

92.4 - 100.7

100.8 - 109.2

109.3 - 117.6

117.7 - 126.1

126.2 - 134.6

134.7 - 142.8

875

980

1090

1200

1310

1420

1530

1640

1750

HMCP250K5C

250

77.0 - 86.6

86.6 - 96.1

96.2 - 105.7

105.8 - 115.3

115.4 - 124.9

125.0 - 134.6

134.7 - 144.2

144.3 - 153.8

153.9 - 163.3

1000

1125

1250

1375

1500

1625

1750

1875

2000

HMCP250L5C

250

86.6 - 97.3

97.4 - 108.4

108.5 - 118.8

118.9 - 129.9

130.0 - 140.7

140.8 - 151.5

151.6 - 162.3

162.4 - 173.0

173.1 - 183.6

1125

1265

1410

1545

1690

1830

1970

2110

2250

HMCP250W5C

250

96.2 - 108.0

108.1 - 119.9

120.0 - 132.3

132.4 - 144.2

144.3 - 156.1

156.2 - 168.0

168.1 - 179.9

180.0 - 192.3

192.4 - 204.0

1250

1405

1560

1720

1875

2030

2185

2340

2500

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C402

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

112 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Motor Circuit Protectors

K-Frame

600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum

MCP

Catalog Number

➀

NEMA

Starter Size

Continuous

Amperes

Cam

Setting

Motor Full Load

Center Amperes

➁

MCP Trip

Setting

➂

HMCP400D5C

400

38.5 - 43.4

43.5 - 48.0

48.1 - 53.0

53.1 - 57.6

57.7 - 62.3

62.4 - 67.3

67.4 - 71.9

72.0 - 76.9

77.0 - 81.6

500

565

626

690

750

810

875

935

1000

HMCP400F5C

400

48.1 - 53.8

53.9 - 59.9

60.0 - 66.1

66.2 - 72.3

72.4 - 78.4

78.5 - 83.8

83.9 - 89.9

90.0 - 96.1

96.2 - 102.0

625

700

780

860

940

1020

1090

1170

1250

HMCP400G5C

400

57.7 - 64.6

64.7 - 71.9

72.0 - 79.2

79.3 - 86.5

86.6 - 93.8

93.9 - 101.1

101.2 - 108.4

108.5 - 115.3

115.4 - 122.4

750

840

935

1030

1125

1220

1315

1410

1500

HMCP400J5C

400

67.4 - 75.3

75.4 - 83.8

83.9 - 92.3

92.4 - 100.7

100.8 - 109.2

109.3 - 117.6

117.7 - 126.1

126.2 - 134.6

134.7 - 142.8

875

980

1090

1200

1310

1420

1530

1640

1750

HMCP400K5C

400

77.0 - 86.5

86.6 - 96.1

96.2 - 105.7

105.8 - 115.3

115.4 - 124.9

125.0 - 134.6

134.7 - 144.2

144.3 - 153.8

153.9 - 163.3

1000

1125

1250

1375

1500

1625

1750

1875

2000

➀Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-

pole catalog numbers begin with”HM2P” in

place of “HMCP.”

➁Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corre-

sponding trip setting is at 13 times the mini-

mum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times

setting is required for an intermediate FLA

value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP

ratings should be used.

➂For Dc applications, actual trip levels are

approximately 40% higher than values shown.

➃Equipped with electronic trip device.

MCP

Catalog Number

➀

NEMA

Starter Size

Continuous

Amperes

Cam

Setting

Motor Full Load

Center Amperes

➁

MCP Trip

Setting

➂

HMCP400L5C

400

86.6 - 97.3

97.4 - 108.4

108.5 - 118.8

118.9 - 129.9

130.0 - 140.7

140.8 - 151.5

151.6 - 162.3

162.4 - 173.0

173.1 - 183.6

1125

1265

1410

1545

1690

1830

1970

2110

2250

HMCP400W5C

400

96.2 - 108.0

108.1 - 119.9

120.0 - 132.3

132.4 - 144.2

144.3 - 156.1

156.2 - 168.0

168.1 - 179.9

180.0 - 192.3

192.4 - 204.0

1250

1405

1560

1720

1875

2030

2185

2340

2500

HMCP400N5C

400

115.4 - 129.9

130.0 - 144.2

144.3 - 158.4

158.5 - 173.0

173.1 - 187.6

187.7 - 201.9

202.0 - 216.1

216.2 - 230.7

230.8 - 244.9

1500

1690

1875

2060

2250

2440

2625

2810

3000

HMCP400R5C

400

134.7 - 151.5

151.6 - 168.4

168.5 - 185.3

185.4 - 201.9

202.0 - 218.8

218.9 - 235.7

235.8 - 252.6

252.7 - 269.2

269.3 - 285.7

1750

1970

2190

2410

2625

2845

3065

3285

3500

HMCP400X5C

400

153.9 - 173.0

173.1 - 192.3

192.4 - 211.5

211.6 - 230.7

230.8 - 249.9

250.0 - 269.2

269.3 - 288.4

288.5 - 307.6

307.7 - 326.9

2000

2250

2500

2750

3000

3250

3500

3750

4000

L-Frame➃

600 Vac Maximum

MCP

Catalog Number

NEMA

Starter Size

Continuous

Amperes

Cam

Setting

Motor Full Load

Center Amperes

➁

MCP Trip

Setting

HMCP600L6W

600

138.5 - 184.5

184.6 - 230.7

230.8 - 276.8

276.9 - 323.0

323.1 - 369.1

369.2 - 415.3

415.4 - 461.4

461.5 - 507.7

1800

2400

3000

3600

4200

4800

5400

6000

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C403

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C404

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 113

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

General Information

Series C Earth Leakage Breakers

offer superior Class 1 ground fault

protection and improved ground

fault coordination capability.

Earth leakage ground fault protection

differs from other types of systems in

its level of sensitivity. The sensitivity

of traditional devices is limited by the

cumulative error of the residual cur-

rent sensors and the placement of

the phase and neutral conductors

inside the current sensor.

Leakage breakers are zero sequence

sensing devices. They are factory

supplied with a single sensor and

ground fault relay built-in. This tech-

nique allows for protection sensitivi-

ties down to the 30 milliampere level.

Leakage breakers are provided with a

full complement of easy adjust-

ments. The ground fault pickup set-

ting is adjustable from 0.03 to 30

amperes in eight steps, and the

ground fault time delay setting is

adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0

seconds in six steps. When the

pickup is set to 30 mA, the time delay

setting defaults internally to instanta-

neous only. Increased selectivity pro-

vides for improved coordination with

upstream and downstream ground

fault devices as well as the flexibility

to adjust for transient currents.

Applications

Three-Phase, Four-Wire Loads

For three-phase applications with

line-to-neutral loads, select 4-pole

earth leakage breakers and wire the

neutral through the fourth (right) pole.

Three-Phase, Three-Wire Loads

For applications with only three-

phase, three-wire, line-to-line con-

nected loads, select 3-pole earth

leakage breakers.

Single-Phase Loads

For single-phase, two-wire or three-

wire applications, use a 3-pole earth

leakage breaker and connect all con-

ductors through the breaker.

Accessories

Optional Factory Installed

Internal Accessories

Earth leakage breakers use the same

internal accessories as standard F-,

J- and K-Frame Series C Breakers.

Internal accessories fit in the right-

hand pole space and are available as

factory modifications only.

Optional External Accessories

Series C Earth Leakage Breakers use

the same external accessories as the

standard F-, J- and K-Frame circuit

breakers.

Typical Series C Earth

Leakage Circuit Breaker

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

114 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

Selection Guide and Ordering Information

F-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers UL 489 and UL 1053 – Catalog Numbers

Amperes➂25 kA at 480 VAC 65 kA at 480 VAC 100 kA at 480 VAC

3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

100

110

125

150

ELFD3035L

ELFD3040L

ELFD3045L

ELFD3050L

ELFD3060L

ELFD3070L

ELFD3080L

ELFD3090L

ELFD3100L

ELFD3110L

ELFD3125L

ELFD3150L

ELFD4035L

ELFD4040L

ELFD4045L

ELFD4050L

ELFD4060L

ELFD4070L

ELFD4080L

ELFD4090L

ELFD4100L

ELFD4110L

ELFD4125L

ELFD4150L

ELHFD3035L

ELHFD3040L

ELHFD3045L

ELHFD3050L

ELHFD3060L

ELHFD3070L

ELHFD3080L

ELHFD3090L

ELHFD3100L

ELHFD3110L

ELHFD3125L

ELHFD3150L

ELHFD4035L

ELHFD4040L

ELHFD4045L

ELHFD4050L

ELHFD4060L

ELHFD4070L

ELHFD4080L

ELHFD4090L

ELHFD4100L

ELHFD4110L

ELHFD4125L

ELHFD4150L

ELFDC3035L

ELFDC3040L

ELFDC3045L

ELFDC3050L

ELFDC3060L

ELFDC3070L

ELFDC3080L

ELFDC3090L

ELFDC3100L

ELFDC3110L

ELFDC3125L

ELFDC3150L

ELFDC4035L

ELFDC4040L

ELFDC4045L

ELFDC4050L

ELFDC4060L

ELFDC4070L

ELFDC4080L

ELFDC4090L

ELFDC4100L

ELFDC4110L

ELFDC4125L

ELFDC4150L

J-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers UL 489 and UL 1053 – Catalog Numbers

Amperes 35 kA at 480 VAC 65 kA at 480 VAC 100 kA at 480 VAC

3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

ELJD3100

ELJD3125

ELJD3150

ELJD3175

ELJD3200

ELJD3225

ELJD3250

ELJD4100

ELJD4125

ELJD4150

ELJD4175

ELJD4200

ELJD4225

ELJD4250

ELHJD3100

ELHJD3125

ELHJD3150

ELHJD3175

ELHJD3200

ELHJD3225

ELHJD3250

ELHJD4100

ELHJD4125

ELHJD4150

ELHJD4175

ELHJD4200

ELHJD4225

ELHJD4250

ELJDC3100

ELJDC3125

ELJDC3150

ELJDC3175

ELJDC3200

ELJDC3225

ELJDC3250

ELJDC4100

ELJDC4125

ELJDC4150

ELJDC4175

ELJDC4200

ELJDC4225

ELJDC4250

K-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers UL 489 and UL 1053 – Catalog Numbers

Amperes 35 kA at 480 VAC 65 kA at 480 VAC 100 kA at 480 VAC

3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

200

225

250

300

350

400

ELKD3200

ELKD3225

ELKD3250

ELKD3300

ELKD3350

ELKD3400

ELKD4200

ELKD4225

ELKD4250

ELKD4300

ELKD4350

ELKD4400

ELHKD3200

ELHKD3225

ELHKD3250

ELHKD3300

ELHKD3350

ELHKD3400

ELHKD4200

ELHKD4225

ELHKD4250

ELHKD4300

ELHKD4350

ELHKD4400

ELKDC3200

ELKDC3225

ELKDC3250

ELKDC3300

ELKDC3350

ELKDC3400

ELKDC4200

ELKDC4225

ELKDC4250

ELKDC4300

ELKDC4350

ELKDC4400

Standard Line and Load Terminals – Included with Breaker

Frame Wire Type (Number) Range of Conductors Terminal Material

F-Frame

35-100A

110-150A

Cu/Al

(1) #14-1/0

(1) #4-4/0

Steel

Stainless Steel

J-Frame 100-250A Cu/Al (1) #4-250 kcmil Aluminum

K-Frame

200-350A

400A

Cu/Al

(1) 250-500 kcmil

(2) 3/0-250 kcmil

Aluminum

Optional K-Frame Line and Load Terminals – Order Separately

Wire Type (Number) Range of Conductors Terminal Material Catalog Number

Cu/Al

(2) 250 kcmil

(1) 500 kcmil

Aluminum

3TA401K➀

Cu/Al

(2) 250 kcmil

(1) 500 kcmil

Aluminum

4TA401K➁

Cu (1) 3-350 kcmil Copper T300K

Cu (1) 250-500 kcmil Copper T350K

Cu (1) 3/0-250 kcmil Copper 3T400K➀

Cu (1) 3/0-250 kcmil Copper 3T400K➁➀Package of 3 terminals.

➁Package of 4 terminals.

➂15, 20, 25, and 30 ampere available.

F-Frame HMCP with Earth Leakage Ground Fault

Continuous Amperes Catalog Number 3-Pole

3ELHMCP003A0C

7ELHMCP007C0C

15 ELHMCP015E0C

25 ELHMCP025X0C

30 ELHMCP030H1C

50 ELHMCP050K2C

70 ELHMCP070M2C

100 ELHMCP100R3C

150 ELHMCP150T4C

150 ELHMCP150U4C

3ELHMCP003A0LC

7ELHMCP007C0LC

15 ELHMCP015E0LC

25 ELHMCP025D0C

30 ELHMCP030H1LC

50 ELHMCP050G2C

70 ELHMCP070J2C

100 ELHMCP100L3C

–ELHMCP024D0IC

–ELHMCP050G2IC

–ELHMCP070J2IC

100 ELHMCP100K3C

HMCPs for Application with Motor Starters

Equipped with Electrical Overload Relays

3ELHMCPS003A0C

7ELHMCPS007C0C

15 ELHMCPS015E0C

30 ELHMCPS030H1C

50 ELHMCPS050K2C

100 ELHMCPS100R3C

150 ELHMCPS150T4C

150 ELHMCPS140U4C

J-Frame HMCP with Earth Leakage Ground Fault

Continuous Amperes Catalog Number 3-Pole

250 ELHMCP250A5

ELHMCP250C5

ELHMCP250D5

ELHMCP250F5

ELHMCP250G5

ELHMCP250J5

ELHMCP250K5

ELHMCP250L5

ELHMCP250W5

400 ELHMCP400D5

ELHMCP400F5

ELHMCP400G5

ELHMCP400J5

ELHMCP400K5

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 115

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Non-Fused Current Limiting

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Volts Ac

(50/60 Hz)

Interrupting Capacity

(Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)

FCL 240

480

200

150

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

2-Pole 9

(4.082)

3-Pole 9

(4.082)

➀2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames

with current carrying parts omitted from the

center pole.

Type FCL Breaker

Listed with Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. except as noted.

Type FCL breakers are not defined in

Federal Specification W-C-375-b.

Line and Load Terminals

Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When used with

aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals,

add suffix “Z” to breaker catalog number listed.

Maximum Breaker Amperes Wire Type AWG Wire Range

Standard Pressure Terminals

100 Al/Cu #14-1/0

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

100

Al/Cu

#14-#4

#4-4/0

Type FCL Current Limit-R Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

15 to 100 Amperes, 480 Volts Ac

Non-Interchangeable Trip, Line and

Load Terminals Included

On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded

B phase applications, refer to

Cutler-Hammer.

Dimensions / Weights

Dimensions, Inches

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2-3 4.125

(104.78)

8.75

(222.25)

3.375

(85.73)

Maximum Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

2-Pole➀3-Pole

Catalog Number

100

FCL2015L

FCL2020L

FCL2025L

FCL2030L

FCL2035L

FCL2040L

FCL2045L

FCL2050L

FCL2060L

FCL2070L

FCL2080L

FCL2090L

FCL2100L

FCL3015L

FCL3020L

FCL3025L

FCL3030L

FCL3035L

FCL3040L

FCL3045L

FCL3050L

FCL3060L

FCL3070L

FCL3080L

FCL3090L

FCL3100L

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

116 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Non-Fused Current Limiting

Listed with Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. except as noted.

Type LCL breakers are not defined in

Federal Specification W-C-375-b.

Type LCL Breaker

Type LCL Current Limit-R Electronic Circuit Breakers

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker Type

Volts Ac

(50/60 Hz)

Interrupting Capacity

(Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)

LCL 240

480

600

200

100

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Standard

2-Pole 32

(14.515)

3-Pole 32

(14.515)

With Ground Fault

3-Pole 36

(16.329)

125 to 400 Amperes, 600 Volts Ac

with Solid State Trip Units

On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded

B phase applications, refer to

Cutler-Hammer.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15257

Standard Breakers 600 Volts Ac, 50/60 Hz

Complete breaker requires frame, rating plug and terminals

Frame Only

Poles➀Standard (Long Delay, Mag-

netic Trip and Current Limiting)

Magnetic Only➁ and

Current Limiting

Long Delay, Magnetic Trip and Adjustable Short

Delay Time (.08-.28 seconds), and Current Limiting

Catalog Number

Types LCL and LCLA 250 Ampere Frame (125-250 Amperes)

LCL2250F

LCL3250F

LCL2250FM

LCL3250FM

LCLA2250F

LCLA3250F

Type LCL and LCLA 400 Ampere Frame (200-400 Amperes)

LCL2400F

LCL3400F

LCL2400FM

LCL3400FM

LCLA2400F

LCLA3400F

Breakers with Built-in Ground Fault Protection

Complete breaker requires frame, rating plug and terminals – extra current

transformer included for neutral.

Frame Only

Poles➀Standard (Long Delay, Magnetic Trip,

Current Limiting, and Ground Fault Trip)

Long Delay, Magnetic Trip and Adjustable Short Delay Time

(.06-.22 seconds), and Ground Fault Trip and Current Limiting

Catalog Number

Types LCLG and LCLGA 250 Ampere Frame (125-250 Amperes)

3LCLG3250F LCLGA3250F

Types LCLG and LCLGA 400 Ampere Frame (200-400 Amperes)

3LCLG3400F LCLGA3400F

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15495

➀2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames

with current carrying parts omitted from the

center pole.

➁UL listed recognized component.

➂Terminals shipped separately from breaker.

Terminals➂ (Order Separately)

Two terminals are required per pole.

Terminals are Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. listed for wire type and

range listed below. When used

with aluminum cable, use joint

compound.

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Wire Range, Type,

Number of Cables

Terminal

Catalog

Number

Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

225

400

1#6-350 kcmil Cu

1#4-250 kcmil Cu,

plus

1 3/0-600 kcmil Cu

T225LA

T401LA

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

225

400

1#6-350 kcmil Cu, or

1#4-350 kcmil Al

1#4-250 kcmil Al/Cu,

plus

1 3/0-600 kcmil Al/Cu

TA225LA1

TA400LA1

Rating Plug Selection Data

Rating plugs listed below are for

both standard breakers and breakers

with built-in ground fault protection.

Rating Plugs Only (For 2- or 3-Pole Frames)

Contin-

uous

Ampere

Rating

Magnetic Trip

Setting, Amperes

Fixed

Rating

Plugs

Adjustable

Rating

Plugs➃

Low High Catalog Number

Types LCL and LCLA 250 Ampere Frames

125

150

175

200

225

250

375

450

525

600

675

750

1125

1350

1575

1800

2025

2250

2LCL125

2LCL150

2LCL175

2LCL200

2LCL225

2LCL250

–

A2LCL175➄

A2LCL200

A2LCL225

A2LCL250➅

Types LCL and LCLA 400 Ampere Frames

200

225

250

275

300

350

400

450

500

550

600

700

800

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2800

3200

4LCL200

4LCL225

4LCL250

4LCL275

4LCL300

4LCL350

4LCL400

–

A4LCL300➄

A4LCL350

A4LCL400➅

Dimensions / Weights

Dimensions, Inches

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2-3 16

(406.40)

8.25

(209.56)

4.0625

(103.19)

➃Adjustable 70 to 100% except as noted.

➄Adjustable 75 to 100%.

➅Adjustable 50 to 100%.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 117

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Fused Current Limiting

➀2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames

with current carrying parts omitted from the

center pole.

Type Tri-Pac FB Breaker

Type FB Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker Complete Breaker

2-Pole 3-Pole

Tri-Pac FB 10.5 11.5

Line and Load Terminals

Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When used with

aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order optional aluminum terminals,

add suffix “Z” to breaker catalog number listed.

Maximum Breaker Amperes Wire Type AWG Wire Range

Standard Pressure Terminals

100 Al/Cu #14-1/0

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

100

Al/Cu

#14-#4

#4-4/0

Replacement Current Limiters and Housing Assembly

Current Limiters: One required per pole.

Application Catalog Number

Supplied as standard in Type FB Tri-Pac breakers rated 15-100 amperes.

Replaces 200FBP03 formerly supplied on 15-40 ampere ratings, and

500FBP07 formerly supplied on 50-100 ampere ratings.

100FBP06

Refer to CAT.71.01.T.E for complete application information.

Current Limiter Housing Assembly Complete with Current Limiter

Ampere Rating Poles Style Number

15-100

176C593G09

176C593G10

15 to 100 Amperes, 600 Volts Ac,

250 Volts Dc, Replaceable Current

Limiters

Listed with Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. except as noted.

Tri-Pac FB breakers meet the

requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a

and 26a circuit breakers as defined

in Federal Specification W-C-375b.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

Listed

600 Volts Ac Maximum: 200,000

Amperes Symmetrical

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Volts Dc Maximum: 100,000

Amperes.

On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase

applications, refer to Cutler-Hammer.

Dimensions / Weights

Dimensions, Inches

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2-3 4.125

(104.78)

8.75

(222.25)

3.5

(88.90)

Maximum Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

2-Pole➀3-Pole

Catalog Number (Current Limiters Included)

100

FB2015PL

FB2020PL

FB2030PL

FB2040PL

FB2050PL

FB2060PL

FB2070PL

FB2090PL

FB2100PL

FB3015PL

FB3020PL

FB3030PL

FB3040PL

FB3050PL

FB3060PL

FB3070PL

FB3090PL

FB3100PL

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

118 March 1999

Continu-

ous

Ampere

Rating

@40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting

Amperes➃

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Units, Limiters and Terminals➄

Includes Pressure Type

Copper Terminals➄

Frame Only Trip Unit Only Current Limiter

1 Required per

Pole

Low High Catalog Number

2 Poles, 600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc➅

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

350

450

500

625

750

875

1000

1125

1250

1500

1750

2000

700

900

1000

1250

1500

1750

2000

2250

2500

3000

3500

4000

LA2070PR

LA2090PR

LA2100PR

LA2125PR

LA2150PR

LA2175PR

LA2200PR

LA2225PR

LA2250PR

LA2300PR

LA2350PR

LA2400PR

LA2400PRF

LA2070PT

LA2090PT

LA2100PT

LA2125PT

LA2150PT

LA2175PT

LA2200PT

LA2225PT

LA2250PT

LA2300PT

LA2350PT

LA2400PT

200LAP08

400LAP10

3 Poles, 600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

350

450

500

625

750

875

1000

1125

1250

1500

1750

2000

700

900

1000

1250

1500

1750

2000

2250

2500

3000

3500

4000

LA3070PR

LA3090PR

LA3100PR

LA3125PR

LA3150PR

LA3175PR

LA3200PR

LA3225PR

LA3250PR

LA3300PR

LA3350PR

LA3400PR

LA3400PRF

LA3070PT

LA3090PT

LA3100PT

LA3125PT

LA3150PT

LA3175PT

LA3200PT

LA3225PT

LA3250PT

LA3300PT

LA3350PT

LA3400PT

200LAP08

400LAP10

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 14551 for Trip Unit and Fuse

Dimensions / Weights

Dimensions, Inches

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2-3 8.25

(209.56)

(406.40)

4.75

(113.54)

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Fused Current Limiting

Terminals➄

Two terminals are required per pole.

Terminals are Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. listed for wire size and

type listed below. When used with

aluminum conductors, use joint

compound. To order optional alumi-

num terminals, add suffix “Z” to

complete breaker catalog number.

Maximum

Breaker

Amperes

Wire Range, Type,

Number of Cables

Terminal

Catalog

Number

Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

225

225➆

400

1 #6-350 kcmil Cu

1 #6-250 kcmil Cu

1 #4-250 kcmil Cu, plus

1 3/0-600 kcmil Cu

T225LA

T225LBF

T401LA

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

225

400

1 #6-350 kcmil Cu, or

1 #4-350 kcmil Cu/Al

1 #4-250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus

1 3/0-600 kcmil Al/Cu

TA225LA1

TA400LA1

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 13732

Type Tri-Pac LA Breaker

Listed with Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. except as noted.

Tri-Pac LA breakers meet the

requirements for Class 16a, 16b, 17a

and 26a circuit breakers as defined in

Federal Specification W-C-375b.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

Listed

600 Volts Ac Maximum: 200,000

Amperes Symmetrical

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Volts Dc Maximum: 100,000

Amperes.

On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase

applications, refer to Cutler-Hammer.

Type LA Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

70 to 400 Amperes, 600 Volts Ac,

250 Volts Dc, 2-, 3-Pole, Inter-

changeable Trip, Replaceable

Current Limiters

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker Complete

Breaker

Frame

Only

Trip

Unit

Pole

Tri-Pac LA 29.75 34 23.5 25 2.25 3

Current Limiters

Included with breaker, one required

per pole.

Application Catalog

Number

Supplied as standard on ratings

through 200 amperes.

200LAP08

Supplied as standard on 225 through

400 ampere ratings, optional on lower

ratings when a higher “cross-over

point” is desired. (Above two limiters

replace 800LAP12 formerly supplied

as standard on all ratings, 600LAP09

optional on all ratings through 300

amperes, 300LAP05 optional on rat-

ings through 150 amperes, and spe-

cial rating limiter 1000LAP14.)

400LAP10

Special rating where a higher “cross-

over point” is desired on 200 ampere

and higher ratings (Replaces limiter

1500LAP20)

500LAP15

➁➂

➀New limiters suitable for replacement in

existing breakers by using plug-in conductor

from old limiter (instructions included with

limiter). Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number

14824

➁Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

➂Protection based on 100,000 ampere maxi-

mum fault, 480 volts maximum.

➃Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.

➄Terminals shipped separately from breakers.

➅2-pole breakers or trips are supplied in 3-pole

frames with current carrying parts omitted

from the center pole.

➆Optional terminal.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 119

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Fused Current Limiting

Type Tri-Pac NB Breaker

Current Limiters

Included with breaker, one required

per pole.

Application Catalog

Number

Supplied as standard on ratings

through 500 amperes.

500NBP12

Supplied as standard on 600 through

800 ampere ratings, optional on

lower ratings when a higher “cross-

over point” is desired.

Above two limiters replace

1000NBP14 formerly supplied on rat-

ings up to 600 amperes, 1500NBP20

supplied on 700 amperes, and

2500NBP25 supplied on 800 amperes.

800NBP20

Type NB Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

➀Dc rating applies to 350 amperes maximum

thermal or to magnetic only breakers.

➁Shipped separately from breaker

➂2-pole breakers or trips are supplied in 3-pole

frames with current carrying parts omitted

from the center pole.

➃60 Hz Ac only.

300 to 800 Amperes, 600 Volts Ac,

250 Volts Dc➀, 2-, 3-Pole, Inter-

changeable Trip, Replaceable

Current Limiters

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker Complete

Breaker

Frame

Only

Trip

Unit

Pole

Tri-Pac NB 62 75 58 65 3.5 4

Listed with Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. except as noted.

Tri-Pac NB breakers meet the

requirements for Class 16b, 17a and

26a circuit breakers as defined in

Federal Specification W-C-375b.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

Listed

600 Volts Ac Maximum: 200,000

Amperes Symmetrical

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Volts Dc Maximum➀: 100,000

Amperes.

On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded

B phase applications, refer to

Cutler-Hammer.

Terminals➁

Two terminals are required per pole.

Terminals are Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. listed for wire size and

type listed below. When used with

aluminum conductors, use joint

compound. To order optional alumi-

num terminals, add suffix “Z” to

complete breaker catalog number.

Maximum

Ampere

Rating

Wire Range, Type,

Number of Cables

Terminal

Catalog

Number

Standard Copper Pressure Terminals

350

700

800

1 #1-600 kcmil Cu

2 2/0-500 kcmil Cu

3 3/0-500 kcmil Cu

T350NB

T700NB1

T1000NB1

Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals

700

800

2 #1-500 kcmil Al/Cu

3 3/0-400 kcmil Al/Cu

3 500-750 kcmil Al/Cu

TA700NB1

TA1000NB1

TA1201NB1

Continu-

ous

Ampere

Rating

@40°C

Magnetic Trip Setting

Amperes➃

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Units, Limiters and Terminals

Includes Pressure Type

Copper Terminals➄

Frame Only Trip Unit Only Current Limiter

1 Required per Pole

Low High Catalog Number

2 Poles, 600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc➀➂

300

350

400➃

500➃

600➃

700➃

800➃

1500

1750

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

5000

6000

NB2300P

NB2350P

NB2400P

NB2500P

NB2600P

NB2700P

NB2800P

NB2800PF

NB2300PT

NB2350PT

NB2400PT

NB2500PT

NB2600PT

NB2700PT

NB2800PT

500NBP12

800NBP20

3 Poles, 600 Volts Ac Only

300

350

400➃

500➃

600➃

700➃

800➃

1500

1750

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

5000

6000

NB3300P

NB3350P

NB3400P

NB3500P

NB3600P

NB3700P

NB3800P

NB3800PF

NB3300PT

NB3350PT

NB3400PT

NB3500PT

NB3600PT

NB3700PT

NB3800PT

500NBP12

800NBP20

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 13771 for Trip Unit and Fuse

Dimensions / Weights

Dimensions, Inches

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2-3 8.25

(209.56)

(558.80)

5.5

(139.70)

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

120 March 1999

Bus Bar Connectors➅

“T” Connector for

Cu/Al Bus

Two required per pole.

For rear bus connection.

Accepts up to four bus

bolts. May be rotated 90º.

Catalog Number

BA2000B

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Fused Current Limiting

➃Magnetic only trip units are available. Order

by description.

➄2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames

with current carrying parts omitted from

center pole.

➅Not listed with Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc.

Type Tri-Pac PB Breaker

Current Limiters

Included with breaker, one required

per pole.

Application Catalog

Number

Supplied as standard on ratings

through 1000 amperes. (Replaces

limiter 1500PBPR30 formerly sup-

plied on 600 and 700 ampere rat-

ings, and 3000 PBPR27 supplied on

800-1000 ampere ratings.

1000PBPR20

Supplied as standard on 1200

through 1600 ampere ratings.

Optional on lower ratings where a

higher “cross-over point” is

desired. (Replaces limiter

4000PBR30 formerly supplied on

1200 through 1400 ampere ratings,

and 5000PBPR42 supplied on 1600

ampere ratings.

1600PBPR30

Type PB Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

600 to 1600 Amperes, 600 Volts Ac,

60 Hertz Ac➀, 250 Volts Dc➁,

2-, 3- Poles Interchangeable Trip,

Replaceable Current Limiters

Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)

Breaker Complete

Breaker

Frame

Only

Trip

Unit

Pole

Tri-Pac PB 148 179 106 120 18 23

Listed with Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. except as noted.

Tri-Pac PB breakers meet the

requirements for Class 17a and 26a

circuit breakers as defined in Federal

Specification W-C-375b.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

Listed

600 Volts Ac Maximum: 200,000

Amperes Symmetrical

Based on NEMA Test Procedures

250 Volts Dc➁: 100,000 Amperes.

On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded

B phase applications, refer to

Cutler-Hammer.

Cable Connector

(Optional)

For “T” connector.

Accepts four 600 kcmil

copper cables.

Style Number

505C706G04

Special Breakers➅

Magnetic Only Type Tri-Pacs:

Available on request.

Continu-

ous

Ampere

Rating

@40°C

Ac Magnetic Trip Set-

ting (Set on High Side,

Adjustable to Lower

Limits)

Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit Current Limiters and Connectors

Includes Rear

“T” Connectors➄

Frame Only Trip Unit Only➃Current Limiter

1 Required per Pole

Low High Catalog Number

2 Poles, 600 Volts Ac➄

600

700

800

900

1000

1200

1400

1600

1500

2000

2500

3000

5000

6000

7000

8000

PB2600PR

PB2700PR

PB2800PR

PB2900PR

PB21000PR

PB21200PR

PB21400PR

PB21600PR

PB21600PRF

PB2600PRT

PB2700PRT

PB2800PRT

PB2900PRT

PB21000PRT

PB21200PRT

PB21400PRT

PB21600PRT

1000PBPR20

1600PBPR30

3 Poles, 600 Volts Ac Only

600

700

800

900

1000

1200

1400

1600

1500

2000

2500

3000

5000

6000

7000

8000

PB3600PR

PB3700PR

PB3800PR

PB3900PR

PB31000PR

PB31200PR

PB31400PR

PB31600PR

PB31600PRF

PB3600PRT

PB3700PRT

PB3800PRT

PB3900PRT

PB31000PRT

PB31200PRT

PB31400PRT

PB31600PRT

1000PBPR20

1600PBPR30

➀Higher frequency calibration not available.

Minimum of 50 Hz calibration available on

special order.

➁250 volts Dc rating applies only to magnetic

only breakers.

➂Shipped separately from breaker.

Dimensions / Weights

Dimensions, Inches

Number of Poles Width Height Depth

2-3 12.0625

(306.39)

22.125

(561.98)

9.0625

(230.19)

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 121

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories for Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Alarm Switch

For light or alarm indication when

breaker trips. Does not function with

manual operation. Automatically

resets when breaker is relatched.

Standard leads extend 18 inches out-

side of breaker. Longer leads may be

specified. Not field mountable.

Alarm Switch Contact Rating (Non

Inductive) LA Tri-Pac: 10 amperes,

120 volt Ac; 5A, 240 volt Ac.

Breaker

Frame

Normal

Pole Meeting

Contact Operation

(Specific Type Desired)

FCL

LA Tri-Pac

NB Tri-Pac

PB Tri-Pac

LCL

Center

Left

Left➀

Make or Break

➀When alarm switch is used in conjunction

with auxiliary switch, the auxiliary switch is

rated 250 volts max., 5 amperes maximum.

➁Left-hand mounting is standard unless other-

wise specified.

➂All switches are multiples of 1A-1B with a

common electrical connection (See diagram

above).

➃Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker

except on NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac break-

ers.

➄For Dc applications refer to factory.

➅Right-hand mounting only.

Auxiliary Switch➁

For auxiliary control circuits. Minia-

ture switches mount within breaker.

Commonly used for remote indica-

tion of open or closed breaker and

electrically interlocking component

control circuits. “A” contacts are

closed when breaker is closed. “B”

contacts are open when breaker is

closed. Standard leads extend 18

inches outside of breaker. Longer

leads may be specified.

Black Lead

Blue Lead

Red Lead

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 14535 NB Tri-Pac; 14534 PB Tri-Pac; 15279 LCL

Auxiliary Switch Attachment Kits for Field Mounting➂➃

Breaker

Type

For Right-Hand Mounting For Left-Hand Mounting Maxmum

Ac Voltage

Rating➄

Maximum

Non-Inductive

Amperes

1A-1B 2A-2B 1A-1B 2A-2B

Style Number

FCL

NB Tri-Pac

PB Tri-Pac

LCL

1369D79G03

4980D16G05

2602D32G14

–

4980D16G06

2602D32G15

–

1369D79G03

4980D16G12

2602D32G11

1372D49G03

–

4980D16G13

2602D32G12

1372D49G06

240

480

6 (10@240)

Factory Mounted

Auxiliary Switches➁

All of the above auxiliary switches

can be specified for factory mount-

ing at the same price as listed for the

kit. These attachments have the

leads out the side of the breaker and

are UL listed when factory mounted

unless other non UL listed modifica-

tions are used (except as noted).

Factory mounted switches only can

be supplied for the following break-

ers: FB Tri-Pac➅, LA Tri-Pac. Order

by description.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

122 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories for Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Left-Hand Mounting Kits for Type LCL

Current Limiting Breakers➅

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt

trip from external 32 to 120 volt

(Dc to 60 Hz) source.➆➇

Style

Number

1372D49G22

Provision to trip flux transfer shunt

trip from external 240 to 600 volt

(50/60 Hz) source.➇➈

1372D49G32

Shunt Trip

For tripping breaker from a remote

point. A solenoid device mounts

within breaker case. Breaker trips

when coil is energized.

Shunt trips should not be used as

circuit interlocks using maintained

contact pilot devices.

A cutoff switch breaks the circuit to

the momentary rated coil when

breaker opens. Available for control

voltages up to 250 volts Dc or 600

volts Ac. Voltage and frequency

must be specified. Standard leads

extend 18 inches outside of breaker.

Longer leads may be specified.

Shunt Trip for Field Mounting➀➁➂

Voltage/Hz Breaker Type

Right-Hand Mounting Left-Hand Mounting

FCL NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac FCL NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac

Style Number

600/50-60 Hz

480/50-60 Hz

240/50-60 Hz

208/50-60 Hz

120/50-60 Hz

60/50-60 Hz

48/50-60 Hz

24/50-60 Hz

250 Dc

125 Dc

60 Dc

48 Dc

24 Dc

12 Dc

1369D80G15

1369D80G16

1369D80G17

1369D80G18

1369D80G19

1369D80G20

1369D80G21

1369D80G22

1369D80G23

1369D80G24

1369D80G25

1369D80G26

1369D80G27

1369D80G28

2606D58G15

2606D58G16

2606D58G17

2606D58G18

2606D58G19

2606D58G20

2606D58G21

2606D58G22

2606D58G23

2606D58G24

2606D58G25

2606D58G26

2606D58G27

2606D58G28

2606D58G15

2606D58G16

2606D58G17

2606D58G18

2606D58G19

2606D58G20

2606D58G21

2606D58G22

2606D58G23

2606D58G24

2606D58G25

2606D58G26

2606D58G27

2606D58G28

1369D80G01

1369D80G02

1369D80G03

1369D80G04

1369D80G05

1369D80G06

1369D80G07

1369D80G08

1369D80G09

1369D80G10

1369D80G11

1369D80G12

1369D80G13

1369D80G14

2606D58G01

2606D58G02

2606D58G03

2606D58G04

2606D58G05

2606D58G06

2606D58G07

2606D58G08

2606D58G09

2606D58G10

2606D58G11

2606D58G12

2606D58G13

2606D58G14

2606D58G01

2606D58G02

2606D58G03

2606D58G04

2606D58G05

2606D58G06

2606D58G07

2606D58G08

2606D58G09

2606D58G10

2606D58G11

2606D58G12

2606D58G13

2606D58G14

➀120 volt Ac ratings suitable for 55% pickup

for ground fault applications.

➁Not field mountable on non-automatic

breakers (MCS).

➂Field mounting voids breakers’ UL listing

except on NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac.

➃Right-hand mounting only.

➄Not UL listed.

➅UL listing pending. Refer to Cutler-Hammer.

➆Rated 48 volts minimum for ground fault

applications.

➇Also available factory mounted for 24 volt

Dc. Order by description.

➈Not for ground fault.

Shunt Trip Coil Data for Type LCL

Current Limiting Breakers

Shunt Trip

Voltage

Rating

Coil Inrush

Amperes Volt-Amperes

120 Ac .15 18

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Numbers

15194 14919 14940 15194 14919 14940

Factory mounted shunt trips only can be supplied for FB Tri-Pac➃➄ and

LA Tri-Pac breakers. Order by description.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15279

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 123

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories for Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Standard Undervoltage

Release➀

For undervoltage protection. A sole-

noid device mounts within breaker

case. Coil must be energized before

closing breaker. Trips breaker when

voltage drops below 40 to 60% of

coil rating. Picks up and seals in at

80% of coil rating. For line voltages

up to 250 volts Dc or 600 volts Ac.

Externally mounted resistors are

supplied for certain ratings. Stan-

dard leads extend 18 inches outside

of breaker. Longer leads may be

specified.

Note: U.V.R. attachments are not

designed for, and should not be used

as, circuit interlocks. For further

information, refer to Cutler-Hammer.

Factory Mounted

Undervoltage Releases➁

NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac undervolt-

age releases can be specified for

factory mounting at the same price

as the kit. These attachments have

the leads out the side and are

UL listed when factory mounted

unless other non-UL listed modifica-

tions are used.

Factory mounted undervoltage

releases only can be supplied for the

following breakers: FB Tri-Pac➂,

LA Tri-Pac and FCL; LCL 120 Volts

Ac only.➃ Order by description.

Undervoltage Release Attachment Kits for Field Mounting➄➅

Attachment

Voltage, Hz

Breaker Type

For Right-Hand Mounting For Left-Hand Mounting

NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac

Style Number

24 60

48 60

120 60

208 60

240 60

480 60

600 60

12 Dc

24 Dc

48 Dc

60 Dc

125 Dc

250 Dc

–

373D632G01

373D632G19

373D632G02

373D632G03

373D632G04

372D032G01

372D032G02

372D032G03

–

372D032G04

372D032G05

–

5674D29G16

5674D29G09

5674D29G10

5674D29G11

5674D29G13

5674D29G14

4976D85G01

4976D85G02

4976D85G03

4976D85G04

4976D85G07

4976D85G08

–

373D632G05

373D632G20

373D632G06

373D632G07

373D632G08

372D032G06

372D032G07

372D032G08

–

372D032G09

372D032G10

–

5674D29G08

5674D29G01

5674D29G02

5674D29G03

5674D29G05

5674D29G06

4976D85G11

4976D85G12

4976D85G13

4976D85G14

4976D85G17

4976D85G18

➀Not UL listed.

➁Right-hand mounting considered standard

unless specified otherwise.

➂Right-hand mounting only.

➃UL listing pending.

➄Not field mountable on nonautomatic

breakers (Molded case switches).

➅Field mounting voids UL listing of breaker

except on NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac.

Undervoltage Release Coil Data

Voltage

Rating, Hz

Breaker Type

FB Tri-Pac LCL

Coil Amperes Series Resistance

(Ohms)

Total VA Coil Amperes Total VA

600 Ac

480 Ac

240 Ac

208 Ac

120 Ac

60 Ac

48 Ac

24 Ac

250 Ac

125 Ac

60 Ac

48 Ac

24 Ac

12 Ac

0.020

0.016

0.021

0.019

0.023

0.203

0.245

0.250

0.026

0.248

0.260

0.141

0.286

25,000

6,000

–

250

150

5,000

–

200

150

–

12.0

7.7

5.1

4.0

2.8

12.2

11.8

6.0

6.5

3.3

14.9

12.5

3.4

3.5

–

.05

–

Voltage

Rating, Hz

Breaker Type

LA Tri-Pac, PB Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac

Coil

Amperes

External Series

Resistance

(Ohms)

Total

Coil

Amperes

External Series

Resistance

(Ohms)

Total

600 Ac

480 Ac

240 Ac

208 Ac

120 Ac

48 Ac

250 Dc

125 Dc

60 Dc

48 Dc

24 Dc

12 Dc

0.029

0.014

0.036

0.073

0.152

0.035

0.039

0.034

0.040

0.069

0.136

20,000

–

5,000

1,500

–

17.4

6.8

8.7

7.5

8.8

7.3

8.8

4.9

2.1

2.0

1.7

0.016

0.013

0.018

0.023

–

0.013

–

0.012

0.023

0.048

35,000

30,000

–

16,500

6,500

–

600

–

9.6

6.3

3.2

3.8

2.8

–

3.3

1.7

–

0.6

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number

14961 13231 14961 13231

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

124 March 1999

Plug-in Adapter Kits

For rear connected applications such

as switchboards. Facilitates ease of

installation and front removal of

breaker. Includes conductor for

mounting on breaker, plug-in

mounting blocks with matching con-

ductor, rear studs and mounting

hardware. Order two mounting

blocks style number when line and

load are required; order one mount-

ing block style number when either

line or load is required.

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

Accessories for Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Rear Connected Studs➀

For complete stud assembly, order a

stud and appropriate tube based on

thickness of customer’s mounting

panel. A short stud must be assem-

bled adjacent to a long stud to

maintain clearances required by

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.➁

Two studs are required per pole.

➀Not Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed.

➁400 ampere LA studs of the same length

have sufficient clearance; however, cust-

omer connections may make it necessary

to use a short stud adjacent to a long stud.

➂Included at no charge when ordered with

stud.

➃150, 250, 300 and 400 ampere frames only.

➄These plug-in adapter kits are UL listed as

recognized components.

Mounting Panel

Thickness, Inches

Stud Tube➂

Length Style Number Length Style Number

FCL and FB Tri-Pac Breakers

11⁄16 - 15⁄16

3⁄8 - 5⁄8

1⁄4 - 5⁄16

Short

Long

Short

Long

Short

Long

Short

Long

451D874G01

451D874G02

451D874G01

451D874G02

451D874G01

451D874G02

451D874G01

451D874G02

11⁄16

37⁄16

13⁄8

33⁄4

111⁄16

41⁄16

43⁄8

32B9446H20

32B9446H24

32B9446H21

32B9446H25

32B9446H22

32B9446H26

32B9446H23

32B9446H27

Stud Ampere Rating Diameter, Inches

and Thread

Extension Back of

Breaker, Inches

Stud Style Number

LCL, LA Tri-Pac Breakers

400➃

3⁄4 -16

515⁄32

731⁄32

1015⁄32

05B7383G15

05B7383G16

05B7383G17

NB Tri-Pac Breakers

450

800

11⁄8 -12

11⁄4 -12

51⁄2

101⁄2

51⁄2

101⁄2

623B222G01

623B222G02

623B222G03

623B375G04

623B375G03

Panelboard Connecting

Staps➀

For connecting line end of breakers

to panelboard bus.

Ampere Rating Connector Type Style Number

Power Panelboards (Convertible)

Tri-Pac FB and FCL Breakers Bus Spacing 31⁄2-inch

100

150

Center

Outside

Center

Outside

Center

Outside

1253C72G01

1253C72G02

1253C73G03

1253C73G04

1253C73G01

1253C73G02

3-Pole Mounting Bracket

2-Pole Mounting Bracket

624B600H01

624B600H02

LCL Breakers Bus Spacing 31⁄2-inch

400

Short

Medium

Long

1275C85G01

1275C85G02

1275C85G03

Mtg. Bracket Kit (1 Req’d) 751B044G01

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 13782

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15329

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15073

Description Style Number

FB Tri-Pac and FCL Breakers➄

1 Mounting Block, Line or Load

2-Pole, 100 Ampere

2-Pole, 150 Ampere

3-Pole, 100 Ampere

3-Pole, 150 Ampere

507C036G05

507C036G06

507C036G03

507C036G04

LCL Breakers

2 Mounting Blocks, Line and Load

2-Pole

3-Pole

313C644G25

313C644G26

1 Mounting Block, Line and Load

2-Pole

3-Pole

450D010G15

450D010G16

NB Tri-Pac Breakers➀

1 Mounting Block, Line or Load

NB Tri-Pac, 2 Poles

NB Tri-Pac, 3 Poles

2614D53G03

2614D53G04

Tri-Pac LA Breakers➀

2 Mounting Blocks, Line and Load

2-Pole

3-Pole

313C644G41

313C644G42

1 Mounting Block, Line Only

2-Pole

3-Pole

450D010G17

450D010G19

1 Mounting Block, Load Only

2-Pole

3-Pole

450D010G18

450D010G20

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 125

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories for Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Mechanical Interlocks➁

For mechanically interlocking a pair

of breakers so that only one may be

closed at one time, but both may be

open simultaneously.

Walking Beam Type➁➂➃

Mounts on panel (not included) at

rear of breaker. Standard breaker

spacing: LA Tri-Pac, NB Tri-Pac: 8-1/2

inches center to center; FB Tri-Pac:

4-3/8 inches center to center; PB Tri-

Pac: 12-1/4 inches center to center.

Order as a set of two special factory

drilled breakers and one walking

beam interlock. Specify breaker

type, panel thickness and center-to-

center dimension of breakers.

Sliding Bar Type (Field Mountable)➁➄

Mounts on panel (not included) fit-

ting over front of breakers. Standard

breaker spacing: LA Tri-Pac, NB Tri-

Pac: 8-1/2 inches; FB Tri-Pac: 4-3/16

inches center to center.

Moisture-Fungus-Corrosion

Treatment➁

Treatment can be provided to meet

customer’s specific atmospheric

conditions. Moisture-fungus treat-

ing material used meets JAN-T-152;

treatment meets MIL-V-173a.

Requests and orders should specify

government specifications or condi-

tions to be met.

➂Not UL listed.

➃Not available on drawout breakers.

➄Not available for FCL or LCL breakers.

➅Not available on motor operated breakers.

Kirk Key Interlock➄

Availability: FB, LA, NB, PB Tri-Pacs.

Permits interlocking of two breakers

or one breaker with other devices.

Before breaker can be closed, key

must be inserted and turned in

breaker interlock. Breaker must be

opened before key can be removed.

It can then be inserted in interlock or

other devices to permit their closure.

Requests and orders should com-

pletely outline interlocking scheme,

ultimate user and his address.

Mounting Block for

NB Tri-Pac Breakers➀

Extended Line Terminal

Shields➀

For shielding line side terminal con-

nections. One shield required per

breaker. Order separately when

needed. Sold only in lots of 10,

including hardware.

Base Mounting Hardware

Order separately when needed.

Ampere Rating Number of Poles Style Number

NB Tri-Pac

800

4990D16G04

4990D16G03

Breaker Frame Style Number

FB Tri-Pac, FCL

LA Tri-Pac

NB Tri-Pac

625B229G01

314C420G05

208B996G02

Breaker Frame Style Number

FB Tri-Pac, FCL

LA Tri-Pac

NB Tri-Pac

PB Tri-Pac

21C6782G18

1614613

1091716

624375G22

Handle Locks➀

Non-Padlockable

For prevention of unintentional

operation of breaker. Fits over

breaker handle and may be

removed.

Padlockable

For prevention of unauthorized

operation of breaker. Is non-

removable once installed on

breaker. Meets Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. and California

Code requirements.

Note: All breakers are trip free and

will trip with handle locks attached.

Cannot be used when handle exten-

sion is used.

Handle Extension

Breaker Frame Style Number

Non-Padlockable

FB Tri-Pac

LA Tri-Pac

NB Tri-Pac

29B2721H01

1720101

Padlockable

FB Tri-Pac

LA Tri-Pac

765A754G01

373B591G02

Breaker Frame Style Number

LA Tri-Pac

NB Tri-Pac

PB Tri-Pac➁

372B399G01

1251C65G01

315C882G01

➀Not Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed.

Insulated base with front removeable bolted

connection.

➁Included with frame

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

126 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories for Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Motor Operators➀

Motor operators provide complete

remote control by means of a push-

button or similar pilot device➁.

Positive switching action is accom-

plished by use of an operating arm

engaging the breaker handle. The

unit is energized momentarily to

actuate the lever arm moving it to

either the “ON” or “OFF” position.

The control is broken by an internal

cutoff switch. Means for emergency

manual operation is provided.

Motor operators are available with

motors rated 120 volts Ac, 208 volts

Ac, and 240 volts Ac.

The 480 volt operators utilize a 120

volt Ac motor in conjunction with a

480/240 to 120 volt dual voltage

transformer. (On LA and larger oper-

ators, the transformer is supplied for

separate mounting by the customer.)

Note: The motor operator is

intended only for infrequent opera-

tion in line with Underwriters Labo-

ratories, Inc. endurance standard for

AB molded case breakers.

Motor Operator Selection

Type

Breaker

Ac Voltage Dc Voltage

120 208 240 480 125 24

Style Number

FCL

LCL

FB Tri-Pac

LA Tri-Pac

NB Tri-Pac

PB Tri-Pac

656D148G15

5664D54G83

656D148G11

2607D97G22

5664D54G65

5661D52G01

656D148G10

5664D54G86

656D148G04

2607D97G25

5664D54G68

5661D52G04

656D148G17

5664D54G84

656D148G13

2607D97G23

5664D54G66

5661D52G02

656D148G17

5664D54G85

656D148G13

2607D97G24

5664D54G67

5661D52G03

–

5664D54G77

–

2607D97G44

5664D54G82

5661D52G17

–

5664D54G88

–

Back Mounting Plates

Type

Breaker

120, 208, 240, 480 Volts Ac

Style Number

FB-P/FCL 1282C01G01

Motor Data

Type

Breaker

Motor Inrush Current,

Ampere (Peak)

Continuous

Current (RMS)

Operating Time,

Open or Close

Type Hp. 120

Volts

208

Volts

240

Volts

120

Volts

208

Volts

240

Volts

FB Tri-Pac

LA Tri-Pac

NB Tri-Pac

PB Tri-Pac

Split Phase

Reversing

1/75

–

2.3

–

1.17

–

1.65

–

1.5 Seconds

12 Cycles

10 Cycles

➀Ac voltage rated operators are UL listed as

recognized components.

➁The pilot device must be maintained contact

type for FB Tri-Pac, FCL, mechanisms;

momentary contact type for all others.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 13148 FCL; 15334 LCL; 13148 FB Tri-Pac; 15533 LA Tri-Pac; 15534 NB Tri-Pac; 14444 PB Tri-Pac

For FB Tri-Pac/FCL Breakers For LA Tri-Pac Breakers

For NB Tri-Pac Breakers For PB Tri-Pac Breakers

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 127

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Accessories for Current Limiting Circuit Breakers

Drawout Frame These drawout frames are for use

with standard 3-pole Cutler-Hammer

molded case circuit breakers. They

consist of two separate parts; sta-

tionary mounting frame and mov-

able carrier frame. Slide rails are

drawer-type, and a screw mecha-

nism is used to engage or withdraw

the movable carrier frame.

The drawout frames have three

positions: connected, test and

disconnected. The frames do not

include a safety tripping interlock,

or secondary contacts. These are

optional items and may be ordered

at additional cost.

Breakers mounted in the drawout

frames can be equipped with stan-

dard breaker accessories including

shunt trip, undervoltage release,

auxiliary switch, alarm switch and

motor operator.

Secondary Contacts

These are used to disconnect auxil-

iary circuits when attachments such

as shunt trip or motor operator are

used. Available in multiples of four

contacts with a maximum of 32 con-

tacts for the NB Tri-Pac. They must

be factory mounted. Order by

description as similar to stationary

or moving frame and specify num-

ber of contacts required.

Selection Data

Breaker Type➀Stationary Mounting Frame

Style Number

Movable Carrier Frame

Style Number

NB Tri-Pac 2603D85G09 2608D34G12

➀Drawout for FB and LA Tri-Pac, FCL, and LCL

Circuit Breakers are not available. PB Tri-Pac

movable is available factory-installed only.

Order by description.

Standard Installation

Order one stationary mounting

frame and one movable carrier

frame.

Order breakers without terminals

or rear connectors.

Order any attachments desired

(shunt trip, undervoltage release,

etc.)

Order secondary contacts as

required:

■A shunt trip, undervoltage release

or alarm switch requires two

contacts;

■A 1A-1B auxiliary switch requires

three contacts;

■A motor operator requires a

maximum of four contacts;

■Others as required.

Racking Crank

A special crank to engage or with-

draw the moving portion of the

drawout. A standard 1/2 inch hex

socket with extension can be used

for this purpose.

Cell Switches Mounted on

Drawout Frames, All Ratings

Up to four switches can be provided.

Order by description.

Each switch provides NO and NC

contact that transfers before reach-

ing the test position when being

withdrawn, and after the test posi-

tion when being racked in.

Style Number 765A767G01

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

128 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 129

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers

General Information

Engine generator molded case circuit

breakers are designed specifically for

application on diesel engine pow-

ered standby generators where high

interrupting circuit breakers are not

required. The JG through NG break-

ers are equipped with a special trip

unit, that includes standard thermal

(overload) protection and special low

magnetic pickup range (FG includes

a fixed thermal/magnetic pickup).

The standard thermal trip unit

provides overload protection for

conductors per the National Electric

Code. The low magnetic pickup

range is approximately two to five

times the continuous rating and

provides closer low level short circuit

protection when applied on genera-

tors that have very low short circuit

capacity. This combination allows

the user to customize the breaker to

the generator output.

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical

Amperes)

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)

240 18,000

480 14,000

600 10,000

IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity

Ratings

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical

Amperes)

Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)

220, 240 18,000/9,000

380, 415 14,000/7,000

660, 690 10,000/5,000

Standards

Engine generator molded case cir-

cuit breakers are designed to con-

form with the following standards:

■Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,

Standard UL 489, Molded Case

Circuit Breakers and Circuit

Breaker Enclosures File E7819

■Canadian Standards Association

Standard C22.2 No. 5, Service

Entrance and Branch Circuit

Breakers

■International Electrotechnical

Commission Recommendations

IEC 947-2, Circuit Breakers

Conformance with these standards

satisfies most local and international

codes, assuming user acceptability

and simplified application.

Catalog Numbering System

This information is presented only

as an aid to understanding catalog

numbers. It is not to be used to build

catalog numbers for circuit breakers.

FG breakers include both line and

load side terminals.

JG, KG, LG, and NG breakers with

“W” catalog number suffix do not

include any terminals.

JG, KG, LG, and NG breakers with-

out “W” catalog number suffix

include both line and load terminals.

Contact Cutler-Hammer for addi-

tional ratings and internal/external

accessories.

FG 3 100 W

Frame

Number

of Poles

Trip

Amperes

100

125

150

175

200

225

175

200

225

250

300

350

400

450

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1200

Suffix

W: Without Terminals

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

130 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breakers

➀Breaker continuous current is based on 115%

of the generator full load ampere rating.

➁Based on three-phase generators at 80%

power factor.

➂Without terminals.

Magnetic Pickup

Range

Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz Engine Generator

Breaker Catalog

Number

240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac

kVA➀kW➁kVA➀kW➁kVA➀kW➁

Fixed

FG3015

FG3020

FG3025

FG3030

Fixed

FG3035

FG3040

FG3045

FG3050

Fixed

FG3060

FG3070

FG3080

FG3090

Fixed

108

126

144

162

101

116

130

113

135

158

181

203

108

126

144

162

FG3100

FG3110

FG3125

FG3150

FG3175

FG3200

FG3225

350-700

126

144

101

116

158

181

126

144

JG3175W➂

JG3175

JG3200W➂

JG3200

350-700

162

181

130

144

203

226

162

181

JG3225W➂

JG3225

JG3250W➂

JG3250

500-1000

108

126

101

217

253

173

202

271

316

217

253

KG3300W➂

KG3300

KG3350W➂

KG3350

1000-2000

600-2500

144

162

116

130

289

325

231

260

361

406

289

325

KG3400W➂

KG3400

LG3450

LG3450W➂

600-2500

181

217

144

173

361

433

289

347

451

542

361

433

LG3500

LG3500W➂

LG3600

LG3600W➂

800-2500

253

289

202

231

505

578

404

462

632

722

505

578

NG3700

NG3700W➂

NG3800

NG3800W➂

1600-5000

325

361

260

289

650

722

520

578

812

903

650

722

NG3900

NG3900W➂

NG31000

NG31000W➂

1600-5000 433 347 867 693 1083 867 NG31200

NG31200W➂

The following table lists FG through

NG engine generator breakers with

the maximum generator kVA and kW

rating. Engine generator breakers

are applied at 115% of the generator

full load current rating. The maximum

kW rating is based on three-phase

generators at 80% power factor.

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 131

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers

Enclosures

Enclosure Description

Type 1 General Purpose

■Surface or Flush Mounting

■15-1200 Ampere Range

■600 Volts Ac, 500 Volts Dc

Type 1 enclosed breakers are

designed for use in commercial

buildings, apartment buildings and

other areas where a general purpose

enclosure is applicable. The breaker

is front operable and is capable of

being padlocked in either the On or

Off position. Ratings through 1200

amperes are listed with Underwrit-

ers Laboratories, Inc. as approved

for service entrance application.

Both surface and flush mounted

enclosures are available.

Type 3R Rainproof

Surface Mounting

■Interchangeable Hubs

(Through 400 Amperes)

■15-1200 Ampere Range

■600 Volts Ac, 500 Volts Dc

This general purpose outdoor ser-

vice center employs a circuit breaker

inside a weatherproof sheet steel

breaker enclosure to serve as a main

disconnect and protective device for

feeder circuits. Ratings through 1200

amperes are listed by Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for ser-

vice entrance application.

Type 12 Dustproof

Surface Mounting

■No Knockouts or Other Openings

■15-1200 Ampere Range

■600 Volts Ac, 500 Volts Dc

The Type 12 enclosure is designed

in line with specifications for special

industry application where unusu-

ally severe conditions involving oil,

coolant, dust and other foreign

materials exist in the operating

atmosphere. The handle padlocks in

the Off position and the cover is

interlocked with the handle mecha-

nism to prevent opening the cover

with the circuit breaker in the On

position. Ratings through 1200

amperes are listed by Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for ser-

vice entrance application.

OFF

Enclosure Selection Data

Breaker

Frame

(Amperes)

Enclosure

Type Class

Dimensions App.

Wt.

Lbs.

Conduit Sizes,

Inches

Catalog

Number

ABCDE

Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm

15-225

Type 1

Type 3R

Type 12

23.25

25.66

591

652

8.41

8.84

214

225

226

6.28

9.31

160

237

238

18.75

24.28

476

617

618

1.20

1.70

.25, .50, .75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50

SFDN225

RFDN225

JFDN225

175-250

Type 1

Type 3R

Type 12

34.70

37.50

37.53

881

891

953

10.92

11.56

227

294

7.20

10.22

183

260

30.00

35.77

762

909

1.88

1.94

.25, .50, 2, 2.50, 3

SJDN250

RJDN250

JJDN250

300-400

Type 1

Type 3R

Type 12

38.81

41.69

986

997

11.06

11.75

281

298

10.94

14.06

278

357

34.00

39.90

869

1014

1015

2.28

1.97

.25, .50, .75, 1.50, 2, 2.50, 3, 3.50

.25, .50, .75, 2.50, 3, 3.50

SKDN400

RKDN400

JKDN400

450-600

Type 1

Type 3R

Type 12

45.88

48.31

1165

1227

14.31

14.91

364

379

12.38

15.50

314

394

46.56

1183

1.91

1.92

.25, .50, .75, 3, 3.50, 4

SJDN600

RLDN600

JLDN600

700-1200

Type 1

Type 3R

Type 12

61.22

63.59

1555

1615

21.44

22.00

545

559

15.41

17.63

391

448

61.84

1571

1.97

178

175

170

SNDN1200

RNDN1200

JNDN1200

Type 3R Rainproof Type 12, 12K DustproofType 1 Surface Mounted

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

132 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Engine Generator Circuit Breakers

Accessories

Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable

Maximum

Enclosure Rating

(Amperes)

Main Lug Number

Size Cu/Al

Ground Lug

Size Cu/Al

Catalog

Number

100 (1) 14–1/0 (1) 14–1/0 INK100

250 (1) 6–350 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK250

400 (1) 4–750 kcmil or

(2) 1/0–250 kcmil

(1) 4–300 kcmil INK400

600 (2) 250–500 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK600

1200 (3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or

(4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil

(1) #6–250 kcmil INK1200

➀Package of 3 terminals.

Standard Terminals

Breaker

Frame

Maximum

Ampere

Rating

AWG Wire Range Metric Wire

Range mm2Catalog

Number

FG 100 #14-1/0 2.5 -50 3T100FB➀

FG 150 #4-4/0 25 -95 3TA225FD➀

JG 250 #4-350 kcmil 25 -185 TA250KB

KG 350 250-500 kcmil 120 -240 TA350K

KG 400 3/0-250 kcmil (2) 95 -120 3TA400K➀

LG 600 250-500 kcmil (2) 120 -240 TA600LA

NG 700 1-500 kcmil (2) 50 -300 TA700NB1

NG 1000 3/0-400 kcmil (3) 95 -185 TA1000NB1

NG 1200 4/0-500 kcmil (4) 120 -300 TA1200NB1

Internal Accessories

Breaker

Frame

Auxiliary Switch Shunt Trip

1A-1B Catalog

Number

2A-2B Catalog

Number

Rating Catalog

Number

FG A1X1PK A2X1PK 12-24 Vdc SNT1LP03K

JG A1X2PK A2X2PK 12-24 Vdc SNT2P04K

KG A1X3PK A2X3PK 12-24 Vdc SNT3P05K

LG A1X4PK A2X4PK 12-24 Vdc SNT4LP03K

NG A1X5RPK A2X5RPK 12-24 Vdc SNT5LP03K

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 133

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Circuit Breakers for DC Applications

Interrupting Capacity Ratings

UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings

Circuit

Breaker

Type

Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA)

Volts DC➀

125➁250➂600➃750➄

HFDDC

HJDDC

HKDDC

HLDDC

HMDLDC

NBDC

PBDC

➀Dc ratings apply to substantially non-

inductive circuits. 8 millisecond time

constant.

➁1-pole in series.

➂2-poles in series.

➃3-poles in series.

➄4-poles in series. Not a UL listed voltage

rating.

➅Use rated cable per NEC Connect to

terminals as per breaker nameplate.

General Information

UL listed dc molded case circuit

breakers for use in general dc cir-

cuits and ungrounded battery supply

circuits of UPS systems providing

continuous, reliable ac power to

computer controlled applications

such as financial transactions and

telecommunications.

For standard interrupting capacity

250 dc molded case circuit breakers.

Refer to Index, Page 1, for appropri-

ate Series C frame size.

The Series C dc breakers listed

below use the same internal and

external accessories as the standard

Series C breaker. NBDC and PBDC

use same internal and external

accessories as standard NB and PB

breakers.

Molded case circuit breakers for

transportation application requiring

750 Vdc are available 15 through

2500 ampere 20 kA interrupting

capacity at 750 Vdc. Breakers require

4 poles in series for 750 Vdc applica-

tion. However, 750V is not a UL rat-

ing. For 750 Vdc application refer to

Cutler-Hammer for ordering infor-

mation. Dimensions are the same

as the standard thermal-magnetic

equivalent.

LOAD

3-Poles in Series

LOAD

4-Poles in Series

Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application➅

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

134 March 1999

Type HKDDC DC Circuit Breakers

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker

Frame Only➀

Thermal Magnetic

Trip Unit

Standard

Terminals

Catalog Number

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac

250

300

350

400

HKDDC3400F KT3250T

KT3300T

KT3350T

KT3400T

TA350K

3TA400K

300

350

400

450

500

600

HLDDC3600F LT3300T

LT3350T

LT3400T

LT3450T

LT3500T

LT3600T

TA602LD

3TA603LDK

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Circuit Breakers for DC Applications

Type HMDL DC Circuit Breakers

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker

Frame Only➀

Thermal Magnetic

Trip Unit

Catalog Number

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac

300

350

400

450

500

600

700

800

HMDL3800F MT3300T

MT3350T

MT3400T

MT3450T

MT3500T

MT3600T

MT3700T

MT3800T

Type HFDDC DC Circuit Breakers

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

Complete Circuit Breaker with Line and Load Terminals

1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole

Catalog Number

1, 2, 3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac

100

110

125

150

175

200

225

HFDDC1015L

HFDDC1020L

HFDDC1025L

HFDDC1030L

HFDDC1035L

HFDDC1040L

HFDDC1045L

HFDDC1050L

HFDDC1060L

HFDDC1070L

HFDDC1080L

HFDDC1090L

HFDDC1100L

HFDDC1110L

HFDDC1125L

HFDDC1150L

–

HFDDC2015L

HFDDC2020L

HFDDC2025L

HFDDC2030L

HFDDC2035L

HFDDC2040L

HFDDC2045L

HFDDC2050L

HFDDC2060L

HFDDC2070L

HFDDC2080L

HFDDC2090L

HFDDC2100L

HFDDC2110L

HFDDC2125L

HFDDC2150L

–

HFDDC3015L

HFDDC3020L

HFDDC3025L

HFDDC3030L

HFDDC3035L

HFDDC3040L

HFDDC3045L

HFDDC3050L

HFDDC3060L

HFDDC3070L

HFDDC3080L

HFDDC3090L

HFDDC3100L

HFDDC3110L

HFDDC3125L

HFDDC3150L

HFDDC3175L

HFDDC3200L

HFDDC3225L

Type HJDDC DC Circuit Breakers

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere Rating

@ 40°C

Circuit Breaker

Frame Only➀

Thermal Magnetic

Trip Unit

Standard

Terminals

Catalog Number

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

HJDDC3250F JT3070T

JT3090T

JT3100T

JT3125T

JT3150T

JT3175T

JT3200T

JT3225T

JT3250T

TA250KB

100

125

150

175

200

225

HKDDC3400F KT3100T

KT3125T

KT3150T

KT3175T

KT3200T

KT3225T

TA300K

Type PBDC DC Circuit Breakers

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Complete Circuit

Breaker Factory

Assembled

Without

Terminals➀

Includes Magnetic

Only Trip Unit

Calibrated @ 135%

Standard➁

Terminals

Catalog Number

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 75 kAIC @ 600 Vac

1600

2000

2500

PBDC31600W

PBDC32000W

PBDC32500W

Included

BA2000PB

BA2500PB

➀Complete circuit breaker includes frame, trip

unit, and terminals.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C700

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C701

Type NBDC DC Circuit Breakers

Maximum

Continuous

Ampere

Rating

@ 40°C

Complete Circuit

Breaker Factory

Assembled

Without

Terminals➀

Includes Magnetic

Only Trip Unit

Calibrated @ 135%

Standard

Terminals

Catalog Number

3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac

700

800

900

1000

1200

NBDC3700MW

NBDC3800MW

NBDC3900MW

NBDC31000MW

NBDC31200MW

Included

TA1000NB1

TA1200NB1

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15560

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C702

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 135

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Add-on Ground Fault Protection

Type GFM

Type GFM Ground Fault Protection Device

Description

Cutler-Hammer Type GFM devices

are Class 1 Ground Fault Sensing

and Relaying devices designed to

comply with the requirements out-

lined in Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc. Standards for Safety entitled:

Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying

Equipment, UL1053.

Type GFM devices, when properly

installed on a grounded electrical

distribution system, will sense phase

to ground fault currents and cause a

disconnect to open and clear the

fault instantaneously at predeter-

mined current values. These devices

have a maximum voltage rating of

600V, 50/60 Hertz and may be

applied in accordance with Article

230-95 of the National Electrical

Code.

Type GFM Ground Fault Protective

Devices are self-contained combina-

tion sensing and relaying devices

designed primarily for application

on motor circuits and fixed loads

where low-level Ground Fault Equip-

ment Protection is required.

GFM devices are available in two

basic types with each type having

two physical sizes. The two basic

types differ in the type of output

circuit provided. The first type,

designated either GFM2 or GFM4,

employs an internal relay having

S.P.D.T. contacts that will operate a

remote shunt trip device where con-

trol power is available.

The second type, designated either

GFM2A or GFM4A. is completely

solid state with an output SCR circuit

designed to operate a remote, low-

energy, flux transfer shunt trip

mounted in a molded case breaker.

No supplementary control power for

the shunt trip is required.

Size Selection

The proper size selection is a func-

tion of the conductor size of the

equipment being protected. Types

GFM2/GFM2A have approximately a

two-inch window opening. Types

GFM4/GFM4A have approximately a

four-inch window opening.

Rating Selection

The basic Ground Fault Current

Pickup rating of either type GFM

device is 5 amperes, i.e., each unit

when properly installed will initiate a

trip signal to a remote shunt trip

with the presence of a 5 ampere

Ground Fault Current within estab-

lished tolerance limits. Separate

optional rating plugs are available to

alter the pickup rating to a maximum

of 100 amperes.

Control Power

Internal control power is not

required to operate Type GFM

Ground Fault Protective devices. All

internal control power required is

derived from the Ground Fault cur-

rent through the internal current

sensor.

External control power is required to

operate the remote shunt trips used

in conjunction with Type GFM2 and

GFM4 devices.

External control power is not

required with Type GFM2A and

GFM4A devices to operate the spe-

cial remote, low-energy, flux transfer

shunt trips used in molded case cir-

cuit breakers.

Trip Indication/Reset

A combination visual indicator and

reset button is provided on the top

of Type GFM2 and GFM4 devices to

indicate the initiation of a tripping

action to clear a Ground Fault. The

operation of the internal relay will

cause the white button to visibly

raise.

To reset the device, the Indicator/

Reset button must be depressed.

Failure to reset the device will not

allow the associated disconnect

device to be reclosed.

No Indicator/Reset button is pro-

vided on Types GFM2A or GFM4A

since an internal SCR is used in the

output circuit. These devices reset

automatically when the disconnect

opens to clear the Ground Fault.

Application

Type GFM devices may be installed

in Zero Sequence or Ground Return

Sensing methods, Proper Ground

Fault Protection schemes are depen-

dent upon proper system installation

and grounding methods.

Mounting

Each Type GFM device contains a

Ground Fault Sensor which is a spe-

cial current transformer. These are

insulated devices which can be

mounted directly to enclosure sur-

faces. Four tubular rivets secure the

sensor housing. These four (0.200

dia.) mounting holes can be used

to mount the GFM device in either

a vertical or horizontal mounting

position.

Optional mounting brackets as

shown on the next page are available.

These brackets may be mounted on

either the bottom or side depending

upon the installation requirements.

Regardless of the mounting method

used, the top of the device with the

visual indicator/ reset button and

nameplate instructions should be

maintained in a visual position after

installation. GFM devices should be

installed so that all conductors pass-

ing through the conductor window

are physically centered.

Type GFM

Interchangeable

Rating Plug

Reset Indicator Button

Rating

Plug

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

136 March 1999

Ordering Information

Order by catalog number or style

number:

1 Basic GFM Unit

1 Rating plug if required

1 Mounting bracket if required

1 Circuit breaker with standard

shunt trip factory installed

(as required), or optionally when

possible, a circuit breaker and field

mountable shunt trip as separate

items.

Rating Plug Installation

To install an optional rating plug to

obtain other than the minimum

5 ampere rating, remove the termi-

nal cover held in position by a single

screw and retention groove. With

the cover removed, insert the rating

plug in the position indicated. The

rating plug is held captive in position

with the addition of the terminal

cover after the wiring is completed.

With the terminal cover in position,

the ampere rating of the rating plug

remains visible.

Output Circuitry

Contact ratings for Type GFM2 and

GFM4 are 10 amperes continuous,

240 volts Ac maximum. Types

GFM2A and GFM4A are intended to

be used only with remote flux trans-

fer shunt trips.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Add-on Ground Fault Protection

Type GFM

GFM Optional Rating Plugs

Ampere Rating Catalog Number

100

GFMP10

GFMP25

GFMP50

GFMP75

GFMP100

Optional Mounting Brackets

Includes two (2) brackets and mount-

ing hardware

Selection Data

GFM Basic Units

Output Type Approximate Window

Opening, Inches

Basic Ampere Rating

(Plug Omitted)

Operating Time

@ 10 x Ampere Rating

Catalog Number

Unit for Use with Standard Shunt Trip

Relay

0.03 Seconds

GFM2

GFM4

Unit for Use with Flux Transfer Shunt Trips

SCR

0.03 Seconds

GFM2A

GFM4A

GFM

Type

Bracket Kit

Style Number

GFM2/2A

GFM4/4A

750B295G01

750B295G02

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 14945

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 137

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Add-on Ground Fault Protection

Type GFR

Description

The GFR ground fault relays, current

sensors, test panels and accessory

devices are UL listed by Underwrit-

ers Laboratories, Inc. in accordance

with their standard for Ground Fault

Sensing and Relaying Equipment,

UL 1053, under File E48381.➀

A Type GFR ground fault protection

system, when properly installed on a

grounded electrical system, will

sense phase-to-ground fault cur-

rents. When the level of fault current

is in excess of the pre-selected cur-

rent pickup and time delay settings,

the GFR relay will initiate a trip

action of a disconnect device, which

will open the faulted circuit and clear

the fault.

The GFR devices are UL Class I

devices designed to protect electri-

cal equipment against extensive

damage from arcing ground faults.

A basic Type GFR ground fault pro-

tection system consists of a ground

fault relay➁, a ground fault current

sensor and a disconnect device

equipped with a shunt trip device.

This disconnect device can be a

molded case circuit breaker, a power

circuit breaker, a bolted pressure

switch or other fusible disconnect

device, suitable for application with

UL Class I Ground Fault Sensing and

Relaying equipment.

Additional optional equipment can

be added to the protection system to

meet the requirements of the speci-

fying engineer, including:

■Ground Fault Test Panel

■Ground Fault Warning Indicator

Relay

■Ground Fault Indicating Ammeter

GFR relays are available with zone

selective interlocking circuitry to

interlock several relays within the

same system. This allows the relay

which detects a ground fault to

instantly clear the fault by tripping

the disconnect device. The relay

simultaneously sends a signal to

relay units “upstream” from the

fault to time delay or to block their

operation completely. Current sen-

sors in various designs provide a

range of “window” sizes to accom-

modate standard bus and cable

arrangements.

Shunt trip attachments may be

ordered for field mounting in Cutler-

Hammer molded case circuit break-

ers, or may be ordered factory

installed in the breaker.

Electrical Ratings

GFR Relay

Ground Fault Detection Ranges:

1 to 12, 5 to 60 or 100 to 1200

Amperes

Output contacts:

240 Volt, 50/60 Hz: 3.0 Amperes

120 Volt, 50/60 Hz: 6.0 Amperes

28 Volt Dc: 3.0 Amperes

125 Volt Dc: .5 Amperes

Control power requirements:

120 Volt, 50/60 Hz: .125 Amperes, or

125 Volt Dc (optional)

Typical Current Sensor

GFR Relay

➀Suitable for either surface or semi-flush

mounting.

➁These devices are also listed with CSA under

their file number 43357.

Sensor:

600 Volts, 50/60 Hz maximum

system voltage

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

138 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Add-on Ground Fault Protection

Type GFR

Ordering Information

Each installation requires:

1. One relay unit (select trip ampere

as required)

2. One current sensor (select config-

uration required)

GFR Relay

Types

Catalog Numbers➀

Ground Fault Pickup Amperes

1-12 5-60 100-200

For 120 Volt 50/60 Hz Control

Electrical Reset with Zone Interlocking GRF12EI GFR60EI GFR1200EI

Electrical Reset without Zone Interlocking GRF12E GFR60E GFR1200E

Mechanical Reset with Zone Interlocking GRF12MI GFR60MI GFR1200MI

Mechanical Reset without Zone Interlocking GRF12MI GFR60MI GFR1200MI

For 120 Volt Dc Control

Electrical Reset with Zone Interlocking GRF12EID GFR60EID GFR1200EID

Electrical Reset without Zone Interlocking GRF12ED GFR60ED GFR1200ED

Mechanical Reset with Zone Interlocking GRF12MID GFR60MID GFR1200MID

Mechanical Reset without Zone Interlocking GRF12MID GFR60MID GFR1200MID

Current Sensor

Window Size Style Number

Used with Relays Rated 1-12 Amperes

5.50 In. I.D. 1283C45G01

Used with Relays Rated 5-60 Amperes

2.50 In. I.D.

5.50 In. I.D.

8.25 In. I.D.

7.81 x 11.00 In. Rect.➁

3.31 x 24.94 In. Rect.➁

179C768G01

1256C13G01

179C767G01

1257C88G04

1257C92G03

Used with Relays Rated 100-1200 Amperes

2.50 In. I.D.

5.50 In. I.D.

8.25 In. I.D.

7.81 x 11.00 In. Rect.➁

9.94 x 16.94 In. Rect.➁

9.94 x 23.94 In. Rect.➁

15.94 x 19.94 In. Rect.➁

3.31 x 24.94 In. Rect.➁

6.75 x 29.64 In. Rect.➁

179C768G02

1256C13G02

179C767G02

1257C88G03

1257C90G02

1257C91G02

1257C89G02

1257C92G04

1255C39G03

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15321

➀Suitable for either surface or semi-flush

mounting.

➁One end removable for installation.

➂When a mechanically reset relay is used with

a test panel, both the relay and test panel

must be reset following either a simulated

ground fault test or actual ground fault.

➃Not UL listed.

3. One circuit breaker or disconnect

device with shunt trip, or a shunt

trip attachment for mounting in

existing breaker.

4. Test panel. (Optional)

Accessories

Test Panel (120 Volts Ac)➂

Used to test the ground fault system,

to give an indication the relay has

tripped the breaker, and to reset the

relay after tripping➃. These functions

may be separately mounted pilot

devices.

Ground Fault Warning Indicator

This is an accessory item for use with

GFR Relays with interlocking cir-

cuitry. At approximately 30-50% of

the Relay pickup setting, the indica-

tor switches separate 120 volt Ac

control power to a lamp or relay, (not

included) to give an indication of a

ground fault. The indicator is rated

110/120 volts Ac 50/60 Hz

for a maximum indicator load of

.5 amperes.

Indicating Ammeter➃

The optional indicating ammeter. It

connects to the sensor terminals,

through a momentary contact

pushbutton, and will indicate (in

amperes) any ground fault current

flowing through the sensor. Kit

includes the ammeter and pushbutton.

Shunt Trip Attachments

Use 120 volt Ac shunt trips.

Face Plate

Recommended when these relays

are semi-flush mounted, to close the

door cutout opening.

Optional Test Panel

Control Test Catalog Number

120V 50/60 Hz 120V 50/60 Hz GFRTP

125V Dc 120V 50/60 Hz GFRTPD

Ground Fault Warning

Indicator

Style Number

Manual Reset 1234C67G01

Self-Resetting 1234C67G02

GFR System

Used with

Kit Style

Number

1-12 Ampere

5-60 Ampere

100-1200 Ampere

752B820G01

752B820G02

752B820G03

Description Style Number

Face Plate 752B410G01

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 139

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Alarm Switch

Make

Break

Alarm Switch (RH only)➀

Electrical Rating Contact

Arrangement

Style

Number➁➂➃

Factory

Suffix

Volts Frequency Amperes

Alarm Switch

240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/ 1 Break 1288C75G03 B3

Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination

240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/ 1 Break

and 1a/1b

1288C76G09 B13

General Information

For remote indication of automatic

trip operation. Does not function

with manual switching; however, it

will operate when either a shunt trip

or undervoltage release is operated.

➀F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed.

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., requires

that internal accessories be installed at

the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed

for factory installation under E7819. Where

local codes and standards permit and UL

listing is not required, internal accessories

can be field installed. Accessory installation

should be done before the circuit breaker is

mounted and connected.

➁Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads,18

AWG (16-.010).

➂A maximum of two internal accessories may

be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15552

Alarm Switch

F-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➄➅

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➆

0.25➆

2500

2200

Single-Pole Circuit Breakers

125/250

50/60 Hz

6➆

3➆

5➇

2000

Alarm Switch➀

Number of

Contacts

(Make and

Break)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➈

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➉ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left

Right

B01

B05

B02

B06

B03

B07

B04

B08

A1L1LPK

A1L1RPK

A1L1LTK

A1L1RTK

2 Left

Right

B09

B12

B10

B13

–

B11

B14

A2L1LPK

A2L1RPK

A2L1LTK

A2L1RTK

1 (Make

Only)

Single

Pole

B15–––––

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C180

A “make” contact closes and a

“break” contact opens when the

alarm/lockout switch operates. The

switch automatically resets when

the circuit breaker is reset.

Ordering Information

G-Frame

➃Suitable for mounting in right pole only of

2- or 3-pole breaker.

➄Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus

4000 mechanical operations.

➅Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus

2000 mechanical operations.

➆Non-inductive load.

➇Inductive (L/R = 0.026).

➈Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc., for field installation.

➉Standard pigtail lead exit location.

Standard mounting location.

Factory installation only. Leads exit load end

of circuit breaker.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

140 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Alarm Switch

➀Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus

2000 mechanical operations.

➁Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

➂Non-inductive load.

➃Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,

for field installation on interchangeable trip

unit breakers under E64983.

➄Standard mounting location.

➅Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

➆Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers.

➇Endurance – 5,000 electrical operations plus

1000 mechanical operations.

J-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➀➁

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

Alarm Switch

Number of

Contacts

(Make and

Break)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➄ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left➅

Right

B01

B05

B02

B06

B03

B07

B04

B08

A1L2LPK

A1L2RPK

A1L2LTK

A1L2RTK➆

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C181

Electrical Rating Data➁➇

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

K-Frame

Alarm Switch

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

(1M and 1B)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➄ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left➅

Right

B01

B05

B02

B06

B03

B07

B04

B08

A1L3LPK

A1L3RPK

A1L3LTK

A1L3RTK

2 Left➅

Right

B09

B12

B10

B13

–

B11

B14

A2L3LPK

A2L3RPK

A2L3LTK

A2L3RTK

L- and M-Frames

Alarm Switch

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

(1M and 1B)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➄ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left➅

Right

B01

B05

B02

B06

B03

B07

B04

B08

A1L4LPK

A1L4RPK

A1L4LTK

A1L4RTK

2 Left➅

Right

B09

B12

B10

B13

–

B11

B14

A2L4LPK

A2L4RPK

A2L4LTK

A2L4RTK

Electrical Rating Data➁➇

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C183

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C182

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 141

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Alarm Switch

N-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➀

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➁

0.25➁

2500

Alarm Switch

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

(Make and

Break)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➂

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➃ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left

Right➃

B01

B05

B02

B06

B03

B07

B04

B08

A1L5LPK

A1L5RPK

A1L5LTK

A1L5RTK

2 Left

Right➃

B09

B12

B10

B13

–

B11

B14

A2L5LPK

A2L5RPK

A2L5LTK

A2L5RTK

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C184

R-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➄➅

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current Amperes

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➁

0.25➁

Alarm Switch (RH only)

Number of

Contacts

(Make and Break)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➂

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads

Suffix Number➆ Catalog Number➆

1 B05 A1L6RPK

2 B12 A2L6RPK

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C185

➀Endurance – 3000 electrical operations plus

1000 mechanical operations.

➁Non-inductive load.

➂Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

➃Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

➄Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus

2500 mechanical operations.

➅Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

Leads are red, black and blue.

➆A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules

may be installed in a circuit breaker.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

142 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Auxiliary Switch

Auxiliary Switch General Information

The auxiliary switch provides circuit

breaker contact status information

by monitoring the position of the

molded cross bar which contains the

moving contact arms. The auxiliary

switch is used for remote indication

and interlock system verification,

and consists of one or two SPDT

switches housed in a plug-in mod-

ule. Each SPDT switch has one “a”

and one “b” contact. When the cir-

cuit breaker contacts are open, the

“a” contact is open and the “b”

contact is closed.

Ordering Information

G-Frame Auxiliary (RH only)

Electrical Ratings Contact

Arrangement

Style

Number➀➁➂

Factory

Suffix

Volts Frequency Amperes

240

50/60 Hz

1a/1b

2a/2b

1288C74G03

1288C73G03

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15551

F-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➃➄

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

125➅

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➆

0.25➆

2500

2200

Auxiliary Switch

Number of

Contacts

a and b

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➇

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➈ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left➄

Right or

Neutral

A01

A15➉

A05

A18➉

A02

A16➉

A06

A19➉

A03

A17➉

A07

A20➉

A04

–

A08

–

A1X1PK

E1X1PK

A1X1PK

–

A1X1LTK

–

A1X1RTK

–

2 Left➄

Right or

Neutral

A09

A21➉

A12

A23➉

A10

A22➉

A13

A24➉

–

A11

–

A14

–

A2X1LPK

E2X1LPK

A2X1RPK

E2X1RPK

A2X1LTK

–

A2X1RTK

–

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C120

J-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➃➄

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➆

0.25➆

2500

Auxiliary Switch

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

(1a and 1b)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left

Right

A01

A05

A02

A06

A03

A07

A04

A08

A1X2PK

A1X2LTK

A1X2RTK

2 Left

Right

A09

A12

A10

A13

–

A11

A14

A2X2PK

A2X2LTK

A2X2RTK

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C121

➀Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads,

#18 AWG (16-.010).

➁A maximum of two internal accessories may

be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.

➂Suitable for mounting in right pole only of

2- or 3-pole breaker.

➃Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus

4000 mechanical operations.

➄Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

➅For use in electronic circuit of 100 micro-

amperes and 15 Vdc minimum.

➆Non-inductive load.

➇Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc., for field installation.

➈Standard pigtail lead exit location.

➉125-volt (Max.), 50/60 Hz switch for use in

electronic circuit of 100 micro-amp and 15

Vdc minimum.

Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation or interchangeable trip

unit breakers under E64983.

Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers.

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 143

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Auxiliary Switch

Electrical Rating Data➀➁

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

K-Frame

Auxiliary Switch

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

(1M and 1B)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➄ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left

Right➄

A01

A05

A02

A06

A03

A07

A04

A08

A1X3PK

A1X3LTK

A1X3RTK➅

2 Left

Right➄

A09

A12

A10

A13

–

A11

A14

A2X3PK

A2X3LTK

A2X3RTK➅

3 Left

Right

A18

A17

–

A15

A16

A3X3LPK

A3X3RPK

A3X3LTK

A3X3RTK➅

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C122

L- and M-Frames

Electrical Rating Data➁

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

Auxiliary Switch

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

(1a and 1b)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➄ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left

Right➄

A01

A05

A02

A06

A03

A07

A04

A08

A1X4PK

A1X4LTK

A1X4RTK➅

2 Left

Right➄

A09

A12

A10

A13

–

A11

A14

A2X4PK

A2X4LTK

A2X4RTK➅

3 Left

Right➄

A18

A17

–

A15

A16

A3X4PK

A3X4LTK

A3X4RTK➅

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C123

➀Endurance – 5000 electrical operations plus

1000 mechanical operations.

➁Pigtail wire size – No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

➂Non-inductive load.

➃Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

➄Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

➅Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

144 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Auxiliary Switch

➀Endurance – 3000 electrical operations plus

1000 mechanical operations.

➁Pigtail wire size – No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

➂Non-inductive load.

➃Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

➄Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

➅Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker.

➆Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus

2500 mechanical operations.

➇Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

Leads are red, black and blue.

➈A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any

combination of 2a/2b or 4a/4b plug-in mod-

ules may be installed in a circuit breaker.

N-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➀➁

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

Auxiliary Switch

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

(1A and 1B)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➄ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left

Right➄

A01

A05

A02

A06

A03

A07

A04

A08

A1X5LPK

A1X5RPK

A1X5LTK

A1X5RTK➅

2 Left

Right➄

A09

A12

A10

A13

–

A11

A14

A2X5LPK

A2X5RPK

A2X5LTK

A2X5RTK➅

3 Left

Right➄

A18

A17

–

A15

A16

A3X5LPK

A3X5RPK

A3X5LTK

A3X5RTK➅

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C124

R-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➆➇

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current Amperes

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

Auxiliary Switch (RH only)

Number of

Contacts

(Make and Break)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads

Suffix Number➈ Catalog Number➈

2 A12 A2X6RPK

4 A19 A4X6RPK

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C125

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 145

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same Side Rear⑤ Same Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

Left➄

Right

C01

C04

C02

C05

C03

C06

AAL1LPK

AAL1RPK

AAL1LTK

AAL1RTK➅

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C180

Ordering Information

F-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➀➁

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

125

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

2200

General Information

Each catalog number listed in the

following table includes one auxil-

iary switch and one alarm switch.

In an auxiliary switch ASL switch

combination, the auxiliary switch is

always mounted on the side of the

plug-in module next to the center

pole of the circuit breaker.

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

(1a and 1b

and

1M and 1B)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➇

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➈ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left

Right➈

C01

C04

C02

C05

–

C03

C06

AAL2LPK

AAL2RPK

AAL2LTK

AAL2RTK➅

J-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➆➁

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C181

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

(1a and 1b

and

1M and 1B)

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➇

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➈ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1 Left

Right➈

C01

C04

C02

C05

–

C03

C06

AAL3LPK

AAL3RPK

AAL3LTK

AAL3RTK

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C182

Electrical Rating Data➁

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

K-Frame

➀Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus

4000 mechanical operations.

➁Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

➂Non-inductive load.

➃Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc., for field installation.

➄Standard mounting location.

➅Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers.

➆Endurance – 6000 electrical operations plus

2000 mechanical operations.

➇Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation or interchangeable trip

unit breakers under E64983.

➈Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

Endurance – 5000 electrical operations plus

1000 mechanical operations.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

146 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➄ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1A, 1B and

1 Make/

1 Break

Left

Right➄

C01

C04

C02

C05

–

C03

C06

AA114LPK

AA114RPK

AA114LTK

AA114RTK➅

2A, 2B and

1 Make/

1 Break

Left

Right➄

C07

C10

C08

C11

–

C12

C13

AA214LPK

AA214RPK

AA214LTK

AA214RTK➅

3A, 3B and

1 Make/

1 Break

Left

Right➄

C14

C15

–

AA314LPK

AA314RPK

–

L- and M-Frames

Electrical Rating Data➀➁

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C183

➀Endurance – 5000 electrical operations plus

1000 mechanical operations.

➁Pigtail wire size – No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

➂Non-inductive load.

➃Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

➄Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

➅Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker.

➆Endurance – 3000 electrical operations plus

1000 mechanical operations.

N-Frame

Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination

Number of

Sets of

Contacts

Mounting

Location

(Pole)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➄ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

1A, 1B and

1 Make/

1 Break

Left

Right➄

C01

C04

C02

C05

–

C03

C06

AA115LPK

AA115RPK

AA115LTK

AA115RTK➅

2A, 2B and

1 Make/

1 Break

Left

Right➄

C07

C10

C08

C11

–

C12

C13

AA215LPK

AA215RPK

AA215LTK

AA215RTK➅

Electrical Rating Data➆➁

Maximum

Voltage

Frequency Maximum

Current

Amperes

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage

600

125

250

50/60 Hz

0.50➂

0.25➂

2500

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C184

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 147

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Shunt Trip

Shunt Trip (LH 3-Pole only)

Electrical Ratings Catalog Number Suffix Number

Volts Frequency Amperes

120

240

50/60 Hz

60 Hz

1.1

2.1

2.8

5.7

–

1373D62G01

1373D62G02

1373D62G15

1373D62G16

1373D62G20

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15550

Note: G-Frame circuit breakers are

factory sealed. Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc., requires that internal

accessories be installed at the factory.

Internal accessories are UL listed for

factory installation under E7819.

General Information

The shunt trip provides remote con-

trolled tripping of the circuit breaker.

The shunt trip consists of an inter-

mittent rated solenoid with a trip-

ping plunger and a cutoff switch

assembled to a plug-in module.

When required for ground fault pro-

tection applications, certain Ac rated

shunt trips, as noted in the Electrical

Rating Table, are suitable for opera-

tion at 55 percent of rated voltage.

Where local codes and standards

permit and UL listing is not required,

internal accessories can be field

installed. Accessory installation

should be done before the circuit

breaker is mounted and connected.

G-Frame

Ordering Information

Select shunt trip catalog number

for the voltage within the indicated

voltage range. Shunt trip coils are

designed to be applied at specific

Ac or Dc voltages within the voltage

range shown. Electrical ratings are

also shown on applicable circuit

breaker accessory nameplates.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

148 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Shunt Trip

Voltage Rating

(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➃

18-Inch Pigtail Leads➄ Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➅ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

Left-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings

12-24 Vac or Vdc

48-127 Vac or 48-60 Vdc➆

208-380 Vac or 110-127 Vdc

415-600 Vac or 220-250 Vdc

S01

S05

S09

S13

S02

S06

S10

S14

S03

S07

S11

S15

S04

S08

S12

S16

SNT1LP03K

SNT1LP08K

SNT1LP12K

SNT1LP18K

SNT1LT03K

SNT1LT08K

SNT1LT12K

SNT1LT18K

Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings➇

12-24 Vac or Vdc

48-127 Vac or 48-60 Vdc➆

208-380 Vac or 110-127 Vdc

415-600 Vac or 220-250 Vdc

S17

S21

S25

S29

S18

S22

S26

S30

S19

S23

S27

S31

S20

S24

S28

S32

SNT1RP03K

SNT1RP08K

SNT1RP12K

SNT1RP18K

SNT1RT03K➈

SNT1RT08K➈

SNT1RT12K➈

SNT1RT18K➈

F-Frame

➀Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.

➁Average circuit breaker contact total open-

ing time: 18 milliseconds.

➂Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus

4000 mechanical operations.

➃Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc., for field installation.

➄Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

➅Standard pigtail lead exit location.

Electrical Rating Data➀➁➂

50/60 Hz Dc

Supply

Voltage

Minimum

Operating

Voltage

VA Supply

Voltage

Minimum

Operating

Voltage

6.75 75

300

9 100

400

110

120

127

36 92

140

480

570

640

36 100

160

208

220

240

380

156 180

200

240

610

110

120

125

127

77 55

415

440

480

525

550

600

300 130

330

380

450

530

590

–

220

250

–

110

140

–

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C140

Note: F-Frame circuit breakers are

factory sealed. Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc., requires that internal

accessories be installed at the factory.

Internal accessories are UL listed for

factory installation under E7819.

Where local codes and standards

permit and UL listing is not required,

internal accessories can be field

installed. Accessory installation

should be done before the circuit

breaker is mounted and connected.

Shunt Trip

Voltage Rating

(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

Left-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings

12-24 Vac or Vdc

48-60 Vac or Vdc

110-240 Vac or 110-125 Vdc

380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc

480-600 Vac

S41

S49

S09

S33

S17

S42

S50

S10

S34

S18

S43

S51

S11

S35

S19

S44

S52

S12

S36

S20

SNT2P04K

SNT2P06K

SN2LP11K

SNT2P14K

SNT2P18K

SNT2T04K

SNT2T06K

SNT2T11K

SNT2T14K

SNT2T18K

Right-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings

12-24 Vac or Vdc

48-60 Vac or Vdc

110-240 Vac or 110-125 Vdc

380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc

480-600 Vac

S45

S53

S29

S33

S37

S46

S54

S30

S34

S38

S47

S55

S31

S35

S39

S48

S56

S32

S36

S40

SNT2P04K

SNT2P06K

SNT2P11K

SNT2P14K

SNT2P18K

SNT2T04K➈

SNT2T06K➈

SNT2T11K➈

SNT2T14K➈

SNT2T18K➈

J-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➀➁➉

50/60 Hz Dc

Supply

Voltage

Minimum

Operating

Voltage

VA Supply

Voltage

Minimum

Operating

Voltage

9 31

173

8.4 50

247

36 686

1014

33.6 1094

1698

110

120

127

208

220

240

60.5 66

102

354

396

432

110

120

125

–

112

138

150

–

380

400

415

440

285 180

200

240

610

110

120

125

127

154 40

–

480

525

550

600

360 34

–

–Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C142

➆120 Vac marked suitable for ground fault

protection devices.

➇Standard mounting location.

➈Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers.

➉Endurance – 6000 electrical operations plus

2000 mechanical operations.

Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1

GFP devices. Marking label included with

accessory kits.

Listed with Underwiters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault

sensing element.

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 149

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Shunt Trip

Voltage Rating

(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➄

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➅ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

Left-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings➅

12-24 Vac or Vdc

48-60 Vac or Vdc

110-240 Vac or 110-125 Vdc➆

380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc

480-600 Vac

S41

S49

S09

S13

S17

S42

S50

S10

S14

S18

S43

S51

S11

S15

S19

S44

S52

S12

S16

S20

SNT3P04K

SNT3P06K

SN3LP11K

SNT3P14K

SNT3P18K

SNT3T04K

SNT3T06K

SNT3T11K

SNT3T14K

SNT3T18K

Right-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings➇

12-24 Vac or Vdc

110-240 Vac or 110-125 Vdc➆

380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc

480-600 Vac

S45

S29

S33

S37

S46

S30

S34

S38

S47

S31

S35

S39

S48

S32

S36

S40

SNT3P04K

SNT3P11K

SNT3P14K

SNT3P18K

SNT3T04K➈

SNT3T11K➈

SNT3T14K➈

SNT3T18K➈

K-Frame

➀Approximate unlatching time – 6 milliseconds.

➁Approximate total circuit breaker contact

opening time – 18 milliseconds.

➂Endurance – 5,000 electrical operations plus

1,000 mechanical operations.

➃Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1

GFP devices. Marking label included with

accessory kits.

➄Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,

for field installation under E64983.

Electrical Rating Data➀➁➂

50/60 Hz Dc

Supply

Voltage

Minimum

Operating

Voltage

VA Supply

Voltage

Minimum

Operating

Voltage

9 45

200

830

1280

8.4 35

170

710

1105

110➃

120➃

127➃

208➃

220➃

240➃

60 100

120

140

420

470

550

110

120

125

–

110

130

140

–

380

400

415

440

285 95

108

120

136

220

250

–

154 41

–

480

525

550

600

360 40

–

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C144

L- and M-Frames

Shunt Trip

Voltage Rating

(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➄

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➅ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

Left-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings➅

12-24 Vac or Vdc

48-60 Vac

48-60 Vdc

110-240 Vac

110-125 Vdc

380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc

480-600 Vac

S01

S05

S85

S09

S41

S13

S17

S02

S06

S86

S10

S42

S14

S18

S03

S07

S87

S11

S43

S15

S19

S04

S08

–

S12

S44

S16

S20

SNT4LP03K

SNT4LP05K

SNT4LP23K

SNT4LP11K

SNT4LP26K

SNT4LP14K

SNT4LP18K

SNT4LT03K

SNT4LT05K

SNT4LT23K

SNT4LT11K

SNT4LT26K

SNT4LT14K

SNT4LT18K

Right-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings➉

12-24 Vac or Vdc

48-60 Vac

48-60 Vdc

110-240 Vac

110-125 Vdc

380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc

480-600 Vac

S21

S25

S88

S29

S45

S33

S37

S22

S26

S89

S30

S46

S34

S38

S23

S27

S90

S31

S47

S35

S39

S24

S28

–

S32

S48

S36

S40

SNT4RP03K

SNT4RP05K

SNT4RP23K

SNT4RP11K

SNT4RP26K

SNT4RP14K

SNT4RP18K

SNT4RT03K

SNT4RT05K

SNT4RT23K

SNT4RT11K

SNT4RT26K

SNT4RT14K

SNT4RT18K

Electrical Rating Data➀➁➂

50/60 Hz Dc

Supply

Voltage

Minimum

Operating

Voltage

VA Supply

Voltage

Minimum

Operating

Voltage

945

200

935

170

34 830

1280

34 710

1105

110➃

120➃

127➃

208➃

220➃

240➃

60 100

120

140

420

470

550

110

120

125

–

110

130

140

–

380

400

415

440

266 95

108

120

136

220

250

–

154

–

480

525

550

600

336 40

–

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C146

➅Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

➆Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault

sensing element.

➇For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units

only.

➈Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker.

➉For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) 3-pole

trip units only.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

150 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Shunt Trip

Ordering Information

Shunt Trip

Voltage Rating

(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➄

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block

Pigtail

Leads

Terminal

Block

Same

Side

Rear➅ Opposite

Side

Same

Side

Suffix Number Catalog Number

Left-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings➅

24 Vac or Vdc

48-60 Vac

110-240 Vac➃

110-125 Vdc

380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc

480-600 Vac

48-60 Vdc

S01

S05

S09

S41

S13

S17

S21

S02

S06

S10

S42

S14

S18

S22

S03

S07

S11

S43

S15

S19

S23

S04

S08

S12

S44

S16

S20

S24

SNT5LP03K

SNT5LP05K

SNT5LP11K

SNT5LP26K

SNT5LP14K

SNT5LP18K

SNT5LP23K

SNT5LT03K

SNT5LT05K

SNT5LT11K

SNT5LT26K

SNT5LT14K

SNT5LT18K

SNT5LT23K

N-Frame

➀Approximate unlatching time – 6 milliseconds.

➁Approximate total circuit breaker contact

opening time – 18 milliseconds.

➂Endurance – 3000 electrical operations plus

1000 mechanical operations.

➃Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1

GFP devices. Marking label included with

accessory kits.

➄Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

➅Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

Electrical Rating Data➀➁➂

50/60 Hz Dc

Supply

Voltage

Minimum

Operating

Voltage

VA Supply

Voltage

Minimum

Operating

Voltage

24 16.8 200 24 16.8 170

33.6 830

1280

33.6 710

1150

110➃

120➃

127➃

208➃

220➃

240➃

60 100

120

140

420

470

550

110

120

125

–

110

130

140

–

380

400

415

440

266 95

108

120

136

220

250

–

154

–

480

525

550

600

336 40

–

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C148

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 151

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Shunt Trip

R-Frame

Shunt Trip (RH only)

Voltage Rating

(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➇

18-Inch Pigtail Leads➈Pigtail Leads

Suffix Number➈Catalog Number➈

24 Vac or Vdc

48-60 Vac

110-240 Vac

380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc

480-600 Vac

48-60 Vdc

110-125 Vdc

S21

S25

S29

S33

S37

S88

S45

SNT6P03K

SNT6P05K

SNT6P11K

SNT6P14K

SNT6P18K

SNT6P23K

SNT6P26K

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C150

➀Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds.

➁Average circuit breaker contact total opening

time approximately 62 milliseconds, at rated

voltage.

➂Endurance – 500 electrical operations and

2500 mechanical operations.

➃Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum

of six times per minute.

➄Maximum operating voltage – 110% of

maximum voltage range rating.

➅Pigtail wire size – No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

Leads are yellow and white.

➆Suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices;

marking label supplied with accessory kit.

➇Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

➈A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in mod-

ules may be installed in a circuit breaker.

Electrical Rating Data

Suffix

Number

Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings➀➁➂➃➄➅

Voltage (V) Frequency (Hz) Supply

Voltage (V)

Minimum

Operating

Voltage (V)

Ip (A) Irms

0.250s

(A)

Irms

0.033s

(A)

VA One

Minute

Dielectric

Withstand

Voltage (V)

03/03K 24 50/60 24 16.8 71.1 – 50.3 1210 1050

24 Dc 24 16.8 – 36.1 – 870 1050

05/05K 48-60 50/60 48

34.0 13.1

17.2

– 9.2

12.2

450

740

1120

11/11K➆110-240 50/60 110

120

127

208

220

240

60.5 4.2

4.5

4.6

7.9

8.5

8.7

– 3.0

3.2

3.3

5.6

6.0

6.1

330

390

430

1170

1370

1470

1480

14/14K 380-440 50/60 380

415

440

266.0 4.5

5.0

5.3

– 3.2

3.6

3.7

1220

1500

1640

1880

220-250 Dc 220

250

154.0 – 2.4

2.7

– 530

680

1500

18/18K 480-600 50/60 480

525

550

600

336.0 0.6

0.7

0.8

– 0.4

0.5

0.6

200

270

280

360

2200

23/23K 48-60 Dc 48

34.0 – 9.8

11.6

– 470

700

1120

26/26K 110-125 Dc 110

120

125

77.0 – 3.3

3.6

3.8

– 370

440

480

1250

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

152 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Low Energy Shunt Trip

Low Energy Shunt Trip➀

Mounting

Positions

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➁

18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

Same Side Rear➂Opposite Side Same Side

Suffix Numbers Catalog Numbers

F-Frame

Left Pole

Right Pole➂

NO1

NO5

NO2

NO6

NO3

NO7

NO4

NO8

LST1LPK

LST1RPK

LST1LTK

LST1RTK

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C141

J-Frame

Left Pole➂

Right Pole

NO1

NO5

NO2

NO6

NO3

NO7

–

LST2LPK

LST2RPK

–

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C143

K-Frame

Left Pole➂

Right Pole➃

NO1

NO5

NO2

NO6

NO3

NO7

–

LST3LPK

LST3RPK

–

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C145

L- and M-Frames

Left Pole➂

Right Pole➃

NO1

NO5

NO2

NO6

NO3

NO7

–

LST4LPK

LST4RPK

–

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C147

N-Frame

Left Pole➂ NO1 NO2 NO3 –LST5LPK –

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C149

R-Frame

Right Pole NO1 –––LST6RPK –

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C151

➀Cutoff provisions required in control circuit.

➁Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

➂Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

➃For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only.

General Information

Low energy shunt trip devices are

designed to operate from low

energy output signals from dedi-

cated current sensors typically

applied in ground fault protection

schemes. However, with a proper

control voltage source, they may be

applied in place of conventional trip

devices for special applications. Flux

paths surrounding permanent mag-

nets used in the shunt trip assembly

hold a charged spring poised in

readiness to operate the circuit

breaker trip mechanism. When a 100

Ordering Information

Select shunt trip catalog number

for the voltage within the indicated

voltage range. Shunt trip coils are

designed to be applied at specific

Ac or Dc voltages within the voltage

range shown. Electrical ratings are

also shown on applicable circuit

breaker accessory nameplates.

microfarad capacitor charged to 28

Vdc is discharged through the shunt

trip coil, the resultant flux opposes

the permanent magnet flux field,

which releases the stored energy in

the spring to trip the circuit breaker.

As the circuit breaker resets, the

shunt trip reset arm is actuated by

the circuit breaker handle, resetting

the shunt trip. The plug-in module is

mounted in retaining slots in the top

of the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-

rated only. Cutoff provisions

required in control circuit.

F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N-, and R-Frames

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 153

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH 3-Pole only)

Electrical Ratings Style Numbers ➀➁➂ Factory Suffix

Volts Frequency Amperes

120

110

208

220

240

380

415

440

480

50/60 Hz

50 Hz

60 Hz

50 Hz

50/60 Hz

50 Hz

60 Hz

0.05

0.22

0.11

0.10

0.049

0.026

0.025

0.024

0.015

0.013

0.012

0.01

1373D62G03

1373D62G04

1373D62G05

1373D62G06

1373D62G07

1373D62G08

1373D62G09

1373D62G10

1373D62G11

1373D62G12

1373D62G13

1373D62G14

T10

T11

T12

Undervoltage Release

Mechanism

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15553

➀Includes 24 inch external pigtail leads, #18

AWG (16-.010).

➁A maximum of two internal accessories may

be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.

➂Suitable for mounting in left pole only of

3-pole breaker.

Note: G-frame circuit breakers are

factory sealed. Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc., requires that internal

accessories be installed at the factory.

Internal accessories are UL listed for

factory installation under E7819.

General Information

The undervoltage release mechan-

ism monitors a voltage (typically a

line voltage) and trips the circuit

breaker when the voltage falls to

between 70 and 35 percent of the

solenoid coil rating.

The undervoltage release mecha-

nism consists of a continuous rated

solenoid with a plunger and tripping

lever mounted in a plug-in module.

The tab on the tripping lever resets

the undervoltage release mechanism

when normal voltage has been

restored and the circuit breaker

handle is moved to the reset (or OFF)

position. With less than pickup volt-

age applied to the undervoltage

release mechanism, the circuit

breaker contacts will not touch when

a closing operation is attempted.

Note: Undervoltage release mechan-

ism accessories are not designed for,

and should not be used as, circuit

interlocks.

Ordering Information

Select handle reset undervoltage

release mechanism catalog number

for the voltage within the indicated

voltage range. Undervoltage release

mechanism coils are designed to be

applied at specific Ac or Dc voltages

within the voltage range shown.

Electrical ratings are shown on appli-

cable circuit breaker accessory

nameplates.

Where local codes and standards

permit and UL listing is not required,

internal accessories can be field

installed. Accessory installation

should be done before the circuit

breaker is mounted and connected.

G-Frame

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

154 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

Series C Internal Accessories

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

F-Frame Electrical Rating Data➀

50/60 Hz Dc

Supply

Voltage

Dropout Voltage Pickup

Voltage

VA Supply

Voltage

Dropout Voltage Pickup

Voltage

Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.

12 4.2 6.3 7.6 1.3

2.5

12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.8

24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.4 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.6

21.0 33.6 40.8 1.2

1.9

21.0 33.6 40.8 1.3

2.0

110

120

127

44.5 77.0 93.5 1.3

1.5

1.7

110

120

125

44.5 77.0 93.5 1.5

1.7

1.9

208

220

240

84.0 145.6 176.8 2.2

2.4

2.9

220

250

–

87.5

–

154.0

–

187.0

–

2.6

3.4

–

380

415

440

480

168.0 266.0 323.0 2.9

3.5

3.9

4.6

–

525

550

600

210.0 367.0 446.0 4.3

4.8

5.8

–

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

Voltage Rating

(Ac Freq = 50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP) Field Mounted (F-Frame Breaker) Field Mounted (F-Frame Breaker HMCP)

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➁

18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

Same Side Rear➂Opposite Side Same Side

Suffix Numbers Catalog Numbers

Left-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings

12 Vac

24 Vac

48 Vac

60 Vac

110-127 Vac

208-240 Vac

380-480 Vac

525-600 Vac

U01

U05

U37

U97

U13

U17

U21

U25

U02

U06

U38

U98

U14

U18

U22

U26

U03

U07

U39

U99

U15

U19

U23

U27

U04

U08

U40

U100

U16

U20

U24

U28

UVH1LP02K

UVH1LP03K

UVH1LP22K

UVH1LP24K

UVH1LP08K

UVH1LP11K

UVH1LP15K

UVH1LP18K

UVH1LT02K

UVH1LT03K

UVH1LT22K

UVH1LT24K

UVH1LT08K

UVH1LT11K

UVH1LT15K

UVH1LT18K

MUVH1LP02K

MUVH1LP03K

MUVH1LP22K

MUVH1LP24K

MUVH1LP08K

MUVH1LP11K

MUVH1LP15K

MUVH1LP18K

MUVH1LT02K

MUVH1LT03K

MUVH1LT22K

MUVH1LT24K

MUVH1LT08K

MUVH1LT11K

MUVH1LT15K

MUVH1LT18K

Right-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings➃➄

12 Vac

24 Vac

48 Vac

60 Vac

110-127 Vac

208-240 Vac

380-480 Vac

525-600 Vac

U49

U53

U85

U101

U61

U65

U69

U73

U50

U54

U86

U102

U62

U66

U70

U74

U51

U55

U87

U103

U63

U67

U71

U75

U52

U56

U88

U104

U64

U68

U72

U76

UVH1RP02K

UVH1RP03K

UVH1RP22K

UVH1RP24K

UVH1RP08K

UVH1RP11K

UVH1RP15K

UVH1RP18K

UVH1RT02K

UVH1RT03K

UVH1RT22K

UVH1RT24K

UVH1RT08K

UVH1RT11K

UVH1RT15K

UVH1RT18K

MUVH1RP02K

MUVH1RP03K

MUVH1RP22K

MUVH1RP24K

MUVH1RP08K

MUVH1RP11K

MUVH1RP15K

MUVH1RP18K

MUVH1RT02K

MUVH1RT03K

MUVH1RT22K

MUVH1RT24K

MUVH1RT08K

MUVH1RT11K

MUVH1RT15K

MUVH1RT18K

Left-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48 Vdc

60 Vdc

110-127 Vdc

220-250 Vdc

U29

U33

U37

U97

U41

U45

U30

U34

U38

U98

U42

U46

U31

U35

U39

U99

U43

U47

U32

U36

U40

U100

U44

U48

UVH1LP20K

UVH1LP21K

UVH1LP22K

UVH1LP24K

UVH1LP26K

UVH1LP28K

UVH1LT20K

UVH1LT21K

UVH1LT22K

UVH1LT24K

UVH1LT26K

UVH1LT28K

MUVH1LP20K

MUVH1LP21K

MUVH1LP22K

MUVH1LP24K

MUVH1LP26K

MUVH1LP28K

MUVH1LT20K

MUVH1LT21K

MUVH1LT22K

MUVH1LT24K

MUVH1LT26K

MUVH1LT28K

Right-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings➃➄

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48 Vdc

60 Vdc

110-127 Vdc

220-250 Vdc

U77

U81

U85

U101

U89

U93

U78

U82

U86

U102

U90

U94

U79

U83

U87

U103

U91

U95

U80

U84

U88

U104

U92

U96

UVH1RP20K

UVH1RP21K

UVH1RP22K

UVH1RP26K

UVH1RP28K

UVH1RT20K

UVH1RT21K

UVH1RT22K

UVH1RT26K

UVH1RT28K

MUVH1RP20K

MUVH1RP21K

MUVH1RP22K

MUVH1RP26K

MUVH1RP28K

MUVH1RT20K

MUVH1RT21K

MUVH1RT22K

MUVH1RT26K

MUVH1RT28K

➁Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc., for field installation.

➂Standard pigtail lead exit location.

Note: F-frame circuit breakers are

factory sealed. Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc., requires that internal

accessories be installed at the factory.

Internal accessories are UL listed for

factory installation under E7819.

Where local codes and standards

permit and UL listing is not required,

internal accessories can be field

installed. Accessory installation

should be done before the circuit

breaker is mounted and connected.

➃Standard mounting location.

➄Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit

breaker.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C160 and 29C179 (HMCP)

➀Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus

4000 mechanical operations.

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 155

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

➀Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus

2000 mechanical operations.

➁For electrical rating data for manual, auto-

matic and electrical reset undervoltage re-

lease mechanisms, refer to Cutler-Hammer.

➂Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

➃Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit

breakers.

➄Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

J-Frame

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

Voltage Rating

(Ac Freq =

50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➂

18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block➁

Pigtail Leads Terminal

Block➃

Same Side Rear➂Opposite Side Same Side

Suffix Numbers Catalog Numbers

Left-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings➄

12 Vac

24 Vac

48-60 Vac

110-127 Vac

208-240 Vac

380-480 Vac

U05

U09

U13

U17

U21

U25

U06

U10

U14

U18

U22

U26

U07

U11

U15

U19

U23

U27

U08

U12

U16

U20

U24

U28

UVH2LP02K

UVH2LP03K

UVH2LP05K

UVH2LP08K

UVH2LP11K

UVH2LP15K

UVH2LT02K

UVH2LT03K

UVH2LT05K

UVH2LT08K

UVH2LT11K

UVH2LT15K

Right-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings➃

12 Vac

24 Vac

48-60 Vac

110-127 Vac

208-240 Vac

380-480 Vac

U37

U41

U45

U49

U53

U57

U38

U42

U46

U50

U54

U58

U39

U43

U47

U51

U55

U59

U40

U44

U48

U52

U56

U60

UVH2RP02K

UVH2RP03K

UVH2RP05K

UVH2RP08K

UVH2RP11K

UVH2RP15K

UVH2RT02K

UVH2RT03K

UVH2RT05K

UVH2RT08K

UVH2RT11K

UVH2RT15K

Left-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings➄

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48-60 Vdc

110-127 Vdc

220-250 Vdc

T01

T05

T09

T13

T17

T02

T06

U10

T14

T18

T03

T07

T11

T15

T19

T04

T08

T12

T16

T20

UVH2LP20K

UVH2LP21K

UVH2LP23K

UVH2LP26K

UVH2LP28K

UVH2LT20K

UVH2LT21K

UVH2LT23K

UVH2LT26K

UVH2LT28K

Right-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings➃

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48-60 Vdc

110-127 Vdc

220-250 Vdc

T21

T25

T29

T33

T37

T22

T26

T30

T34

T38

T23

T27

T31

T35

T39

T24

T28

T32

T36

T40

UVH2RP20K

UVH2RP21K

UVH2RP23K

UVH2RP26K

UVH2RP28K

UVH2RT20K

UVH2RT21K

UVH2RT23K

UVH2RT26K

UVH2RT28K

Electrical Rating Data ➀➁

50/60 Hz Dc

Supply

Voltage

Dropout Voltage Pickup

Voltage

VA Supply

Voltage

Dropout Voltage Pickup

Voltage

Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.

12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6

24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1

21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5

3.8

21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0

3.1

110

120

127

44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8

2.1

2.4

110

120

125

44.5 77.0 93.5

1.6

1.9

2.2

208

220

240

85.0 145.6 176.8 2.7

3.1

3.8

220

250

–

87.5

–

154.0

–

187.0

–

3.1

4.0

–

380

415

440

480

168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4

4.0

4.6

5.4

–

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C163

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

156 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

➀Endurance: 5,000 electrical operations plus

1,000 mechanical operations

➁Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,

for field installation under E64983.

➂Standard mounting location — leads exit

rear of breaker.

➃For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units

only.

➄Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit

breaker.

K-Frame Electrical Rating Data ➀

50/60 Hz Dc

Supply

Voltage

Dropout Voltage Pickup

Voltage

VA Supply

Voltage

Dropout Voltage Pickup

Voltage

Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.

12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6

24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1

21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5

3.8

21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0

3.1

110

120

127

44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8

2.1

2.4

110

120

125

44.5 77.0 93.5

1.6

1.9

2.2

208

220

240

85.0 145.6 176.8 2.7

3.1

3.8

220

250

–

87.5

–

154.0

–

187.0

–

3.1

4.0

–

380

415

440

480

168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4

4.0

4.6

5.4

–

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

Voltage Rating

(Ac Freq =

50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➁

18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

Same Side Rear➂Opposite Side Same Side

Suffix Numbers Catalog Numbers

Left-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings➂

12 Vac

24 Vac

48-60 Vac

110-127 Vac

208-240 Vac

380-480 Vac

U05

U09

U13

U17

U21

U25

U06

U10

U14

U18

U22

U26

U07

U11

U15

U19

U23

U27

U08

U12

U16

U20

U24

U28

UVH3LP02K

UVH3LP03K

UVH3LP05K

UVH3LP08K

UVH3LP11K

UVH3LP15K

UVH3LT02K

UVH3LT03K

UVH3LT05K

UVH3LT08K

UVH3LT11K

UVH3LT15K

Right-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings➃➄

12 Vac

24 Vac

48-60 Vac

110-127 Vac

208-240 Vac

380-480 Vac

U37

U41

U45

U49

U53

U57

U38

U42

U46

U50

U54

U58

U39

U43

U47

U51

U55

U59

U40

U44

U48

U52

U56

U60

UVH3RP02K

UVH3RP03K

UVH3RP05K

UVH3RP08K

UVH3RP11K

UVH3RP15K

UVH3RT02K

UVH3RT03K

UVH3RT05K

UVH3RT08K

UVH3RT11K

UVH3RT15K

Left-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings➂

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48-60 Vdc

110-127 Vdc

220-250 Vdc

T01

T05

T09

T13

T17

T02

T06

T10

T14

T18

T03

T07

T11

T15

T19

T04

T08

T12

T16

T20

UVH3LP20K

UVH3LP21K

UVH3LP23K

UVH3LP26K

UVH3LP28K

UVH3LT20K

UVH3LT21K

UVH3LT23K

UVH3LT26K

UVH3LT28K

Right-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings➃➄

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48-60 Vdc

110-127 Vdc

220-250 Vdc

T21

T25

T29

T33

T37

T22

T26

T30

T34

T38

T23

T27

T31

T35

T39

T24

T28

T32

T36

T40

UVH3RP20K

UVH3RP21K

UVH3RP23K

UVH3RP26K

UVH3RP28K

UVH3RT20K

UVH3RT21K

UVH3RT23K

UVH3RT26K

UVH3RT28K

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C166

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 157

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

➀Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus

1000 mechanical operations

➁Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

➂Standard mounting location — leads exit

rear of breaker.

➃For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units

only.

➄Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit

breaker.

L- and M-Frames Electrical Rating Data ➀

50/60 Hz Dc

Supply

Voltage

Dropout Voltage Pickup

Voltage

VA Supply

Voltage

Dropout Voltage Pickup

Voltage

Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.

12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6

24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1

21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5

3.8

21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0

3.1

110

120

127

44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8

2.1

2.4

110

120

125

44.5 77.0 93.5

1.6

1.9

2.2

208

220

240

85.0 145.6 176.8 2.7

3.1

3.8

220

250

–

87.5

–

154.0

–

187.0

–

3.1

4.0

–

380

415

440

480

168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4

4.0

4.6

5.4

–

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

Voltage Rating

(Ac Freq =

50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➁

18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

Same Side Rear➂ Opposite Side Same Side

Suffix Numbers Catalog Numbers

Left-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings➂

12 Vac

24 Vac

48-60 Vac

110-127 Vac

208-240 Vac

380-480 Vac

U05

U09

U13

U17

U21

U25

U06

U10

U14

U18

U22

U26

U07

U11

U15

U19

U23

U27

U08

U12

U16

U20

U24

U28

UVH4LP02K

UVH4LP03K

UVH4LP05K

UVH4LP08K

UVH4LP11K

UVH4LP15K

UVH4LT02K

UVH4LT03K

UVH4LT05K

UVH4LT08K

UVH4LT11K

UVH4LT15K

Right-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings➃➄

12 Vac

24 Vac

48-60 Vac

110-127 Vac

208-240 Vac

380-480 Vac

U37

U41

U45

U49

U53

U57

U38

U42

U46

U50

U54

U58

U39

U43

U47

U51

U55

U59

U40

U44

U48

U52

U56

U60

UVH4RP02K

UVH4RP03K

UVH4RP05K

UVH4RP08K

UVH4RP11K

UVH4RP15K

UVH4RT02K

UVH4RT03K

UVH4RT05K

UVH4RT08K

UVH4RT11K

UVH4RT15K

Left-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings➂

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48-60 Vdc

110-127 Vdc

220-250 Vdc

T01

T05

T09

T13

T17

T02

T06

T10

T14

T18

T03

T07

T11

T15

T19

T04

T08

T12

T16

T20

UVH4LP20K

UVH4LP21K

UVH4LP23K

UVH4LP26K

UVH4LP28K

UVH4LT20K

UVH4LT21K

UVH4LT23K

UVH4LT26K

UVH4LT28K

Right-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings➃➄

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48-60 Vdc

110-127 Vdc

220-250 Vdc

T21

T25

T29

T33

T37

T22

T26

T30

T34

T38

T23

T27

T31

T35

T39

T24

T28

T32

T36

T40

UVH4RP20K

UVH4RP21K

UVH4RP23K

UVH4RP26K

UVH4RP28K

UVH4RT20K

UVH4RT21K

UVH4RT23K

UVH4RT26K

UVH4RT28K

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C170

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

158 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

➀Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus

1000 mechanical operations.

➂Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

for field installation under E64983.

➂Standard mounting location – leads exit rear

of breaker.

N-Frame Electrical Rating Data ➀

50/60 Hz Dc

Supply

Voltage

Dropout Voltage Pickup

Voltage

VA Supply

Voltage

Dropout Voltage Pickup

Voltage

Min. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.

12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6

24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1

21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5

3.8

21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0

3.1

110

120

127

44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8

2.1

2.4

110

120

125

44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6

1.9

2.2

208

220

240

84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7

3.1

3.8

220

250

87.5

–

154.0

–

187.0

–

3.1

4.0

380

415

480

500

175.0 266.0 323.0 3.4

4.0

4.6

5.4

–

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

Voltage Rating

(Ac Freq =

50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➁

18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block

Same Side Rear➂ Opposite Side Same Side

Suffix Numbers Catalog Numbers

Left-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings➂

12 Vac

24 Vac

48-60 Vac

110-127 Vac

208-240 Vac

380-480 Vac

U05

U09

U13

U17

U21

U25

U06

U10

U14

U18

U22

U26

U07

U11

U153

U19

U23

U27

U08

U12

U16

U20

U24

U28

UVH5LP02K

UVH5LP03K

UVH5LP05K

UVH5LP08K

UVH5LP11K

UVH5LP29K

UVH5LT02K

UVH5LT03K

UVH5LT05K

UVH5LT08K

UVH5LT11K

UVH5LT29K

Left-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings➂

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48-60 Vdc

110-127 Vdc

220-250 Vdc

T01

T05

T09

T13

T17

T02

T06

T10

T14

T18

T03

T07

T11

T15

T19

T04

T08

T12

T16

T20

UVH5LP20K

UVH5LP21K

UVH5LP23K

UVH5LP26K

UVH5LP28K

UVH5LT20K

UVH5LT21K

UVH5LT23K

UVH5LT26K

UVH5LT28K

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C174

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 159

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Undervoltage Release Mechanism

➀Endurance – 500 electrical operations plus

2500 mechanical operations.

➁Pigtail wire size – No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).

Leads are orange and brown.

➂UVR will override a momentary voltage dip

up to the response time shown.

➃Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before

circuit breaker contacts begin to separate.

➄For 1 minute.

R-Frame

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C178

Ac Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings➀➁

Catalog

Suffix

Application

Ratings

Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms)

Voltage

(V)

Supply

Voltage

(V)

Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup

Voltage

(V) Max.

VA Min.➂

UVR

Response

Initiation➃

Circuit

Breaker

Contact

Separation

Maximum

Circuit

Breaker

Contact

Opening

Dielectric➄

Withstand

Voltage (V)

Min. Max.

02/02K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.3 5 46 77 1024

03/03K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1 5 46 77 1048

05/05K 48-60 48

21.0 33.5 40.8 3.4

6.0

5 46 77 1120

08/08K 110-127 110

120

127

44.5 77.0 93.5 3.3

3.6

3.8

5 46 77 1254

11/11K 208-240 208

220

240

84.0 145.6 176.8 4.2

6.6

7.2

5 46 77 1480

29/29K 380-500 380

415

440

480

500

168.0 266.0 323.0 3.8

8.3

8.8

9.6

10.0

5 46 77 2000

Dc Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings➀➁

Catalog

Suffix

Application

Ratings

Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms)

Voltage

(V)

Supply

Voltage

(V)

Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup

Voltage

(V) Max.

VA Min.➂

UVR

Response

Initiation➃

Circuit

Breaker

Contact

Separation

Maximum

Circuit

Breaker

Contact

Opening

Dielectric➄

Withstand

Voltage (V)

Min. Max.

20/20K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 3.4 5 46 77 1024

21/21K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 4.3 5 46 77 1048

23/23K 48-60 48

21.0 33.5 40.8 4.8

7.2

5 46 77 1120

26/26K 110-127 110

120

125

43.8 77.0 93.5 3.3

3.6

3.8

5 46 77 1250

28/28K 220-250 220

250

87.5 154.0 187.0 6.6

7.5

5 46 77 1500

Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only)

Voltage Rating

(Ac Freq = 50/60 Hz)

Factory Mounted Field Mounted

Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits➀

18-inch Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads

Suffix Numbers➁ Catalog Numbers➁

12 Vac

24 Vac

48-60 Vac

110-127 Vac

208-240 Vac

380-500 Vac

12 Vdc

24 Vdc

48-60 Vdc

110-125 Vdc

220-250 Vdc

U37

U41

U45

U49

U53

U57

T21

T25

T29

T33

T37

UVH6RP02K

UVH6RP03K

UVH6RP05K

UVH6RP08K

UVH6RP11K

UVH6RP29K

UVH6RP20K

UVH6RP21K

UVH6RP23K

UVH6RP26K

UVH6RP28K

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

160 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C Internal Accessories

Accessory Terminal Block/Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit (OPTIM 550 only)

Accessory Terminal Block

(R-Frame)

(For Fixed Mounted Configuration)

General Information

Internal accessory wiring leads are

normally supplied with pigtail leads

(No. 18 AWG) that exit from the right

side of the circuit breaker. Where

specified, fixed mounted accessory

terminal blocks are available. A max-

imum of one 24-point terminal block

can be installed on the right side of

the circuit breaker for the internal

accessories.

For convenience in determining the

appropriate number of terminal

block points required, refer to table

at right.

Number of Control Wires For Each Internally Mounted Accessories

Type of Accessory Number of Contacts Per Single

Accessory

Required Number of Wires

Auxiliary Switch 2a/2b

4a/4b

Alarm (Signal)/

Lockout Switch

1m/1b

2m/2b

Shunt Trip N/A 2

Low Energy Shunt N/A 2

Undervoltage Release Mechanism N/A 2

Ordering Information➀

Factory Installed Field Mounted

Suffix Number Catalog Number

Q01 TBRDK

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C312

➀One 24-point accessory terminal block

provided with circuit breaker when ordered

factory installed or shipped from warehouse

as separate item when ordered for field

installation. See Digitrip RMS master con-

nection diagram (IL 29C714).

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet Communications Kit (OPTIM 550 only) K-, L-, and N-Frames

General Information

The Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

Communications Kit can be ordered

to add Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

communications to an existing

OPTIM 550 breaker in the field. An

18-inch wiring pigtail is routed to the

rear of the breaker: two wires for

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet and two

wires for 24V Dc (45 mA load). It is

recommended that the power supply

be an “isolated high quality” unit.

Ordering Information

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

Communications Kit

Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbers

K-Frame

L-Frame

N-Frame

ICK550K

ICK550L

ICK550N

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C506,

29C897, 29C898

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 161

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Termination Hardware – Ring Type

Endcap Kit

The endcap kit slides onto the line or

load conductor of the circuit breaker

and acts as a threaded adapter for

the conductor to accept a ring termi-

nal or other bolt-on connector. The

endcap kit is available with English

and metric thread sizes. Screws and

washers are supplied by customer.

(Field installation only.) Listed per

UL File E7819.

Ordering Information

Thread Type Thread Size Catalog Number

Package of 12

(Priced Individually)

F-Frame

Imperial

Metric

10-32

M-5

KPEK1

KPEK1M

J-Frame

Imperial

Metric

10-32

M-5

KPEK2

KPEK2M

K-Frame

Imperial

Metric

10-32

M-5

KPEK3

KPEK3M

L-Frame

Imperial

Metric

10-32

M-5

KPEK4

KPEK4M

Keeper Nut

The keeper nut slides onto the line

or load conductor of the circuit

breaker and acts as a threaded

adapter for the conductor to accept

a ring terminal or other bolt-on con-

nector. The keeper nut is available

with English and metric thread sizes.

Screws and washers are supplied by

customer. (Field installation only.)

Listed per UL File E7819.

Ordering Information

F-Frame

Thread Type Thread Size Catalog Number

Package of 12

(Priced Individually)

Imperial

Metric

10-32

M-5

KPR1A

KPR1AM

Plug Nut

J-Frame

The plug nut is used in applications

where screw-connected ring-type

terminals are preferred to connect

cables to circuit breaker conductors.

The plug nut is press-fit into the

opening in the circuit breaker termi-

nal conductor. Screws and washers

are supplied by customer.

Ordering Information

Thread

Type

Thread

Size

Catalog Number

Package of 6

Imperial

Metric

.250-20

M-6

PLN2

PLN2M

K-Frame

L-, M-, N-Frames

Not required. Terminals are threaded.

Thread

Type

Thread

Size

Line/

Load End

Catalog

Number

Package of 3

Imperial .375-16 Line

Load

KPR3A

KPR3B

Metric M-8 Line

Load

KPR3AM

KPR3BM

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

162 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Termination Hardware – Control and Multi-Wire

Control Wire Terminal Kit

F-Frame

The control wire terminal kit pro-

vides a means to tap off control

power from a main disconnect using

the provided male end of a quick

disconnect.

For use with steel or stainless steel➀

terminals only.

Ordering Information

Package of 12 control wire terminal

tangs. Terminals must be ordered

separately. Priced individually.

Catalog Number

FCWTK

Multi-Wire Connectors

Field-installed multi-wire connec-

tors for the load side (OFF) end ter-

minals. They are used to distribute

the load from the circuit breaker to

multiple devices without the use of

separate distribution terminal

blocks.

Multi-wire lug kits include mounting

hardware, insulators and tin-plated

aluminum connectors to replace

three mechanical load lugs. UL

listed for copper only as used on the

load side (OFF) end.

Ordering Information

Package of 3.

Maximum

Amperes

Wires

Per

Terminal

Wire

Size

Range

AWG

Kit

Catalog

Number

F-Frame

225 3 #14-2 3TA150F3K

225 6 #14-6 3TA150F6K

J-Frame

225 3 #14-2 3TA250J3K

225 6 #14-6 3TA250J6K

K-Frame

400 3 #12-2/0 3TA400K3K

400 6 #14-2/0 3TA400K6K

➀Terminal kits contain one terminal for each

pole and one terminal cover.

➁Individually packed.

J- and K-Frames

Not for use with T250KB terminals.

Ordering Information

Package of 12 control wire terminal

tangs. Terminals must be ordered

separately. Priced individually.

L-Frame

Catalog Number

KCWTK

AWG Wire

Range/Number

Conductors

Metric

Wire

Range mm2

Catalog

Number

Al/Cu

(2) 250 – 350 kcmil

120-150 TA602LDCW➁

(2) 3/0 – 350 kcmil

120-150 T602LDCW➁

Al/Cu

(2) 400 – 500 kcmil

185-240 2TA603LDCW➀

2-Pole Kit

Al/Cu

(2) 400 – 500 kcmil

185-240 3TA603LDCW➀

3-Pole Kit

Al/Cu

(2) 400 – 500 kcmil

185-240 4TA603LDCW➀

4-Pole Kit

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 163

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Base Mounting Hardware

Ordering Information

Hardware for surface mounting of

circuit breakers is supplied only on

request. Hardware consists of

mounting screws and lockwashers.

Order hardware for circuit breaker

pole configurations as required.

Screw Length Style Number

G-Frame

2.625 (66.7 mm)

3.000 (76.2 mm)

624B375G23

8703C80G05

Imperial Thread Metric Thread

Number

Poles

Description Type of

Mounting

Style /

Catalog

Number

Poles

Description Type of

Mounting

Style /

Catalog

Number

F-Frame

1 .164-32 x 3.188

inch Pan-

Head Steel

Screws,

Lockwashers,

and Clamps

Individual

Group

(one set of

hardware

for two

circuit

breakers)

624B375G01

624B375G02

1 M4 - 0.7 x

80 mm Pan-

Head Steel

Screws,

Lock-

washers,

and Clamps

Individual

Group

(one set of

hardware

for

two circuit

breakers)

4218B80G09

4218B80G10

2 .164-32 x 1.5

inch Pan-

Head

Steel Screws

and Lock-

washers

Individual 4218B80G01 2 M4 - 0.7 x

38 mm Pan-

Head Steel

Screws and

Lockwashers

Individual 4218B80G11

3, 4 .164-32 x 1.5

inch Pan-

Head

Steel Screws

and Lock-

washers

Individual BMH1 3, 4 M4 - 0.7 x

38 mm Pan-

Head Steel

Screws and

Lockwashers

Individual BMH1M

J-Frame

2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 2.75

inch Pan-

Head Steel

Screws and

Lockwashers

Individual BMH2 2, 3, 4 M6 – 0.7 x

70mm Pan-

Head Steel

Screws and

Lockwashers

Individual BMH2M

K-Frame

2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 1.5

inch Pan-

Head Steel

Screws and

Lockwashers

Individual BMH3 2, 3, 4 M6 – 0.7 x

38mm Pan-

Head Steel

Screws and

Lockwashers

Individual BMH3M

L-Frame

2, 3, 4 0.250-20 x 1.5

inch Filister-

Head Steel

Screws and

Lockwashers

and Flat

Washers

Individual BMH4 2, 3 – Individual BMH4M

M-Frame

2, 3 0.3125-18 x

1.25 inch

Filster-Head

Steel Screws

and

Lockwashers

and Flat

Washers

Individual BMH5 2, 3 – Individual BMH5M

N-Frame

2, 3, 4 0.3125-18 x

1.25 inch

Pan-Head

Steel Screws

and Lock-

washers

BMH5 2, 3 – Individual BMH5M

R-Frame

Supplied by customer

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

164 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Drawout Cassette

The drawout cassette is currently for

use with the standard 3-pole 65 kA/

480 Vac, 1600A and 2000A RD circuit

breakers only. It consists of two

separate components: the movable

mechanism which is factory

mounted to the circuit breaker frame

(shown in figure) and the stationary

mechanism which is housed in the

cassette and shipped separately.

The drawout mechanism has four

positions.

■Connected – The breaker is fully

connected to the primary stabs

and secondary contacts.

■Test – The breaker is not con-

nected to the primary stab but

is connected to the secondary

contacts.

■Disconnected – Both the primary

stabs and the secondary contacts

are disconnected.

■Withdraw – The breaker can be

removed from the cassette.

Note: Movable mechanism must

be ordered with RD or RDC circuit

breaker and is shipped mounted to

circuit breaker frame. Stationary

mechanism is ordered separately.

All internal accessories must be fac-

tory installed for use with drawout.

Ordering Information

RD Drawout Cassette

65 kA/480 Vac version

Description Catalog Number

Movable

Mechanism

RD20DOM

Stationary

Mechanism

RD20DOS

(without shutters)

RD20DOSS

(with shutters)

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 32697 Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 32697

RD Drawout Cassette

100 kA/480 Vac version

Description Catalog Number

Movable

Mechanism

RD20DOM

Stationary

Mechanism

RD20DOS

(without shutters)

RD20DOSS

(with shutters)

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 165

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Termination Hardware – Protective Shields

J-Frame

Terminal Shields

Terminal shields provide protection

against accidental contact with live

line side terminations. Terminal

shields are fabricated from high

dielectric insulating material and

fasten over the front terminal access

openings. Small openings in the

shields provide limited access to the

terminals for tightening connectors.

(Field installation only.)

Ordering Information

G-Frame

Terminal Shield

Number Units in Package Style Number

10 GTSK3

L-Frame

F-Frame K-Frame M-Frame

Number of Poles Location Style Number

(Package of 10)

2, 3

Line End 1266C07G01

6631C01G01

2, 3

Load End 6641C16G01

6641C16G02

Style Number (Package of 1)

314CA420G01

Number

of Poles

Location Style Number

Standard

(Package of 10)

(Priced Individually)

Special - For

use when

electrical

operator is

mounted on

circuit

breaker

Line 625B229G06

625B229G07

625B229G08

625B229G09

–

4210B95G01

4210B95G02

Number of Poles Location Catalog Number

(Package of 10)

2, 3 Line TS33LN

4 Line TS34LN

3 Load TS33LD

Style Number (Package of 1)

4203B20G01

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

166 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Termination Hardware

Terminal End Covers

F-Frame

The terminal end covers are

designed for use in motor control

center applications where, because

of confined spaces, line side conduc-

tors are normally custom fitted. The

molded end covers are made of high

dielectric glass-polyester and slide

over the line ends of the circuit

breaker. Close fitting conductor

openings are molded into the end

covers. The end cover and circuit

breaker case fit together to form

terminal compartments that isolate

discharged ionizing gases during cir-

cuit breaker tripping. Terminal end

covers are available with two con-

ductor opening diameters, 0.25 and

0.41 inch, and are listed per UL File

E7819. (Field installation only.)

Ordering Information

The terminal end cover is available

for 3-pole circuit breakers only. Two

conductor opening sizes are avail-

able. Specify quantity (one per

circuit breaker) when ordering.

Conductor Opening Diameter (Inches) Catalog Number

0.25 (6.35 mm)

0.41 (10.41 mm)

TEC1

TEC2

Interphase Barriers

The interphase barriers provide

additional electrical clearance

between circuit breaker poles for

special termination applications.

The barriers are high dielectric insu-

lating plates that are installed in the

molded slots between the terminals.

(Field installation only.) Two per

package.

Frame Catalog Number

F IPB1

J IPB2

K IPB3

L IPB4

M IPB4

N IPB5

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 167

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Base Mounting Adapters

Base Mounting Plate➀

G-Frame GD/GC/GHC

➀Suitable for mounting (6) single-pole circuit

breakers.

➁For use with standard 35 mm DIN Rail such

as, 35 x 7.5 or 35 x 15 mm per DIN EN50022.

➂Adapter mounting screws included are for

use with 2- and 3-pole circuit breakers.

Adapters for 1-pole circuit breakers clip into

the base molding.

➃For use on 3-pole breakers only.

DIN Rail Adapter➁➂

G-Frame GD/GC/GHC

Ordering Information

Number Units in Package Style Number

1225C79G01

1225C79G02➃

Key Operated Attachment

G-Frame GD/GC/GHC

Ordering Information

Number Units in Package Style Number

10 GK0A

Ordering Information

Number Units in Package Style Number

1 207B513G01 Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C090

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C091

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

168 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Handle Locking and Blocking Devices

Padlockable Handle

G-Frame GD/GC/GHC/GB/GHB

Lock Dog (non-padlockable)

G-Frame GD/GC/GHC/GB/

GHB/GMCP

Ordering Information

Number Units in Package Style Number

1 1294C01H01

Ordering Information

(Accepts .285 Lock Shank)

Number Units in Package Style Number

10 1223C77G03

Non-Padlockable

Handle Block

Snap-On Padlockable

Handle Lock Hasp

The snap-on padlockable handle

lock allows the handle to be locked

in the OFF or ON position. (Trip-free

operation allows the circuit breaker

to trip when the handle lock holds

the circuit breaker handle in the ON

position.) This device was designed

for use on the 1-pole circuit breaker,

but may be used on 1-, 2-, 3-, and

4-pole styles. The handle lock snaps

onto the escutcheon area of the han-

dle with an optional retaining screw

for added secureness. The handle

lock will accommodate one padlock

with a 1/4-inch (6 mm) shackle.

Listed per UL File E7819. (Field

installation only.)

Ordering Information

Frame Catalog Number

F PHB1

Padlockable Handle Block

The device is positioned in the

cover opening to prevent handle

movement. Will accommodate one

5/16 padlock.

Ordering Information

Frame Catalog Number

J, K PHB3

The nonlockable handle block

secures the circuit breaker handle

in either the ON or OFF position.

(Trip-free operation allows the cir-

cuit breaker to trip when the handle

block holds the circuit breaker han-

dle in the ON position.) The device is

positioned over the circuit breaker

handle and secured by a setscrew to

deter accidental operation of the

circuit breaker handle. Listed per UL

File E7819. (Field installation only.)

Ordering Information

Frame Catalog Number

F LKD1

J, K LKD3

L, M, N LKD4

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 169

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Handle Locking and Blocking Devices

The padlockable handle lock hasp

allows the handle to be locked in the

ON or OFF position. (Trip-free opera-

tion allows the circuit breaker to trip

when the handle lock holds the cir-

cuit breaker handle in the ON posi-

tion.) The hasp mounts on the circuit

breaker cover within the trimline.

The cover is predrilled on both sides

of the operating handle so that the

hasp can be mounted on either side

of the handle. The hasp will accom-

modate up to three padlocks with

1/4-inch (6 mm) shackles. Listed per

UL File E7819. (Field installation only.)

The padlockable handle lock can be

mounted on either side of the operat-

ing handle. One per circuit breaker.

(Field installation only.)

Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp

Ordering Information

Description Catalog

Number

F-Frame

1-pole breakers PHL1

2-, 3-, 4-pole breakers PLK1

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C230

J, K-Frames

2-, 3-, 4-pole breakers PLK3

For Left Side Mounting PLK3LOFF➀

For Right Side Mounting PLK3ROFF➀

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C232

L-Frame

Side Mounted

Lock On or Off HLK4

Lock Off Only (Left-Hand Mount) HLK4LOFF➀

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C234

Top Mounted

Lock On or Off HLK4S

Lock Off Only HLK4SOFF➀

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C234C

M-Frame

Lock On or Off HLK4

Lock Off Only (Left-Hand Mount) HLK4LOFF➀

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C234

Vertical Mounting

Lock On/Off HLK45

Lock Off Only HLK45OFF

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C234C

N-Frame

Side Mounted PLK5

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C234

Top Mounted (On/Off) PLK5S

Top Mounted (Off Only) PLK5SOFF➀

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C234C

R-Frame

Lock On/Off HLK6

Lock Off Only HLK6OFF➀

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C240

➀For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock

handle in OFF position only order either

catalog number.

Cylinder Lock

The cylinder lock internally blocks the

trip bar in the tripped position to pre-

vent the circuit breaker from being

switched to ON. The cylinder lock is

factory installed in the circuit breaker

cover. Other internally mounted

accessories cannot be installed in

the same pole as the cylinder lock.

(Factory installation only.)

The cylinder lock is factory installed

in the left pole only of the circuit

breaker cover. Internal accessories

cannot be installed in the same pole

as the cylinder lock.

Ordering Information

Frames Catalog Number

F, J, K Order by description

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

170 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Mechanical Interlocking Devices

The key interlock is used to exter-

nally lock the circuit breaker handle

in the OFF position. When the key

interlock is locked, an extended

deadbolt blocks movement of the cir-

cuit breaker handle. Uniquely coded

keys are removable only with the

deadbolt extended. Each coded key

controls a group of circuit breakers

for a given specific customer

installation.

The key interlock assembly is Under-

writers Laboratories, Inc., listed for

field installation under UL file E7819

and consists of a mounting kit and a

purchaser supplied deadbolt lock.

The mounting kit comprises a

mounting plate, which is secured to

the circuit breaker cover in either the

left- or right-pole position, key inter-

lock mounting screws, and a wire

seal. Specific mounting kits are

required for individual key interlock

types.

Key Interlock Kit

(Lock Not Included)

Ordering Information

Key interlock mounting kits are for

field installation only. Select mount-

ing kit catalog numbers to match

type of lock used. Key interlocks are

supplied by customer.

Lock

Manufacturer

Lock

Type

Bolt Projection

in Withdrawn

Position

Kit

Catalog

Number

F-Frame

Superior

Kirk

Square D

Federal Pioneer

B-4003-1

3/8 inch

None

3/8 inch

KYK1

Castell K or QK 3/8 inch CTK1

J-, K-Frames

Superior

Kirk

Square D

Federal Pioneer

Castell

B-4003-1

K or QK

3/8 inch

None

3/8 inch

KYK3

L-, M-, N-Frames

Superior

Kirk

Square D

Federal Pioneer

B-4003-1

3/8 inch

None

3/8 inch

KYK4

Castell K or QK 3/8 inch CTK4

R-Frame

Superior

Kirk

Square D

Federal Pioneer

B-4003-1

1 inch

KYK6

Castell K or QK 1 inch CTK6

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C231

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C233

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C235

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C240

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 171

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Mechanical Interlocking Devices

Ordering Information

The sliding bar interlock is available

for mounting between two adjacent

3-pole circuit breakers with circuit

breakers centerline spacing as indi-

cated in table and enclosure front

panel thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch.

(For field installation only.)

Sliding Bar Interlock

The sliding bar interlock provides

mechanical interlocking between

two adjacent 3-pole circuit breakers.

It is installed on the enclosure cover

between the circuit breakers. When

the sliding bar interlock handle is

moved from one side to the other,

a bar extends to alternately block

movement of the circuit breaker

handles and prevents both circuit

breakers from being switched to ON

at the same time. Sliding bar inter-

locks are not UL listed. (Field install-

ation only.)

➤

Walking Beam Interlock

The walking beam interlock provides

mechanical interlocking between

two adjacent circuit breakers of the

same pole configuration. The walk-

ing beam interlock mounts on a

bracket behind and between the cir-

cuit breakers. A plunger on each end

of the beam is inserted through an

access hole in the back plate and

base of each circuit breaker. The

walking beam interlock prevents

both circuit breakers from being

switched ON at the same time. If a

walking beam interlock is installed,

the wiring troughs in the back of the

circuit breaker case are blocked by

the plungers and cannot be used for

cross wiring. Factory modified cir-

cuit breakers are required for this

application. UL File E3816.

Ordering Information

The walking beam interlock is avail-

able for mounting between two adja-

cent circuit breakers spaced 1/4-inch

apart and having the same pole con-

figuration. The two circuit breakers

must be factory modified to accept

the walking beam interlock assembly

(suitable for use with either 2-, 3-, or

4-pole circuit breakers). With properly

modified circuit breakers, the walking

beam interlock is suitable for field

installation. Order circuit breakers

specifying modification for walking

beam and select walking beam inter-

lock from table on this page. Circuit

breakers and walking beam interlock

are boxed and shipped separately.

Frame Centerline Spacing

(inches)

Catalog Number Instruction Leaflet/

FRED Number

F 4-3/16 SBK1 29C310

J 4-3/8 SBK2 29C310

K 5-3/4 SBK3 29C310

L, M 8-1/2 SBK4 29C311

N 8-1/2 SBK5 46A8396

Frame Catalog Number Instruction Leaflet/

FRED Number

F WBL1 29C300

K WBL3 29C301

L, M WBL4 29C302

N WBL5 29C303

R WBL6 29C304

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

172 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Electrical Operator

The electrical (solenoid) operator is

a single solenoid mechanism that

enables local and remote circuit

breaker ON, OFF, and reset switch-

ing. The electrical operator is

mounted on the circuit breaker

cover within the trimline of the cir-

cuit breaker. The electrical operator

uses a unique bistable latch that

allows the device to operate using

one solenoid. The accessory pro-

vides high-speed switching with a

maximum operating time of 5 cycles

(80 ms) making it suitable for gener-

ator synchronizing applications.

Means are provided for remote elec-

trical operation and for local manual

operation. A special slide includes

provisions for padlocking the circuit

breaker handle in the OFF position.

The slide will accept three padlock

shackles with a maximum diameter

of 1/4-inch (6 mm) each. An interlock

electrically disconnects the solenoid

when the electrical operator cover is

removed. The above table provides

electrical rating data for the electri-

cal (solenoid) operator.

The electrical (solenoid) operator is

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,

listed as a circuit breaker accessory

under UL File E64983.

Electrical Operator➀

➀The electrical operator design is endurance

tested for 10,000 electrical operations.

➁Use current-limiting type fuse where

required.

➂Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage.

➃Tolerance: ±10% of nominal voltage.

➄Underwriters laboratories listed under UL

file E64983.

➅The electrical operator design has been

endurance tested for 6,000 electrical

operations.

➆Frequency: 50/60 Hz.

➇Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 ms).

Ordering Information

F-Frame

Electrical Rating Data➁ Electrical Operator

Voltage Frequency Inrush

Current

Amperes

Maximum

Operating

Time

Fuse➂

Amperes

Voltage Frequency Terminal

Block

18-Inch

Pigtail Lead

Catalog Number

120➃

240➃

50/60 Hz

5 cycles

(80 ms)

120

240

Ac EOP1T07

EOP1T11

EOP1P07

EOP1P11

120➄

240➄

5 cycles

(80 ms)

3-5

2-3

120

240

Dc EOP1T07DC

EOP1T11DC

EOP1P07DC

EOP1P11DC

K-Frame

Electrical Rating Data ➄➅➆➇ Electrical Operator

Voltage (V)➂ Inrush Current (A) Fuse (A) Operating

Voltage

Frequency Terminal Block

Catalog Number

120

240

120

240

50/60 Hz

EOP3T07

EOP3T11

120

240

Dc EOP3T07DC

EOP3T11DC

J-Frame

Electrical Rating Data ➄➅➆➇

Voltage (V)➂ Inrush Current (A) Fuse (A)

120

240

Electrical Operator

Operating

Voltage

Frequency Terminal Block

Catalog Number

120

240

50/60 Hz

EOP2T07

EOP2T11

120

240

Dc EOP2T07DC

EOP2T11DC

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C202 (AC); 29C211 (DC)

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C200 (AC); 29C210 (DC)

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 173

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Electrical Operator

The motor operator allows the cir-

cuit’s breaker to be opened, closed,

or reset remotely. It also has a lock-

off capability and provisions for

manual operation.

The motor operator contains a

reversible motor connected to a ball

screw. The ball screw drives the cir-

cuit breaker handle. Limit switches

and relays are used to control the

motor.

The motor operator is UL listed as a

recognized component suitable for

field installation on all type L-frame

circuit breakers and molded case

switches under UL File E64124.

From the point of energization of the

closing mechanism at 85% voltage,

the closing time is 30 cycles ± 10%.

Ordering Information

L- and M-Frames

Electrical Rating Data ➀➁➂➃ Electrical Operator

Voltage (V)➄ Inrush Current (A) Operating

Voltage

Frequency Terminal Block

Catalog Number

120 Ac

208

240

120

208

240

480

50/60 Hz EOPM4T07

EOPM4T11

EOPM4T11A

EOPM4T15

125 Dc

125

Dc EOPM4T26

EOPM4T21

N-Frame

Electrical Rating Data ➀➂➅➆ Electrical Operator

Voltage

(V)➄

Frequency Inrush

Current (A)

Fuse

(A)

Operating

Voltage

Frequency Pigtail Leads

Catalog Number

120

208

240

480

50/60 Hz 25

120

208

240

480

50/60 Hz EOP5T07

EOP5T09

EOP5T11

EOP5T15

125

Dc 80

125

Dc EOP5T22

EOP5T26

R-Frame

Available Motor Operator Ratings

and Operating Conditions➇➈➉Electrical Operator

Rating

Voltage (V)

Frequency Motor Inrush

Current (A)

Operating

Voltage

Frequency Factory Installed

Terminal Block

Catalog Number

120

240

50/60 Hz

120

240

50/60 Hz

EOP6T08K

EOP6T11K

EOP6T21K

➀Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed under

UL File E64983.

➁The electrical operator design has been

endurance tested for 6,000 electrical

operations.

➂Frequency: 50/60 Hz.

➃Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 ms).

➄Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage.

➅The electrical operator design has been

endurance tested for 2,500 electrical

operations.

➆Maximum operating time: 12 cycles max.

Operator is an intemittent duty device. The

safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should

not exceed one per minute.

➇Operator is an intermittent duty service. The

safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should

not exceed one per minute.

➈Electric Operating time at rated voltage;

(a) To turn breaker ON – 1/2 second max.

(b) To turn breaker OFF – 1/2 second max.

➉Motor operating temperature; Class “A”

temperature limits apply.

A minimum 1 kVA power source is recom-

mended for motor operation.

Applied voltage should be no less than 85%

or no more than 110% of rated.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C203

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C204

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C205

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

174 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Plug-in Adapters

Ordering Information

F-Frame

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

Style Number

100

150-225

507C036G13

507C036G14

507C036G15

507C036G16

179C968G03

179C968G04

Mounting

Plate

176C511H01 507C047H01 ➀

Plug-in adapters simplify installa-

tion and front removal of circuit

breakers. Individual line and load

plug-in adapters are available for

rear connection applications on

2-, 3-, and 4-pole circuit breakers.

Common mounting plates for line-

and load-end adapters are available.

➀Refer to Cutler-Hammer for availability.

➁Use 3-pole mounting plate for 2-pole circuit

breaker.

J-Frame

Continuous Current

Rating (Amperes)

Terminal End 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole

Style/Catalog Number

250 Line

Load

1 Line and 1 Load

1260C86G05

1260C86G07

506C144G27

1260C86G06

1260C86G08

506C144G28

1231C67G01

1231C67G02

–

Mounting Plate – ➁ PMP23 –

N-Frame

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Style Number

2-Pole 3-pole

1200 2614D53G03 2614D53G04

Mounting

Plate

1290C73H01

Plug-in Adapters

K-Frame

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Catalog Number

2-Pole 3-pole 4-Pole

400 PAD32 PAD33 PAD34

Mounting

Plate

➁ PMP33 PMP34

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 13782

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 149321

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15378 Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C314

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15073

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 13782

L-Frame

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Catalog Number

2-Pole 3-pole

600 506C059G03 506C059G04

Mounting

Plate

504C824H01 504C824H01

M-Frame

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Catalog Number

2-Pole 3-Pole

800 2614D53G05 2614D53G06

Mounting

Plate

1290C73H01

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 175

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Rear Connecting Studs

Mounting Panel

Breaker Mounting

Surface

“F” Thread

Rear Connecting Studs

Ordering Information

F-Frame

Stud

Ampere

Rating

Stud Style

Number

Panel Thickness

(Inches)

Tube Length

(Inches)

Tube

Style

Number

Dimensions

(Inches)

ABC DEF

For 15A to 100A Circuit Breakers

100A Short

451D874G01

1-1/16 to 15/16

3/8 to 5/8

1/4 to 5/16

11/16

13/8

1-11/16

–

32B9446H20

32B9446H21

32B9446H22

32B9446H23

–

3-5/8 15/16 - 18

100A Long

451D874G02

1-1/16 to 15/16

3/8 to 5/8

1/4 to 5/16

–

3-7/16

3-3/4

4-1/16

4-3/8

32B9446H24

32B9446H25

32B9446H26

32B9446H27

6-1/8 –

–

For 110A to 150A Circuit Breakers

150A Short

374D883G01

11/16 to 15/16

3/8 to 5/8

1/4 to 5/16

11/16

13/8

1-11/16

–

374D883H06

374D883H07

374D883H08

374D883H09

–

4-1/4 1/16 - 14

150A Long

374D883G02

11/16 to 15/16

3/8 to 5/8

1/4 to 5/16

–

3-7/16

3-3/4

4-1/16

4-3/8

374D883H10

374D883H11

374D883H12

374D883H13

7-1/2 –

–

Rear connecting studs are available

in several sizes to accommodate

specific fixed-mounted circuit

breaker applications.

Each rear connecting stud assembly

consists of one stud and one tube.

To maintain proper clearances

between poles, select alternate long

and short stud assemblies for circuit

breakers with more than one pole.

One assembly is required for line-

end and one for load-end of each

pole. Tubes must be ordered sepa-

rately. Connecting studs are avail-

able only with English thread sizes.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

176 March 1999

Mounting Panel

Breaker Mounting

Surface

“F” Thread

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Rear Connecting Studs

Ordering Information

J-Frame

Stud

Ampere

Rating

Stud Style Number Panel

Thickness

(Inches)

Tube Length

(Inches)

Tube Style Number

AB C

250A Short

250A Long

5010D23G01

5010D23G02

3/4 – 1

1/2 – 3/4

1/4 – 1/2

3/4 – 1

1/2 – 3/4

1/4 – 1/2

27/32

1-3/32

1-1/32

–

37/8

41/8

43/8

456D983H05

456D983H06

456D983H07

5010D23H05

5010D23H06

5010D23H07

Mounting Panel

Do Not Use More

Than 10 Ft. Lbs.

Torque to Tighten Nuts 13 Thread

18 Thread

Breaker

Stud

Length

Stud Style

Number

Panel Thickness

(Inches)

Tube Length

(Inches)

Standard

Tube Style

Number

Dimensions

(Inches)

ABC DEF

400A Short

400A Long

6642C14G02

6642C14G04

6642C14G06

6642C14G03

6642C14G05

6642C14G07

3/4 to 1

1/2 to 3/4

1/4 to 1/2

3/4 to 1

1/2 to 3/4

1/4 to 1/2

27/32

1-3/32

1-11/32

–

3-25/32

4-1/32

4-9/32

313C909H17

313C909H18

313C909H19

313C909H20

313C909H21

313C909H22

–

6-37/64

–

3-21/32 3/4 - 16

K-Frame

Stud Length

(A)

Stud Style

Number

5-15/32

7-31/32

10-15/32

314C960G07

314C960G08

314C960G09

M-Frame➀

Stud

Ampere

Rating

Diameter,

Inches

and

Thread

Extension

Back of

Breaker,

Inches

Stud

Style

Numbers

225

400

600

800

1/2-13

3/4-16

1-12

1-1/8-12

3-21/32

5-29/32

8-13/32

10-29/32

5-29/32

8-13/32

10-29/32

5-29/32

8-13/32

10-29/32

314C960G01

314C960G04

314C960G05

314C960G06

314C960G07

314C960G08

314C960G09

314C960G10

314C960G11

314C960G12

N-Frame➀

Stud

Ampere

Rating

Diameter,

Inches

and

Thread

Extension

Back of

Breaker,

Inches

Stud

Style

Numbers

800

1200

1-1/8-12

1-1/4-12

5-1/2

10-1/2

5-1/2

10-1/2

623B222G01

623B222G02

623B222G03

373B375G04

373B375G03

L-Frame

Insulators

Nut

Rear

Connecting

Stud

Washer

Insulating Panel

Circuit Breaker

➀Not UL listed.

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 177

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Panelboard Connecting Straps

J-Frame

Panelboard Connecting Straps

Bus

Spacing

(Inches)

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Pole Connector Type

Center Outside

Style Number

3-1/2 250 2600D26G01 2600D26G02

Panelboard connecting straps are

used to connect the circuit breaker

terminals to the panelboard bus.

The panelboard connecting straps

are available with various ratings for

outside and center poles. (Field

installation only.)

Ordering Information

Panelboard connecting straps are

available to meet the needs of most

standard panelboard applications.

Style numbers for mounting brack-

ets for CDP panelboard installations

are also included.

Refer to panelboard manufacturer

for compatibility.

K-Frame

Panelboard Connecting Straps

Bus

Spacing

(Inches)

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Pole Connector Type

Center Outside

Style Number

3-1/2 400 4212B78G02 4212B77G01

L-Frame

Panelboard Connecting Straps

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Pole Connector Type

Center Outside

Style Number

600 624B609G01 506C052G01

M-Frame

Panelboard Connecting Straps

Bus

Spacing

(Inches)

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Connector

Type

Pole Connector

Type

Style Number

3-1/2 800 Short

Medium

Long

314C996G01

314C996G02

314C996G03

Mounting Bracket

Style Number

315C270H01

N-Frame

Panelboard Connecting Straps

Bus

Spacing

(Inches)

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Connector

Type

Pole Connector

Type

Style Number

3-1/2 1200 Short

Medium

Long

505C606G04

505C606G05

505C606G06

Mounting Bracket (Four (4) Required)

Style Number

315C270H01

Mounting Bracket

Number of Poles Style Number

2 624B600H02

3 624B600H01

F-Frame

Panelboard Connecting Straps

Bus

Spacing

(Inches)

Continuous

Current

Rating

(Amperes)

Pole Connector Type

Center Outside

Style Number

5-3⁄4-Inch Deep Box, 600 Vac Maximum

2-3/4

100

150

673B142G02

673B142G04

673B142G09

673B142G10

673B142G03

3-1/2

100

150

1253C72G01

1253C73G03

1253C73G01

1253C72G03

1253C73G06

1253C73G05

Mounting Bracket

Number of Poles Style Number

2, 3 208B297H01

Mounting Bracket

Number of Poles Style Number

2, 3 208B264H01

Mounting Bracket

Number of Poles Style Number

2, 3 1576707

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

178 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Handle Mechanisms

Flange Mounted Flex Shaft

The Flex Shaft type handle mecha-

nism is an extra heavy-duty handle

mechanism designed for mounting

in flange-type enclosures. An oper-

ating handle, flexible shaft, and

mechanism are required for

standard application.

The handle can be locked in the

RESET position with up to three

padlocks. The handle is suitable

for Types 1, 3R, 4➀, 4X➀, and 12 fab-

ricated enclosures. The handle fits

the industry standard cutout.

Eight lengths of shafts are available

for use with the wide range of

depths of various enclosures (3 feet

through 10 feet). These choices

enable this mechanism to be

mounted in various depth, width,

and height enclosures.

Note: when selecting the length of

shaft, ensure minimum bending

radius of 4 inches is maintained

to operate properly.

The standard method of shipment

includes the mechanism preset at

the factory; however, minor field

adjustments may be required.

For this publication, the term

Circuit Breaker shall also include

the molded case switch and Series C

motor circuit protector (HMCP).

UL File E64893.

Ordering Information

Catalog Number includes complete

assembly consisting of C371 handle,

flexible shaft, operating mechanism,

and door interlock hardware to fit

industry standard flange cutout.

Length of Flex Shaft

(in feet)

Catalog

Number

F-Frame➁

F1S03C

F1S04C

F1S05C

F1S06C

F1S07C

F1S08C

F1S09C

F1S10C

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15609

J-Frame➁

F2S03C

F2S04C

F2S05C

F2S06C

F2S07C

F2S08C

F2S09C

F2S10C

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15605

K-Frame➁

F3S03C

F3S04C

F3S05C

F3S06C

F3S07C

F3S08C

F3S09C

F3S10C

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15604

L- and M-Frames

F4S04

F4S05

F4S06

F4S10

N-Frame

F5S04

F5S05

F5S06

F5S10

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15606

R-Frame

F6S04

F6S05

F6S06

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15606

➀Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available.

Add suffix X to complete catalog number.

➁Add suffix I to complete catalog number for

IEC handle. Add suffix L to complete catalog

number for 6-inch handle.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15606

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 179

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Handle Mechanisms

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 14439

Flange Mounted

Type SM Safety

The SM safety handle mechanism

provides a means of externally oper-

ating a circuit breaker mounted in an

enclosure and is designed to reduce

the possibility of circuit breaker tam-

pering. The handle mechanism is

especially suited for use in automo-

tive and machine tool industries

through its conformance to Type 12

and J. I. C. requirements. A specially

modified handle mechanism for

Type 4 enclosure application is also

available order by description. The

handle mechanism will accept up to

three padlock shackles, each with a

maximum diameter of 3/8 inch

(9.52mm). UL File E64893.

Ordering Information

Description Catalog Number

F-Frame

Right-Hand Mounting Enclosure Cover Hinged on Left SM150R

Left-Hand Mounting Enclosure Cover Hinged on Right SM150L

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C274

J-Frame

Right-Hand Mounting Enclosure Cover Hinged on Left SM250JR

Left-Hand Mounting Enclosure Cover Hinged on Right SM250JL

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C274

K-Frame

Right-Hand Mounting Enclosure Cover Hinged on Left SM400KR

Left-Hand Mounting Enclosure Cover Hinged on Right SM400KL

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C284

L- and M-Frames

Hinged on Left SM600R

Hinged on Right SM600L

➀Width spacer kits cannot be used with short

rod at minimum enclosure depth.

J-Frame

For use with Type 1

Enclosure Catalog

SMCU250JD

For use with Type 12

Enclosure Catalog

CMCU250JD

Through-the-Door

Type MC Motor Control

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 14572

The MC motor control handle mecha-

nism is a linear-operating, fixed-

depth mechanism designed for

through-the-door mounting in stan-

dardized and shallow depth enclo-

sures. The handle mechanism pro-

vides positive operation and direct

disconnect status indication. It is

interlocked with the enclosure door

so that the door can be opened only

when the handle is set to OFF.

(A defeater, supplied with the handle

mechanism, can be used to bypass

the interlock for maintenance and

inspection.) The handle mechanism

will accept up to three padlock shack-

les, each with a maximum diameter

of 3/8 inch (7.92 mm).UL File E56845.

Ordering Information

Description Catalog Number

F-Frame

For use with Type 1

Enclosure Catalog

SMCU150FD

For use with Type 12

Enclosure Catalog

CMCU150FD

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C273

K-Frame

For use with Type 1

Enclosure Catalog

SMCU400KD

For use with Type 12

Enclosure Catalog

CMCU400KD

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C283

M-Frames

For use with Type 1

Enclosure Catalog

SMCU600LD

For use with Type 12

Enclosure Catalog

CMCU600LD

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

180 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Handle Mechanisms

Through-the-Door Rotary

These compact rotary handle mech-

anisms are especially designed for

use with the GD/GC/GHC circuit pro-

tection devices. The Close-Coupled

version is designed for mounting in

a shallow enclosure, while the Vari-

Depth is suitable for deep enclosures.

Both G-frame handle mechanisms

are suitable for use on Type 1 enclo-

sures. In addition, the Vari-Depth

handle mechanism is offered for use

with Types 3R, 12, and 4X enclosures.

The new handles are a compact,

plastic, general purpose design

which is easy to install. These mech-

anisms are commonly used where

high volume, standardized enclo-

sures are being fabricated.

The Close-Coupled design is avail-

able with or without a shroud. The

handle is offered in two colors; black

or yellow. An escutcheon ring and

interlock clip are provided as stan-

dard. This standard design includes

a lock-off feature.

The Vari-Depth design includes an

operating mechanism, shaft, and

external handle. The handle is avail-

able in two colors; black or yellow.

An external lock-off is included in

the handle design. The shaft may be

cut to size to fit the enclosure.

UL and CSA listed.

Ordering Information

Breaker

Frame

Enclosure

Type

Handle

Color

Shaft

Length

Shroud

Included

Catalog

Number

G-Frame Vari-Depth Design

(Catalog Number includes complete assembly consisting of handle, shaft, and operating mechanism.)

GD/GC/GHC

Type 1

Type 3R/12/4X

Black

Yellow

Black

Yellow

14 inches – HRGCV11L

HRGCV31L

HRGCV14L

HRGCV34L

G-Frame Close-Coupled Design

(Catalog Number includes complete assembly consisting of operating handle and door interlock.)

GD/GC/GHC

Type 1

Black

Yellow

–No

Yes

HRGCC10

HRGCC1S

HRGCC30

HRGCC3S

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15567 (Close Coupled);

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15569 (Variable Depth)

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 181

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Handle Mechanisms

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15602

N-Frame

HM5R06

HM5R12

HM5R16

HM5R24

6648C22G11

6648C23G07

4217B37G04

4217B37G01

4217B37G02

4217B37G03

WHM5R06

WHM5R12

WHM5R16

WHM5R24

WHM5R06X

WHM5R12X

WHM5R16X

WHM5R24X

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15601

L- and M-Frames

HM4R06

HM4R12

HM4R16

HM4R24

6648C22G11

6648C23G07

4217B37G04

4217B37G01

4217B37G02

4217B37G03

WHM4R06

WHM4R12

WHM4R16

WHM4R24

WHM4R06X

WHM4R12X

WHM4R16X

WHM4R24X

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15600

K-Frame

HM3R06

HM3R12

HM3R16

HM3R24

6648C22G01

6648C23G13

4217B37G04

4217B37G01

4217B37G02

4217B37G03

WHM3R06

WHM3R12

WHM3R16

WHM3R24

WHM3R06X

WHM3R12X

WHM3R16X

WHM3R24X

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15599

J-Frame

HM2R06

HM2R12

HM2R16

HM2R24

6648C22G01

6648C23G02

4217B37G04

4217B37G01

4217B37G02

4217B37G03

WHM2R06

WHM2R12

WHM2R16

WHM2R24

WHM2R06X

WHM2R12X

WHM2R16X

WHM2R24X

Through-the-Door Rotary

The general purpose rotary handle

mechanisms are suitable for use

with Types 1, 3R, (4, 4X), and 12

fabricated enclosures. They are

designed for use with Series C

F-frame circuit breakers, molded

case switches, and motor circuit

protectors (HMCP).

Required for a standard application

are the operating handle, shaft, and

mechanism.

The operating handle has been

designed to meet NFPA 79 require-

ments. It may be mounted in either

the horizontal or the vertical direc-

tion. The handle was ergonomically

designed with extra clearance for a

“gloved hand” to operate. It may be

padlocked in the OFF position utiliz-

ing 3 padlocks.

The standard label on the operating

handle indicates ON/Tripped/OFF/

Reset. UL File E64893

To meet the various enclosure

depths, four variable depth shafts

are offered (6-inch, 12-inch, 16-inch,

and 24-inch). Each shaft includes a

support brace to ensure proper

alignment. In addition, the 16-inch

and 24-inch extra long shafts include

an adjustable support bracket.

The standard mechanism located on

the breaker does include means for

internally locking the breaker in the

“OFF” position with up to three

padlocks each with a maximum

diameter of.312-inch.

Type 4/4X handles are similar to stan-

dard handles except they include an

internal neoprene gasket. Type 4/4X

handle style number is 6648C22G03.

Due to gasketing effect between the

handle and the housing, the handle

may not indicate a tripped position.

Accessories

As an option, an auxiliary switch is

offered so that the control panel

builder may electrically indicate the

status of the breaker. This accessory

would be mounted on the mecha-

nism and comes with 24-inch pigtail

leads.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 15594

Ordering Information

Shaft

Length

(Inches)

Complete

Catalog

Number➀

Separate Style Number Catalog Number

Standard

Handle➂

Breaker

Mechanism➃

Shaft➄IEC IP65➄➅ IEC IP66➄➅

F-Frame

HM1R06

HM1R12

HM1R16

HM1R24

6648C22G01

6648C23G11

4217B37G04

4217B37G01

4217B37G02

4217B37G03

WHM1R06

WHM1R12

WHM1R16

WHM1R24

WHM1R06X

WHM1R12X

WHM1R16X

WHM1R24X

Style Number 5108A61G01

Refer to CD-ROM, SA.74A.01.T.E,

for replacement type Vari-depth

and AMT handle mechanisms.

➀Complete catalog number includes the stan-

dard handle, mechanism, shaft, and support

brace/bracket.

➁Handle is designed suitable for Types 1, 3R,

and 12 enclosures. Use style number

6648C22G03 for Type 4/4X handle or add X

suffix to complete catalog number.

➂The standard handle label indicates ON/

Tripped/OFF/Reset.

➂Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support

bracket and its parts.

➃Longer shafts (16-inch and 24-inch) include

an adjustable support extension.

➄IEC Handle Mechanism supplied with Metric

thread mounting hardware.

➅Complete Catalog Number includes a

handle, mechanism and shaft.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

182 March 1999

Door Operated Interlock Defeater

Kit for Type SM Mechanisms

Required when door hardware is not

used, operates as door closes. Addi-

tional method of securing door such

as screw latch, also required (sup-

plied by box manufacturer).

Door Hardware listed in this section

may be used with Types SM and

AMT handle mechanisms.

Three choices of door hardware and

an auxiliary handle are offered to

provide the best latching scheme for

individual needs. The door hard-

ware is designed with a provision

for padlocking, and a coin-proof slot

that requires the use of a tool to

open the door.

Select desired hardware below.

Additional latches can be ordered

from accessories section if desired.

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Handle Mechanisms

Description Style Number

Door Operated

Interlock Defeater Kit 623B214G02

Description Style Number

For Door Hardware Using Sliding Latches

Right- or Left-Hand Mounting 622B747G01

For Door Hardware Using Rolling Latches

Right-Hand Mounting 370D801G04

Left-Hand Mounting 370D802G04

Description Style Number

Dress Nameplate 373D260G05

Hardware

Item

Description and

Catalog Number

With sliding latches for smaller

panels up to approx. 30-inch high.

Catalog Number

Right Hand: DH1R

Left Hand: DH1L

Instruction Leaflet/FRED

Number 13327(L); 13326(R)

With 2-roller latches for

intermediate panels up to

approx. 40-inch high.

Catalog Number

Right Hand: DH2R

Left Hand: DH2L

Instruction Leaflet/FRED

Number 13325(L); 13324(R)

With 3-roller latches for larger

panels, approx. 40-inch and

higher.

Catalog Number

Right Hand: DH3R

Left Hand: DH3L

Instruction Leaflet/FRED

Number 13323(L); 13322(R)

Auxiliary handle for larger panels.

Catalog Number

Right Hand: DH4R

Left Hand: DH4L

Door Hardware

F-, J-, K-, L- and M-Frames

Note: Right-hand enclosure cover

hinged on left, left-hand enclosure

cover hinged on right.

Accessories

Dress Nameplates:

Required to meet automo-

tive specifications. Mounts

from inside enclosure and

covers operating mecha-

nism mounting bolts;

makes mechanism non-

removable when enclosure

door is closed.

Description Style Number

Electrical Interlock Kit 622B747G01

Electrical Interlock Kit: Provides 1

N.C. and 1 N.O. contacts (SPDT

switch) for use with auxiliary cir-

cuits. Mounts to end of mechanism

housing as shown.

Auxiliary Latch Kits: Provide an

additional latch for use with applica-

tions where two point latching may

not be adequate.

Sliding Latch Rolling Latch

Description Style Number

Remote Mounting Kit 505C367G01

Remote Mounting Kit (J-Frame)

Enables the operating mechanism to

be mounted remotely on a vertical

centerline from the circuit breaker or

disconnect switch.

Handle Extension

Handle extension is not included with

J-, K-, L-, and M-Frame breakers. It

must be purchased separately.

Handle extension is included with

breaker with N- and R-Frame

breakers.

Frame Catalog Number

J, KHEX3

L, MHEX4

Frame Catalog Number

NHEX5

RHEX6

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 183

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

Current Limiters

Type LFD

The LFD current limiter is an acces-

sory that bolts to the load end of a

standard FDB or FD thermal-mag-

netic circuit breaker, providing

200,000A interrupting capacity at up

to 600 Vac. LFD current limiters for

thermal-magnetic circuit breakers

are listed with Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc., under File E47239.

Ordering Information

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C407

Circuit Breaker Rating Amperes➀Catalog Number

15-70

80-160

LFD3070R

LFD3150R

➀Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed under

UL File E64983.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

184 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

Series C External Accessories

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C614 Diagram

Ordering Information

Catalog Number

GFAU – Ground Fault Alarm Unit

Style Number

1264C67G01 – Face Mounting Bracket

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C894 Diagram

Ordering Information

Description Catalog Number

Potential Transformer Module DOPTMLN

Ground Fault Alarm Unit

Potential Transformer Module

The Ground Fault Alarm Unit is a

remotely mounted device with a

combination indicating light/test

button that will light when the

breaker trips or alarms on ground

fault. The Ground Fault Alarm Unit

requires a separate 120 Vac power

source to power the light and the

internal relay which has 1 N.O. and

1 N.C. contacts for remote indica-

tion. The Ground Fault Alarm Unit

can be panel mounted for ordering

with an optional face mounting

bracket. For use on Digitrip 310 only.

K- through N-frame.

The Potential Transformer Module is

required for Series C, Digitrip OPTIM

1050, to provide a voltage input to

allow the trip unit to monitor power

and energy as well as power factor.

The Potential Transformer Module is

a 6 VA transformer with a primary

voltage input of up to 600V line to

line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are pro-

vided on the primary of the trans-

former and can be used for isolation

purposes during dielectric testing.

The device is normally panel

mounted and can feed up to 16

OPTIM trip units.

➀Model 550 OPTIMs require the Cutler-Hammer

PowerNet field upgrade kit.

IQ Energy Sentinel

The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly

accurate, microprocessor-based,

breaker-mounted device designed to

Solid-State (Electronic)

Portable Test Kit

The solid-state (electronic) portable

test kit provides verification of per-

formance of all ratings of Digitrip

310 electronic trip units installed in

Series C circuit breakers while in

service under varying load and/or

phase imbalance. The test kit oper-

ates on 120-volt, 50/60 Hz power; it

includes complete instructions and

test times for testing long time,

short time/instantaneous operation

and optional ground fault operation

of the circuit breaker.

Ordering Information

Description Catalog Number

Solid-State (Electronic)

Portable Test Kit STK2

monitor power and energy readings.

It represents an alternative to watt

meters, watt-hour meters, and watt

demand meters. Key advantages

include savings in space, lower

installation costs, and remote moni-

toring capability.

The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on

the load side of a Series C F-frame

(150 ampere) circuit breaker. It can

be applied on three-phase, four-wire

systems, or single-phase, three-wire

systems with voltage connected

through phases A and C.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 17437

For more information see

Descriptive Bulletin 8178.

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 185

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

Software

Auxiliary Power Module

The Auxiliary Power Module is a

power supply requiring 120 Vac

input at 50 or 60 Hz that provides a

32 Vdc output➀. The Auxiliary Power

Module provides control power for

testing an OPTIM trip unit when

other means of control power is not

available or for continuous OPTIMizer

operation versus temporary with a

battery. The Auxiliary Power Module

connects into the top of the Digitrip

OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle.

The main application for the Auxil-

iary Power Module would be for the

testing of a stand-alone non-commu-

nicating OPTIM breaker that ordi-

narily would not have control power.

Ordering Information

Catalog Number

PRTAAPM

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Series C External Accessories

OPTIM System Components

Series C Digitrip OPTIM trip units

can communicate back to a central

Personal Computer by installing

Cutler-Hammer PowerNet software➁.

In addition other software packages

are available to allow the user to

configure the trip units as well as

monitor system performance.

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C890

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C893

Ordering Information

Catalog Number

BIM

Instruction Leaflet/FRED Number 29C892

Ordering Information

Catalog Number

OPTIMizer – Standard Package

The Breaker Interface Module (BIM)

is a panel mounted user interface

device that is mounted on the front

of an electrical assembly or at a

remote location. The BIM is used to

access, configure, test and display

information for OPTIM trip units and

other devices. The BIM consists of

four display windows, eight function

buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical

time/current curve to provide

breaker status, operational informa-

tion, protection status and energy

monitoring. A 24 Vdc power supply

is required to provide power to the

BIM. This is supplied by the switch-

board builder to Cutler-Hammer

specifications. The BIM is a member

of the Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

family of communicating devices

that connects OPTIM trip units,

Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and

energy sentinels as a subnetwork

system. The BIM can also be con-

nected to a main network via a PONI

module to Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

software.

Breaker Interface Module

(BIM)

Digitrip OPTIMizer

The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-

held programmer that is used to

access, configure, test and display

information from OPTIM trip units.

The OPTIMizer plugs into the front

of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-

pin telephone jack and is powered

by a nine-volt battery or the auxil-

iary power module. In addition,

a three-pin INCOM network connec-

tion is also provided to program

other OPTIM devices on the system.

An Auxiliary Power Module connec-

tion provides a trip test when con-

trol power is not present at the

breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied

as a standard package to include the

programmer, the eight-pin connec-

tion cord, battery and carrying case.

The Auxiliary Power Module is

optional.

Note: 24 Vdc Power Supply

A 24 Vdc power supply is required for all Digitrip

OPTIM trip units that are required to communi-

cate either on the main Cutler-Hammer PowerNet

network or as a subnetwork to a BIM. The break-

er’s load is 45 mA of current. Typically one power

supply is required per switchboard and can pro-

vide control power to a BIM and the OPTIM trip

units. The 24 Vdc power supply should be an

“isolated high quality” power supply with a

“CE” label, and is normally provided by the

switchboard manufacturer to Cutler-Hammer

recommendations.

➀The OPTIMizer can work off of 32 Vdc control

power, although 24 Vdc is the standard on

OPTIM breakers.

➁Model 550 OPTIMS require the Cutler-Hammer

PowerNet field upgrade kit.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

186 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Special Modifications

Special Calibration➀

Special non-UL-listed calibrations

are available for certain ambient

temperatures other than 40°C and

for frequencies other than 50/60 Hz

or Dc. Reduced interrupting ratings

will apply for 400 Hz applications.

Maximum thermal calibration is

limited to 135A at 400 Hz.

See Application Data 29-160 for

information regarding special

conditions.

50°C Calibration➀

Add suffix “V” to catalog number

for complete breaker, listed above,

when ordering listed ampere ratings

for breakers to be used in 50°C

ambients.

Suffix H01 400 Hz.

Moisture-Fungus Treatment

All Series C circuit breaker cases are

molded from glass-polyester which

does not support the growth of fun-

gus. Any parts which are susceptible

to the growth of fungus will require

special treatment.

Freeze-Tested Circuit

Breakers

The circuit breakers may be ordered

with freeze testing. This option uses

special lubrication and mechanical

operation is verified at -40°C.

Suffix J01 Fungus Treated

Suffix F01 Freeze Tested.

Marine Applications

F-Frame circuit breakers can be sup-

plied to meet the following marine

specifications:

U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46 ABS –

American Bureau of Shipping

IEEE 45

These specifications generally

require molded case circuit breakers

to be supplied with 50°C ambient

calibration, special nameplating,

and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-

in adapter kits are used, no termi-

nals need be supplied.

Series C circuit breakers can also be

supplied to meet UL489 Supplement

SA (Marine Use) and UL489 Supple-

ment SB (Naval Use).

UL489 Supplement SA applies to

vessels over 65 feet in length.

Requirements include 40°C ambient

calibration, special labeling, and

no use of aluminum conductors or

terminals.

UL489 Supplement SB requires 50°C

ambient calibration, vibration test-

ings, special nameplating and no

use of aluminum conductors or

terminals.

Suffix H08 “Marine.”

Suffix H09 “Naval.”

➀Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc.

➁For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such

as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN50022.

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 187

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Enclosures

NEMA 7, 9 Hazardous

Location

Cast Aluminum, Explosionproof

Surface Mounting

15-800 Ampere Range

600 Volts Ac, 250 Volts Dc

Hazardous location, Class I, Groups B

(except XFDN050), C, D; Class II,

Groups E, F, G. This special service

cast aluminum enclosure is supplied

with a wide, machined flanged cover

to prevent igniting outside atmo-

spheres by arcing from inside the

enclosure. Front operable, the handle

padlocks in the Off position. Enclo-

sures rated 600 amperes and above

have lift-off hinges for ease of assem-

bly. UL and cUL File Number E71279.

NEMA 3R Rainproof

Surface Mounting

NEMA 4/4X, 5 Water

and Dustproof

NEMA 12 Dustproof

Surface Mounting

NEMA 1 General Purpose

No Knockouts or Other Openings

15-1200 Ampere Range

600 Volts Ac, 500 Volts Dc

The Type 12 enclosure is designed in

line with specifications for special

industry application where unusually

Surface or Flush Mounting

15-1200 Ampere Range

600 Volts Ac, 500 Volts Dc

NEMA 1 enclosed breakers are

designed for indoor use in commer-

cial buildings, apartment buildings

and other areas where a general pur-

pose enclosure is applicable. The

breaker is front operable and is capa-

ble of being padlocked in the Off

position. (Padlocking not available

on enclosures for Quicklag break-

ers.) Ratings through 1200 amperes

are listed with Underwriters Labora-

tories, Inc. as suitable for service

entrance application. Both surface

and flush mounted enclosures are

available. UL File Number E7819.

CSA File Number LR84319.

Interchangeable Hubs (through

400 amperes)15-1200 Ampere Range

600 Volts Ac, 500 Volts Dc

This general purpose outdoor ser-

vice center employs a circuit breaker

inside a weatherproof sheet steel

enclosure to serve as a main discon-

nect and protective device for feeder

circuits. The operating handle can be

padlocked in the Off position, and is

interlocked to prevent the door from

opening when the breaker is On. Rat-

ings through 1200 amperes are

listed by Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc. as suitable for service entrance

application. UL File Number E7819.

CSA File Number LR84319.

Stainless Steel – Type 304

Surface Mounting

15-1200 Ampere Range

600 Volts Ac, 500 Volts Dc

This enclosure meets NEMA 4/4X

and 5 requirements for water and

dustproof applications and has no

knockouts or other openings. It is

particularly well suited for use in

dairies, borax mines, breweries,

paper mills and other process indus-

tries. The operating handle can be

padlocked in the Off position, and is

interlocked to prevent the door from

opening when the breaker is On.

Ratings through 1200 amperes are

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed

as suitable for service entrance

application. UL File Number E7819.

CSA File Number LR84319.

severe conditions involving oil, cool-

ant, dust and other foreign materials

exist in the operating atmosphere.

The handle padlocks in the Off posi-

tion and the cover is interlocked with

the handle mechanism to prevent

opening the cover with the circuit

breaker in the On position. Ratings

through 1200 amperes are listed by

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as

suitable for service entrance applica-

tion. A NEMA 12 semi-dust-tight

design which includes knockouts

is available. These units are rated

15-400 amperes, 600 volts Ac, 500

volts Dc. UL File Number E7819.

CSA File Number LR84319.

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

188 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Enclosures

Raintight Hubs

All rainproof enclosures

30A through 400A are

shipped with plate over

cutout. Hubs are not

supplied with screws

on 30A through 400A

enclosures. Use screws

from plate.

Hub Diameter in Inches Catalog Number

Small Hubs

For use with RGDN

and RFDN

3⁄4

1-1⁄4

1-1⁄2

DS075H1

DS100H1

DS125H1

DS150H1

DS200H1

Large Hubs

For use with RJDN.

(RKDN has two cutouts)

2-1⁄2

R1H200

R1H250

R1H300

Required if using Type DS hubs

on RJDN and RKDN enclosures.

R1HA

➀Enclosures only shown above; if an assembled enclosed

circuit breaker is required refer to Cutler-Hammer Satellite.

➁Suitable for use with one-pole breaker base mounting plate kit.

QCCBP required.

➂Enclosure must have date stamp later than 4-15-98.

➃Maximum wire size: 4/0.

➄Availability to be announced.

➅LCL requires additional adapter plate 1223C06G01.

➆LA-P requires additional adapter plate S/N 1223C06G02.

➇If ground fault protection is required, contact regional satellite.

Enclosure Only Catalog Numbers Selection Guide➀

Breaker Frame Breaker

Ampere Range

Enclosure

NEMA Class Catalog Number

Series C Breakers

GC, GHC, GD

2- and 3-Pole only

GHCGFEP➁

1-Pole Only

15-100 1 Surface

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SGDN100➁

RGDN100

JGDN100

DGDN100

WGDN100

EHD, FD, FDB,

HFD, FDC

15-100 1 Surface

1 Flush

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SFDN100

FFDN100

RFDN100

JFDN100

DFDN100

WFDN100

EHD, FD, FDB

HFD, FDC

15-50

60-225➃

7/9 Cast Aluminum

XFDN050

XFDN225

FD, FDB, HFD, FDC,

ED, EDH, EDC

125-225 1 Surface

1 Flush

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SFDN225

FFDN225

RFDN225

JFDN225

DFDN225

WFDN225

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 125-250 1 Surface

1 Flush

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SJDN250

FJDN250

RJDN250

JJDN250

DJDN250

WJDN250

JD, JDB, HJD, JDC 125-250 7/9 Cast Aluminum XJDN250

KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK 125-400 1 Surface

1 Flush

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SKDN400

FKDN400

RKDN400

JKDN400

DKDN400

WKDN400

KD, KDB, HKD, KDC, DK 125-400 7/9 Cast Aluminum XKDN400

LD, LDB, HLD, LDC 300-600 1 Surface

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SLDN600

RLDN600

JLDN600

WLDN600

LD, LDB, HLD, LDC

MD, MDS

300-600

400-800

7/9 Cast Aluminum XMCN800

MD, MDS, ND, NDC,

HND

400-1200 1 Surface

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SNDN1200

RNDN1200

JNDN1200

WNDN1200

ND, HND, NDC 7/9 Cast Aluminum XNDN1200

Earth Leakage Breakers➄

ELFD, ELHFD and ELFDC

(3-Pole Only)

15-100 1 Surface

1 Flush

12K

4/4X

SFD100E

FFD100E

RFDN100E

JFDN100E

DFDN100E

WFDN100E

Current Limit-R Breakers

FCL 15-100 3R

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

RFDN150

JFDN150

DFDN150

WFDN150

LCL➅125-400 1 Surface

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

SNDN1200

RNDN1200

JNDN1200

WNDN1200

TRI-PAC Breakers

FB-P 15-100 3R

12K

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

RFDN150

JFDN150

DFDN150

WFDN150

LA-P➆ 70-400 1 Surface

4/4X

SNDN1200

RNDN1200

JNDN1200

WNDN1200

NB-P 500-800 12

4/4X, 5 St. Steel

JNDPN800

WNDPN800

Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable➇

Maximum

Enclosure Rating

(Amperes)

Main Lug Size

Cu/Al

Ground Lug Size

Cu/Al

Catalog

Number

100 (1) 14–1/0 (1) 14–1/0 INK100

250 (1) 6–350 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK250

400 (1) 4–750 kcmil or

(2) 1/0–250 kcmil

(1) 4–300 kcmil INK400

600 (2) 250–500 kcmil (1) 4–300 kcmil INK600

1200 (3) 1/0 to 750 kcmil or

(4) 1/0 to 750 kcmil

(1) #6–250 kcmil INK1200

Breather and Drain, Hazardous Enclosures➄

Description Compliance Conduit

Opening

Catalog

Number

A Universal Breather/

Drain Fitting is installed

in the top of an enclo-

sure to provide ventila-

tion to minimize

condensation and in the

bottom to allow drainage

of accumulated conden-

sation while maintaining

explosion proof integrity.

Type BD:

NEMA 7 – Class I, Groups

C, D; Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB

NEMA 9 – Class II, Groups F, G

1/2 XPBD2

Type DBB:

NEMA 7 – Class I, Groups B,

C, D; Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB

+ Hydrogen

NEMA 9 – Class II, Groups E,

F, G

1/2 XPDBB50

Time/Current Curves, Dimension Sheets, Application Data

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 189

Dimensions and Shipping Weights

Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

Inches and Millimeters.

NEMA 1 Surface Mounted

Catalog

Number

App.

Wt.

Lbs.

Max.

Amperes

Dimensions Conduit Sizes, Inches

ABCDE

Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm

SGDN100

SFDN100

SFDN150

SFDN225

SJDN250

100

150

225

250

171⁄2

231⁄4

3445⁄64

444

591

881

813⁄32

1059⁄64

214

227

69⁄32

713⁄64

160

183

131⁄32

183⁄4

331

476

762

113⁄64

17⁄8

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4, 11⁄2, 2, 21⁄2

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3

SKDN400

SLDN600

SNDN1200

178

400

600

1200

3813⁄16

457⁄8

617⁄32

986

1165

1555

111⁄16

145⁄16

217⁄16

281

364

545

1015⁄16

123⁄8

1513⁄32

278

314

391

469⁄16

6127⁄32

869

1183

1571

29⁄32

129⁄32

131⁄32

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 11⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3, 31⁄2

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 3, 31⁄2, 4

NEMA 1 Flush Mounted

FFDN100

FFDN150

FFDN225

FJDN250

FKDN400

100

150

225

250

400

1813⁄16

249⁄16

361⁄64

401⁄8

478

624

915

1019

923⁄32

1215⁄64

123⁄8

247

311

314

69⁄32

713⁄64

1015⁄16

160

183

278

131⁄32

183⁄4

331

476

762

869

155⁄64

17⁄8

215⁄16

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4, 11⁄2, 2, 21⁄2

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 11⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3, 31⁄2

NEMA 12, 12K Dustproof

JGDN100

JFDN100

JFDN150

JFDN225

JJDN250

JKDN400

JLDN600

JNDPN800

JNDN1200

110

170

100

150

225

250

400

600

800

1200

1929⁄32

2521⁄32

3717⁄32

4111⁄16

485⁄16

6319⁄32

506

652

953

1059

1227

1545

827⁄32

119⁄16

113⁄4

1429⁄32

225

294

298

379

559

95⁄16

107⁄32

141⁄16

151⁄2

175⁄8

237

260

357

394

448

1817⁄32

249⁄32

3549⁄64

3915⁄16

469⁄16

–

6127⁄32

471

617

909

1014

1183

–

1571

145⁄64

115⁄16

131⁄32

159⁄64

–

131⁄32

150

–

DGDN100

DFDN100

DFDN150

DFDN225

DJDN250

DKDN400

100

150

225

250

400

1929⁄32

2521⁄32

3717⁄32

4111⁄16

506

652

953

1059

827⁄32

119⁄16

113⁄4

225

294

298

95⁄16

107⁄32

141⁄16

237

260

357

–

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4,11⁄2, 2, 21⁄2

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 11⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3, 31⁄2

NEMA 3R Rainproof

RGDN100

RFDN100

RFDN150

RFDN225

RJDN250

100

150

225

250

1929⁄32

2521⁄32

371⁄2

458

603

891

827⁄32

119⁄16

225

294

95⁄16

107⁄32

237

260

1817⁄32

249⁄32

3549⁄64

471

617

909

145⁄64

115⁄16

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 1, 11⁄4, 2, 21⁄2

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 2, 21⁄2, 3

RKDN400

RLDN600

RNDN1200

175

400

600

1200

4111⁄16

485⁄16

6319⁄32

997

1227

1615

113⁄4

1429⁄32

298

379

559

141⁄16

151⁄2

175⁄8

357

394

448

3915⁄16

469⁄16

6127⁄32

1014

1183

1571

131⁄32

159⁄64

131⁄32

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 21⁄2, 3, 31⁄2

1⁄4, 1⁄2, 3⁄4, 3, 31⁄2, 4

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Enclosures

OFF

(Continued)

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

190 March 1999

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Enclosures

123G-MTG.

HOLES (3)

8 7 6

F-MTG.

CONDUIT POSITION NO.

E-MTG.

CONDUIT POSITION NO.

123G-MTG.

HOLES (4)

F-MTG.

E-MTG.

8 7 6

CONDUIT POSITION NO.

123

G-MTG.

HOLES (4)

F-MTG.

8 7 6

E-MT

Dimensions and Shipping Weights

Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.

Inches and Millimeters.

NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel

Catalog

Number

App.

Wt.

Lbs.

Max.

Amperes

Dimensions

ABCDE

Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm

WGDN100

WFDN100

WFDN150

WFDN225

WJDN250

WKDN400

WLDN600

WNDN1200

185

100

150

225

250

400

600

1200

1929⁄32

2521⁄32

371⁄2

4111⁄16

485⁄16

6319⁄32

506

652

953

1059

1227

1545

827⁄32

119⁄16

113⁄4

1429⁄32

225

294

298

379

559

95⁄16

107⁄32

141⁄16

151⁄2

175⁄8

237

260

357

394

448

1817⁄32

249⁄32

3549⁄64

3915⁄16

469⁄16

6127⁄32

471

617

909

1014

1183

1571

145⁄64

115⁄16

131⁄32

159⁄64

131⁄32

AON

OFF

NEMA 4/4X, 5 Stainless Steel

Catalog

Number

Breaker

Size

(Amperes)

Overall

Enclosure

Mounting

Conduit Hinged

Cover

Standard

Conduit

Weight

(lbs.)

Dia.

No.

A B C D E F G H I J Size Location

XFDN050

XFDN225

XJDN250

XKDN400

XMCN800

XNDN1200

100/225

250

400

600/800

1200➀

251⁄2

381⁄2

443⁄4

503⁄4

105⁄8

121⁄2

203⁄4

83⁄4

101⁄8

111⁄4

123⁄8

151⁄4

513⁄16

75⁄8

83⁄4

97⁄8

121⁄2

123⁄4

101⁄2

111⁄2

231⁄2

1⁄2

13⁄4

21⁄8

61⁄2

31⁄4

31⁄2

43⁄4

25⁄8

43⁄4

51⁄2

11⁄4

21⁄2

2 & 7

1, 3 & 6, 8

120

180

460

600

Conduit Openings

Refer to outline dimensions for size and

location of standard conduit openings.

In addition, 1⁄2-inch openings are drilled

and tapped for breather and drain. Unless

ordered with breather and drain, these

openings are plugged. Refer to Cutler-

Hammer for list price of breather and

drain.

Diagram 1

Diagram 2 Diagram 3

➀Power cables must enter and leave from

opposite ends (through feed).

Circuit Breaker Enclosure Interpretation Data

1st Field

Enclosure Type

2nd Field

Breaker Family

3rd Field

Maximum Ampacity

NEMA 1 Flush F

Surface S

NEMA 3R R

NEMA 12 J

NEMA 12K D

NEMA 4, 4X, 5 Stainless W

NEMA 7/9 Cast Al. X

G-Frame

F-Frame

J-Frame

K-Frame

L-Frame

M-Frame

N-Frame

100

150

225

250

400

600

1200 * “N” in this position indicates enclosure complies with 1981 NEC

gutter space requirement.

R FD N* 150

NEMA

Enclosure

Breaker

Frame

Maximum

Ampacity

1st

Field

2nd

Field

3rd

Field

March 1999

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer 191

Molded Case Circuit Breaker

Standards

Series C® molded case circuit break-

ers are designed to conform with

the following standards:

■Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,

Standard UL 489, Molded Case

Circuit Breakers and Circuit

Breaker Enclosures

■National Electrical Manufacturers

Association Standards Publication

No. AB1-1993, Molded Case

Circuit Breakers

■Australian Standard AS 2184,

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

■British Standards Institution

Standard BS 4752: Part 1,

Switchgear and Control Gear

Part 1: Circit Breakers

■Canadian Standards Association

Standard C22.2 No. 5, Service

Entrance and Branch Circuit

Breakers

■International Electrotechnical

Commission Recommendations

IEC 157-1, Circuit Breakers

■Japanese T-Mark Standard

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

■South African Bureau of

Standards, Standard SABS 156,

Standard Specification for

Molded Case Circuit Breakers

■Swiss Electro-Technical Associa-

tion Standard SEV 157-1, Safety

Regulations for Circuit Breakers

■Union Technique de I’Electricite

Standard NF C 63-120, Low Volt-

age Switchgear and Control Gear

Circuit Breaker Requirements

■Verband Deutscher Elektrotech-

niker (Association of German

Electrical Engineers) Standard

VDE 0660, Low Voltage Switch-

gear and Control Gear, Circuit

Breakers

Conformance with these standards

satisfies most local and international

codes, assuming user acceptability

and simplified application.

Series C molded case circuit break-

ers equal or exceed Federal Speci-

fication Classification W-C-375b

requirements for the particular class

associated with the circuit breaker

frame being considered.

Further Information

Circuit Breaker

CD-ROM SA.74A.01.T.E

PG.74A.01.T.E

Cutler-Hammer

192 March 1999

TCC

Quicklag

Miniature Circuit

Breakers UL/CSA

TCC

Title Page

Main Menu

Series C

UL/CSA Power

Breakers

TCC

Series C

IEC 947-2

TCC

Replacement

Circuit Breakers

Help

GFJK

LMNR

Motor

Circuit

Protectors

Earth

Leakage Current

Limiting Engine

Generator

SD - Selection Data

TCC - Time-Current Curves

DS - Dimension Sheets

SPCL & SPHM

Supplementary

Protectors

UL-1077 & IEC

Universal

IEC 947-2

SDSD

TCC

Mining

Service Navy Add-on

Ground

Fault

Direct

Current

Circuit

Breaker

Enclosures

Fusible

Panelboard

Switches

TCC

DS SD

TCC

Selection Data, Time Current Curves, Dimension Data

Miniature and Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker Electronic Catalog

System Requirements

■Processor: 486 or faster

(Pentium or Pentium Pro recommended)

■Operating System: Microsoft Windows 95,

Windows 98, Windows NT 3.5, or Windows NT 4.0

■Memory: 8 MB of available RAM

(16 MB recommended)

■Available Hard Disk Storage Space: 12 MB

■Devices: a CD-ROM drive and a mouse

■Monitor: minimum 640 x 480 resolution and 8-bit color

(256 colors)

Installation Instructions

■This is an autorun CD. Just insert this disk in the

CD-ROM drive and wait for it to launch.

CD-ROM Installation Help Line: U.S.: 1-800-270-5134

Outside of the United States: Contact your local

Cutler-Hammer sales office.

If the CD is not included in this Product Guide, contact

Cutler-Hammer Fulfillment Center at 1-800-957-7050 and

ask for SA.74A.01.T.E.

Navigation Chart of CD-ROM

PG.74A.01.T.E Brochure

1000500965-Brochure 1000500965-Brochure 1000500965-Brochure B6 unilog cesco-content

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation